IBM Printer TF6 User Manual
SureMark 4610 Printers  
ꢀꢁꢂ  
User’s Guide for  
Models TI1, TI2, TI3, TI4, TI8, TI9, TG3,  
TG4, TG8, TG9, TF6, and TM6  
Updated April 2, 2009  
GA27-4151-07  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SureMark 4610 Printers  
ꢀꢁꢂ  
User’s Guide for  
Models TI1, TI2, TI3, TI4, TI8, TI9, TG3,  
TG4, TG8, TG9, TF6, and TM6  
Updated April 2, 2009  
GA27-4151-07  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Updated April 2, 2009  
Note  
Before using this information and the product it supports, be sure to read Appendix H, “Safety information,” on page 197 and  
the general information under Appendix I, “Notices,” on page 203.  
April 2009  
This edition applies to IBM SureMark Printer Models TI1, TI2, TI3, TI4, TI8, TI9, TG3, TG4, TG8, TG9, TF6 and TM6.  
Current versions of Retail Store Solutions documentation are available on the IBM Retail Store Solutions Web site at  
http://www.ibm.com/solutions/retail/store/support/. Click Publications.  
A form for reader’s comments is also provided at the back of this publication. If the form has been removed, address  
your comments to:  
IBM Corporation  
Retail Store Solutions Information Development  
Department ZBDA  
PO Box 12195  
Research Triangle Park, North Carolina 27709 USA  
When you send information to IBM, you grant IBM a nonexclusive right to use or distribute whatever information you  
supply in any way it believes appropriate without incurring any obligation to you.  
© Copyright International Business Machines Corporation 1997, 2006.  
US Government Users Restricted Rights – Use, duplication or disclosure restricted by GSA ADP Schedule Contract  
with IBM Corp.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Updated April 2, 2009  
Contents  
Figures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xi  
Tables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiii  
Preface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xv  
Who should read this manual. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xv  
How this manual is organized . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xv  
Related publications and diskettes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvi  
Where to find more information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvi  
Tell us what you think . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvi  
Summary of changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvii  
GA27-4151-07 (April, 2009) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvii  
GA27-4151-07 (February/March, 2007 update) . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvii  
GA27-4151-07 (May, 2006) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvii  
Web-only update GA27-4151-06 (December, 2005) . . . . . . . . . . . xvii  
GA27-4151-06 (August, 2005) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvii  
Web-only update for corrections to GA27-4151-05 (August, 2004) . . . . . . xvii  
Web-only update for corrections to GA27-4151-05 (August, 2003) . . . . . . xvii  
Web-only update for Model TI8, GA27-4151-05 (April, 2003) . . . . . . . xviii  
Web-only update for GA27-4151-04 (March, 2002) . . . . . . . . . . . xviii  
Web update for GA27-4151-04 (June, 2001) . . . . . . . . . . . . . xviii  
GA27-4151-04 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xviii  
GA27-4151-03 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xix  
GA27-4151-02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xx  
%
Part 1. General information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1  
Chapter 1. Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3  
Printer overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3  
Description of models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4  
Features used with the SureMark printers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6  
Comparison of the SureMark models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7  
Planning information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9  
Your responsibilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9  
Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9  
Communication interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10  
Temperature and humidity limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10  
Physical dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10  
Power requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12  
Hardware requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13  
Software requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13  
Resident code pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15  
Bar codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15  
Chapter 2. Installation instructions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17  
Unpacking the printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18  
Installing a SureMark printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18  
Installing for EIA-232/RS-485 communication. . . . . . . . . . . . . 18  
Installing SureMark for USB communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21  
Using the wall mounting feature. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23  
Installing the fillers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24  
Installing fillers for EIA-232/RS-485 printers . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24  
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1997, 2006  
iii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Updated April 2, 2009  
Installing fillers for USB printers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26  
EIA-232 communication mode selections (all models except TI8, TI9, TG8, TG9) 28  
Baud rate selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28  
EIA-232 communications protocol selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28  
EIA-232 communication mode selections (Models TI8, TI9, TG8, TG9) . . . . 30  
Baud rate selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30  
EIA-232 communications protocol selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30  
USB communication mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31  
USB selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31  
Chapter 3. SureMark installation, service, and utility software . . . . . . 33  
Software adjustments (Models TI1, TI2, TI3, TI4, TI8, TI9, TG3, TG4, TG8, and  
TG9) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34  
Offline configurations for Models TI8, TI9, TG8, TG9 . . . . . . . . . . 34  
Using the IBM Diagnostics for the POS Systems and Peripherals (all models  
except Models TI1 and TI2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34  
Using the reference/service diskettes (Models TI1 and TI2) . . . . . . . 35  
4610 fonts and logos utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37  
Utility diskette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37  
IBM Diagnostics for POS Systems and Peripherals package (all models  
except TI1 and TI2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37  
Proportional font conversion utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37  
Firmware update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37  
Using a firmware update diskette (Models TI1 and TI2 only) . . . . . . . 38  
Using POSS for Windows to update SureMark printer firmware (RS-485 and  
USB only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39  
Using JavaPOS for Windows to update SureMark printer firmware (EIA-232,  
RS-485, and USB). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39  
Updating SureMark firmware using temporary EIA-232 attachment . . . . . 40  
Limitation on updating firmware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41  
Emulating the IBM Model 3 or Model 4 printers . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41  
Limitations for emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41  
Printing saved data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41  
Emulating an Epson single-station printer (single-station only) . . . . . . . 43  
Enabling Epson emulation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43  
Limitations for Epson emulation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43  
MICR data parser sample code (Models TI2, TI4, TI8, TI9, TG4, TG8, and TG9  
only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44  
Resources on the Internet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44  
Part 2. Models TI1, TI2, TI3, TI4, TI8, TI9, TG3, TG4, TG8, TG9 . . . . . . . . . 45  
Chapter 4. Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47  
Operating controls and indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47  
Ribbon loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51  
Paper loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53  
Clearing jams in the check flipper area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55  
MICR reader read head cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56  
Thermal print head cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57  
Document scanner cleaning (Model TI8, TI9, TG8, TG9) . . . . . . . . . 59  
Document scanner calibration (Models TI8, TI9, TG8, TG9) . . . . . . . . 60  
%
Chapter 5. Testing and problem analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61  
Testing the printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61  
Offline tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62  
Customer receipt test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62  
iv SureMark Printers User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Updated April 2, 2009  
Document insert test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63  
MICR reader and check flipper test (Models TI2, TI4, TI8, TI9, TG4, TG8, and  
TG9 only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65  
EIA-232 hex dump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66  
Resetting the printer - offline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66  
Electronic journal dump. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66  
Problem determination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67  
Part 3. Models TF6 and TM6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69  
Chapter 6. Operation (Models TF6 and TM6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71  
Operating controls and indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71  
Paper loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71  
Thermal print head cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73  
Chapter 7. Testing and problem analysis (Models TF6 and TM6) . . . . . 75  
Testing the printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75  
Offline test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76  
EIA-232 hex dump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77  
Resetting the printer - offline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78  
Problem determination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78  
Part 4. Appendixes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79  
Appendix A. Consumable supplies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81  
Paper specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81  
Thermal paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81  
Document insert forms (Models TI1, TI2, TI3, TI4, TI8, TI9, TG3, TG4, TG8,  
and TG9 only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82  
Print ribbons (Models TI1, TI2, TI3, TI4, TI8, TI9, TG3, TG4, TG8, and TG9  
only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83  
Expendable supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83  
%
%
Appendix B. Printer maintenance procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . 85  
Product care procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85  
Service provider system maintenance procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . 85  
Models TI1, TI2, TI3, TI4, TI8, TI9, TG3, TG4, TG8, and TG9. . . . . . . 85  
Models TF6 and TM6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85  
Appendix C. Technical information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87  
General description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87  
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87  
Memory units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89  
Immediate commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89  
Voltage conversion circuitry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89  
RS-485 serial I/O parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90  
Cash drawer connector pin assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90  
EIA-232 connector pin assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91  
EIA-232 parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91  
USB connector pin assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92  
Code page definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92  
Generic code page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93  
Code page 437. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94  
Code page 858. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95  
Code page 860. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96  
Contents  
v
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Updated April 2, 2009  
Code page 863. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97  
Code page 865. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98  
Character fonts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98  
Thermal printing font . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98  
Impact printing fonts (Models TI1, TI2, TI3, TI4, TI8, TI9, TG3, TG4, TG8, and  
TG9) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99  
Appendix D. EIA-232 programming information . . . . . . . . . . . 101  
EIA-232 commands summary by function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104  
Alphabetized EIA-232 commands summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108  
System commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111  
Exercise program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111  
Verify previous commands completed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111  
Status request. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112  
Extended address command-request printer ID . . . . . . . . . . . 112  
Preset or Onetime-Set commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114  
All models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114  
Models TI8 and TI9 only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114  
Download graphics (logo) commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115  
Predefine messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117  
Download user-defined characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118  
Thermal code page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119  
Proportional font . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120  
Impact code page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122  
Flash storage write . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123  
Erase flash EPROM sector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123  
Send checksum of flash EPROM sector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124  
Microcode tolerance (MCT) information - loading . . . . . . . . . . . 124  
Microcode tolerance (MCT) information - request . . . . . . . . . . . 125  
Setup commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129  
Set print mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129  
Set or cancel double-wide mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130  
Set or cancel double-high mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131  
Set or cancel underline mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131  
Set or cancel overline mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131  
Set or cancel invert mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131  
Set or cancel emphasized printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132  
Select maximum print speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132  
Set or cancel unidirectional printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133  
Request document length for landscape print . . . . . . . . . . . . 133  
Set document length for landscape print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133  
Set print station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134  
Select user-defined or resident character sets . . . . . . . . . . . . 134  
Set code page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135  
Set intercharacter spacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135  
Set or cancel rotated characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135  
Set print station parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136  
Select 1/8-inch line spacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136  
Select 1/6-inch line spacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136  
Select color printing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137  
Set line spacing using minimum units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137  
Set sheet eject length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138  
Set horizontal tab positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138  
Set left margin position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138  
Set relative position. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139  
Align positions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139  
vi SureMark Printers User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Updated April 2, 2009  
Set error recovery function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140  
Define document wait time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141  
Status sent to system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141  
Select character for reprinted lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142  
Re-initialize the printer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142  
Enable or disable the feed buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143  
Enable or disable the beeper (Models TF6 and TM6 only) . . . . . . . 143  
Enable or disable upside-down printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144  
Select character size for scalable fonts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145  
Fix font matrix. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146  
Print logo inline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146  
Select thermal paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147  
Bar code commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147  
Print bar code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147  
Select horizontal size of bar code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152  
Select bar code height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152  
Select printing position of human readable information (HRI) . . . . . . 152  
Select font for HRI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153  
Print PDF417 bar code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153  
Print PDF417 bar code using binary mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154  
Select PDF417 ECC (error correction codewords) level . . . . . . . . 154  
Select aspect ratio PDF417 bar code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155  
Enable PDF417 truncation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155  
Print character commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156  
Print and line feed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156  
Print and line feed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156  
Print, form feed, and cut the paper (FF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156  
Print and feed paper n lines. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156  
Print and feed paper using minimum units . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156  
Print and feed paper in reverse using minimum units . . . . . . . . . 157  
Print graphic messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157  
Select and print a graphics (logo) command. . . . . . . . . . . . . 157  
Print predefined graphics (logo) command . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159  
Print predefined messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159  
Miscellaneous commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160  
Tab to next tab stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160  
Return home (select print head location) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160  
Paper cut/DI eject . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161  
Generate drive pulse for cash drawer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161  
Retrieve the flash storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161  
Retrieve size of user flash storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162  
Retrieve printer usage statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162  
Check processing commands (Models TI2, TI4, TI8, TI9, TG4, TG8, and TG9  
only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164  
Models TI8 and TI9 MICR read commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164  
MICR read . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165  
Flip check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166  
Document scanner commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166  
Start scan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166  
Print scanned image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168  
Store scanned image and/or select partial image for retrieval . . . . . . 169  
Retrieve scanned image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172  
Scanner calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173  
Retrieve next image location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174  
Retrieve first unread image location. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174  
Select compression format and scanned image threshold. . . . . . . . 174  
Contents vii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Updated April 2, 2009  
Asynchronous (real-time) commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175  
Real-time requests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175  
Data buffer management and batch printing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176  
Reset line count . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176  
Disable line count . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176  
Hold printing until buffer is released . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177  
Page mode printing commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177  
Select page mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177  
Select standard mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177  
Select printable area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178  
Select printing direction/position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178  
Set vertical position. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178  
Set relative vertical position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179  
Set left margin position (standard mode), set absolute print position (page  
mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179  
Set relative horizontal position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180  
Set printing position. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180  
Print and form feed and cut the paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181  
Print page in page mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181  
Clear print data in page mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181  
Document handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181  
Portrait mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181  
Landscape mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182  
Status summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184  
Message from the printer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184  
Status byte 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184  
Status byte 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185  
Status byte 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185  
Status byte 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185  
Status byte 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186  
Status byte 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186  
Status byte 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186  
Status byte 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186  
Appendix E. Uploading electronic journal data . . . . . . . . . . . 187  
Enable the upload of EJ data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187  
Disable the upload of EJ data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187  
Upload the EJ data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188  
Request the size of the EJ space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188  
Erase the EJ data in the printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188  
Appendix F. Proportional fonts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189  
Preparing the fonts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189  
Implementing proportional fonts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189  
Layout using align commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190  
Layout using set tab position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191  
Appendix G. Emulation support for Epson single-station printer. . . . . 193  
Commands supported in emulation mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193  
Commands with limited support in emulation mode . . . . . . . . . . . 195  
Commands not supported in emulation mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196  
Connectivity differences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196  
Functional differences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196  
Appendix H. Safety information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197  
viii SureMark Printers User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Updated April 2, 2009  
Appendix I. Notices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203  
Electronic emission notices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205  
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) statement . . . . . . . . 205  
European Union EMC Directive conformance statement . . . . . . . . 205  
Industry Canada Class A Emission Compliance statement . . . . . . . 206  
Avis de conformité aux normes d’Industrie Canada . . . . . . . . . . 206  
Germany . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206  
Australia and New Zealand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206  
Chinese Class A warning statement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207  
Japanese power line harmonics compliance statement . . . . . . . . . 207  
Japanese Voluntary Control Council for Interference (VCCI) statement  
207  
Korean communications statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207  
Taiwanese Class A warning statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208  
Taiwan contact information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208  
Cable ferrite requirement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208  
Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208  
Product Recycling and disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209  
Battery return program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210  
For Taiwan:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210  
For the European Union: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211  
For California: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211  
Flat panel displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212  
Monitors and workstations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212  
Trademarks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212  
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213  
Contents ix  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Updated April 2, 2009  
x
SureMark Printers User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Updated April 2, 2009  
Figures  
1. IBM SureMark printers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3  
2. SureMark printer dimensions (Models TI1, TI2, TI3, TI4, TG3, and TG4) . . . . . . . . . . 11  
3. SureMark printer dimensions (Models TI8, TI9, TG8, TG9) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11  
4. SureMark printer dimensions (Models TF6 and TM6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12  
5. Cable connectors and EIA-232 settings switch for thermal/impact SureMark printers . . . . . . 18  
6. Cable connectors for single-station SureMark printers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19  
7. EIA-232 mode switches for single-station SureMark printers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19  
8. EIA-232 and RS-485 cable routing for single-station SureMark printers . . . . . . . . . . . 20  
9. USB Ports for thermal/impact SureMark printers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21  
10. USB ports for single-station SureMark printers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22  
11. USB cable routing for single-station SureMark printers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22  
12. Mounting a single-station SureMark on a wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24  
13. Installing the fillers for EIA-232/RS-485 systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25  
14. Installing the fillers for USB systems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27  
15. SurePOS 500 integration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28  
16. Adjustment and alignment printouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36  
17. Switch for Epson emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43  
18. SureMark printer indicators, controls, and printing stations (Models TI1, TI2, TI3, TI4, TI8, TI9,  
TG3, TG4, TG8, and TG9) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47  
19. Inserting checks for all models except TF6 and TM6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48  
20. Inserting checks or documents in a Model TI2, TI4, TI8, TI9, TG4, TG8, or TG9 printer . . . . . 48  
21. Inserting checks or documents in a Model TI2 or TI4 printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49  
22. Side insertion of documents in a Model TI8 printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49  
23. Printable area of an inserted document (portrait) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50  
24. Printable area of an inserted document (landscape) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50  
25. Opening the ribbon cover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51  
26. Ribbon cartridge loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51  
27. Ribbon path around the print head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52  
28. Paper cover (Models TI1, TI2, TI3, TI4, TI8, TI9, TG3, TG4, TG8, and TG9) . . . . . . . . . 53  
29. Paper loading path (Models TI1, TI2, TI3,TI4, TI8, TI9, TG3, TG4, TG8, and TG9). . . . . . . 54  
30. Removing the lower document insert cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55  
31. Removing the check flipper cartridge (except Models TI8, TI9) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56  
% 32. MICR reader read head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57  
33. Print head and print line area (Models TI1, TI2, TI3, TI4, TI8, TI9, TG3, TG4, TG8, and TG9)  
58  
34. Scanner and print head location (Model TI8, TI9, TG8, TG9). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59  
35. Printer buttons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62  
36. Offline printer test pattern from the customer receipt station (Models TI1, TI2, TI3, TI4, TI8, TI9,  
TG3, TG4, TG8, TG9) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64  
37. MICR reader test results (Models TI2, TI4, and TG4): Good noise level. . . . . . . . . . . 65  
38. MICR reader test results (Models TI8, TI9, TG8, TG9): Good noise level . . . . . . . . . . 65  
39. MICR reader test results: Noise level needs adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66  
40. SureMark printer indicator, control, and printing station (Models TF6 and TM6) . . . . . . . . 71  
41. Paper loading path (Models TF6 and TM6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72  
42. Print head and print line area (Models TF6 and TM6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73  
43. Offline printer test pattern (Models TF6 and TM6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77  
44. Printer’s resident character set - generic code page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93  
45. Code Page 437 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94  
46. Code Page 858 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95  
47. Code Page 860 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96  
48. Code Page 863 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97  
49. Code Page 865 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98  
50. Proportional font example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122  
51. Scanned image layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169  
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1997, 2006  
xi  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Updated April 2, 2009  
52. Scanned image organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170  
xii SureMark Printers User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Updated April 2, 2009  
Tables  
1. Warranty information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5  
2. J2 connector pin assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12  
3. Troubleshooting (Models TI1, TI2, TI3, TI4, TI8, TI9, TG3, TG4, TG8, and TG9). . . . . . . . 67  
4. Troubleshooting (Models TF6 and TM6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78  
5. Station characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88  
6. Sound characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88  
7. Cash drawer connector pin assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90  
8. EIA-232 connector pin functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91  
9. 9-pin to 9-pin EIA-232 connector layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91  
10. 25-pin to 25-pin EIA-232 connector layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91  
11. Standard USB connector pin assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92  
12. Powered USB connector pin assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92  
13. Driver documentation by operating system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103  
14. EIA-232 commands organized by function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104  
15. EIA-232 commands in alphabetical order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108  
16. Memory allocation for Models TI8 and TI9 functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115  
17. MCT command definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125  
18. Fonts for Models TI3, TI4, TG3, TG4, TG8, TG9, TI8, TI9, TF6, and TM6 . . . . . . . . . 129  
19. Fonts for Models TI1 and TI2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130  
20. Width and height for scalable fonts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145  
21. Code 128 character set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149  
22. Print bar code examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152  
23. Buffer sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158  
24. Retrievable usage data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162  
25. Data table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172  
26. Average size for a personal check with little background data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174  
27. Print direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178  
28. Commands supported in Epson emulation mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193  
29. Commands with limited support in Epson emulation mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195  
30. Commands not supported in Epson emulation mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196  
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1997, 2006  
xiii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Updated April 2, 2009  
xiv SureMark Printers User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Updated April 2, 2009  
Preface  
This manual assists you with installation, testing, and problem determination of  
IBM® SureMark™ printers.  
Who should read this manual  
This manual is intended for use by persons who are installing, testing, or  
programming an IBM SureMark printer. The manual should also be used for  
problem determination on the printer.  
How this manual is organized  
Part 1, “General information,” on page 1 contains information that applies to  
SureMark printers in general:  
v Chapter 1, “Introduction” provides an overview of the features and options of the  
SureMark printers.  
v Chapter 2, “Installation instructions” provides information on installing the  
SureMark printers.  
v Chapter 3, “SureMark installation, service, and utility software” provides  
information about using SureMark utilities to setup or modify your system  
configuration.  
Part 2, “Models TI1, TI2, TI3, TI4, TI8, TI9, TG3, TG4, TG8, TG9,” on page 45  
contains information that is specific to the thermal/impact SureMark printers:  
v Chapter 4, “Operation” provides information about the controls and indicators.  
Ribbon loading and paper loading instructions are also included.  
v Chapter 5, “Testing and problem analysis” provides information on testing and on  
problem determination.  
Part 3, “Models TF6 and TM6,” on page 69 contains information that is specific to  
the single-station SureMark printers:  
v Chapter 6, “Operation (Models TF6 and TM6)” provides information on the  
controls and indicators. Paper loading instructions are also included.  
v Chapter 7, “Testing and problem analysis (Models TF6 and TM6)” provides  
information on testing and on problem determination.  
The appendixes contain the following information:  
v Appendix A, “Consumable supplies” provides information about consumable  
supplies.  
v Appendix C, “Technical information” provides information about technical  
specifications.  
v Appendix D, “EIA-232 programming information” provides information about  
EIA-232 programming commands.  
v Appendix E, “Uploading electronic journal data” provides information about  
uploading electronic journal data while the SureMark is in Model 4 emulation  
mode.  
v Appendix F, “Proportional fonts” provides information about creating and using  
proportional fonts.  
v Appendix G, “Emulation support for Epson single-station printer” provides  
expanded information about Epson emulation mode.  
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1997, 2006  
xv  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Updated April 2, 2009  
v Appendix H, “Safety information” provides important safety warnings in several  
languages.  
v Appendix I, “Notices” provides information about trademarks and electronic  
emission notices.  
v For California: provides information about perchlorate material.  
Related publications and diskettes  
v IBM SureMark Printers: Hardware Service Manual, GY27-0355  
v IBM SureMark Printers: Fonts and Logos Utility Diskette  
v IBM SureMark Printers: Firmware Update Diskettes  
v IBM 4693 Point-of-Sale Terminals Reference Diskette  
v IBM 4694/4695 Point-of-Sale Terminals Service Diskette  
v IBM Safety Information—Read This First, GA27-4004.  
v IBM SurePOS 700 Series: System Reference, SA27-4220.  
v IBM SurePOS 500 Series: System Reference, SA27-4255.  
v POSS Programming Reference and User’s Guide, SC30-3560  
Diskettes are available by download from the Internet. See “Resources on the  
Internet” on page 44 for more information.  
For information about ordering IBM publications not shipped with the SureMark  
printers, contact your IBM representative or your place of purchase.  
Where to find more information  
A CD-ROM is available that contains books that are part of the IBM Retail Store  
Solutions Library Collection, SK2T-0331.  
Current versions of Retail Store Solutions documentation and downloadable  
diskettes are available on our Web site. See “Resources on the Internet” on page  
44 for information about accessing the site.  
Tell us what you think  
Your feedback is important in helping to provide the most accurate and high-quality  
information. Please take a few moments to tell us what you think about this book.  
The only way for us to know if you are satisfied with our books, or how we might  
improve their quality, is through feedback from customers like you. If you have any  
comments about this book, there is a comment form at the back of this book. You  
can also get a copy of the form from the PDF version of the book on the Web.  
To access a PDF version of this book, visit the Retail Store Solutions Web site at  
http://www.ibm.com/solutions/retail/store/support/. From there, select Publications.  
After you have filled out the form, return it by mail, by fax, or by giving it to an IBM  
representative. If applicable, include a reference to the specific location of the text  
on which you are commenting. For instance, include the page or table number.  
Between major revisions of this manual we may make minor technical updates. The  
latest softcopy version of this manual is available under Publications on the IBM  
Retail Store Solutions Web site.  
xvi SureMark Printers User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Updated April 2, 2009  
Summary of changes  
This section summarizes the changes included in the latest editions of this manual.  
% GA27-4151-07 (April, 2009)  
%
%
This update provides changes to the MICR reader read head cleaning procedures,  
expandable supplies, and product care procedures.  
%
%
Changes or additions to the text are indicated by a change bar (%) to the left of the  
text.  
GA27-4151-07 (February/March, 2007 update)  
v Model 3 and Model 4 emulation support notes  
v Various clarifications and corrections  
v Updated notices Appendix I, “Notices,” on page 203  
GA27-4151-07 (May, 2006)  
This update provides new part numbers for existing products that are manufactured  
using updated methods or materials required in certain jurisdictions, such as the  
European Union. It also includes other edits based on user feedback.  
Web-only update GA27-4151-06 (December, 2005)  
This update provides new and updated commands and programming information,  
and more references to Models TI8/TG8 and TI9/TG9.  
GA27-4151-06 (August, 2005)  
This Web-only update adds Model TI9 and TG9, as well as references to Model  
TI8.  
Web-only update for corrections to GA27-4151-05 (August, 2004)  
Corrections and clarifications for:  
v “Paper specifications” on page 81  
v “Microcode tolerance (MCT) information - request” on page 125  
v “Re-initialize the printer” on page 142  
v “Start scan” on page 166  
v “Select standard mode” on page 177  
v Minor changes to formatting  
Web-only update for corrections to GA27-4151-05 (August, 2003)  
Corrections and clarifications for:  
v “Document scanner calibration (Models TI8, TI9, TG8, TG9)” on page 60  
v Minor changes to formatting  
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1997, 2006  
xvii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Updated April 2, 2009  
Web-only update for Model TI8, GA27-4151-05 (April, 2003)  
This update adds the new Model TI8 to this User’s Guide. This model provides  
document-scanning capability and a powered flipper.  
Web-only update for GA27-4151-04 (March, 2002)  
This update contains changes to the paper loading procedure for Models TF6 and  
TM6.  
Web update for GA27-4151-04 (June, 2001)  
This update contains the following changes and additions:  
v The location of the Euro character for code page 858 has been corrected. See  
“Code page 858” on page 95.  
v Information on the new Models TG3 and TG4.  
v Command format details about bar codes 128a and 128b.  
v Flash memory usage message. See the remarks in Flash storage write on page  
123.  
v New table for Code 128 character set. See Table 21 on page 149.  
v The commands in Appendix D, “EIA-232 programming information,” on page 101  
are to be used for EIA-232 connections only. Additional information about where  
to find commands when using RS-485 or USB communications has been added  
to the beginning of that appendix.  
GA27-4151-04  
This edition adds information about the new single-station SureMark printers, which  
are Models TF6 and TM6, and also about updates for Models TI3 and TI4.  
Changes for this edition include:  
v Because there are important differences between Models TF6 and TM6, which  
are single-station SureMark printers, and the thermal/impact SureMark printers,  
the book has been reorganized into three parts.  
– Part 1 contains information that is similar for all SureMark models. Information  
about the new single-station printers has been added throughout this part.  
– Part 2 contains information that is specific to the thermal/impact SureMark  
printer Models TI1, TI2, TI3, TI4, TG3, and TG4.  
– Part 3 contains information that is specific to the new single-station SureMark  
printer Models TF6 and TM6.  
v A new thermal font has been added. See “Set print mode” on page 129 and  
“Thermal printing font” on page 98.  
v Support for emulation of an Epson single-station printer has been added. See  
“Emulating an Epson single-station printer (single-station only)” on page 43 for  
information about how to enable emulation and an overview of the limitations to  
using emulation mode. See Appendix G, “Emulation support for Epson  
single-station printer,” on page 193 for detailed information about what Epson  
commands are supported in emulation mode.  
v A font conversion utility has been added as part of the support for proportional  
fonts. See “Proportional font conversion utility” on page 37.  
xviii SureMark Printers User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Updated April 2, 2009  
v Information about uploading electronic journal data while the printer is emulating  
a Model 4 printer has been added. See Appendix E, “Uploading electronic journal  
data,” on page 187.  
v The following commands have been added:  
Note: These commands are not supported for Models TI1 and TI2. Currently  
installed Model TI3, TG3, TI4, and TG4 printers support these commands  
after you download the latest firmware.  
– “Proportional font” on page 120  
– “Select color printing” on page 137  
– n=09 (Align Column Right) for “Align positions” on page 139  
– “Enable or disable upside-down printing” on page 144  
– “Select character size for scalable fonts” on page 145  
– “Fix font matrix” on page 146  
– “Print logo inline” on page 146  
– “Select thermal paper” on page 147  
– n=09 (Code 128A, 128B, and 128C) for “Print bar code” on page 147  
v The following command, which is supported only on Models TF6 and TM6, has  
been added:  
– “Enable or disable the beeper (Models TF6 and TM6 only)” on page 143  
GA27-4151-03  
This edition includes information for the support of a USB logic card.  
Information that was added includes:  
v “USB connector pin assignments” on page 92.  
v USB information has been added to “Voltage conversion circuitry” on page 89.  
v The part number for the available USB cables has been added to “Features used  
with the SureMark printers” on page 6.  
v Information about your responsibilities when using USB communications has  
been added to “Planning information” on page 9.  
v The data rate for USB communications has been added to “Communication  
interfaces” on page 10.  
v USB information has been added to “Hardware requirements” on page 13.  
v Information about installing the SureMark printer for use with USB  
communications has been added to “Installing SureMark for USB communication”  
on page 21.  
v Information about installing fillers for the SureMark printer when the USB feature  
is used has been added to “Installing fillers for USB printers” on page 26.  
v Communication mode information for USB has been added to “USB  
communication mode” on page 31.  
v Relevant information for performing problem determination with USB has been  
added to Table 3 on page 67.  
Summary of changes xix  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Updated April 2, 2009  
GA27-4151-02  
This edition includes information about two new models of the SureMark printer:  
Model TI3 and Model TI4. Because Model TI3 is a new version of Model TI1, and  
Model TI4 is a new version of Model TI2, in some cases only the new model  
number was added to the existing text.  
Information that was added includes:  
v “Comparison of the SureMark models” on page 7, which describes the  
microcode, hardware, and operating system differences.  
v “Firmware update” on page 37, which describes the methods that you can use to  
update the SureMark firmware.  
v “Enable or disable the feed buttons” on page 143 and “Select maximum print  
speed” on page 132, which describe new EIA-232 commands.  
Information that was changed includes:  
v “Software requirements” on page 13, which includes operating system and driver  
requirements, and application requirements.  
v “Code page definitions” on page 92. Code page 850, which is resident in Model  
TI1 and TI2, has been replaced in this document by code page 858, which is  
resident in Models TI3 and TI4. Code page 858 is the same as code page 850  
plus the euro character symbol.  
v Zero (0) is no longer valid for the EIA-232 command “Microcode tolerance (MCT)  
information - request” on page 125.  
v The Remarks under “Define document wait time” on page 141 have been  
corrected and expanded.  
Because documentation, drivers, and diskettes are now available on the Web,  
“Resources on the Internet” on page 44 was added to describe how to locate the  
applicable Web site.  
Along with these changes and additions, the manual was also reorganized. The  
information that was in Appendixes B and E, along with some additional information,  
is now in Chapter 3, “SureMark installation, service, and utility software,” on page  
33.  
xx SureMark Printers User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Updated April 2, 2009  
Part 1. General information  
This part contains descriptions of the SureMark printers and information about  
installing the printers.  
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1997, 2006  
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Updated April 2, 2009  
2
SureMark Printers User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Updated April 2, 2009  
Chapter 1. Introduction  
Printer overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3  
Description of models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4  
Features used with the SureMark printers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6  
Comparison of the SureMark models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7  
Differences among SureMark models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7  
Differences between Models TI3, TI4, TI8, TI9, TG3, TG4, TG8, TG9, and  
Models TF6, TM6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8  
Planning information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9  
Your responsibilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9  
Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9  
Communication interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10  
Temperature and humidity limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10  
Physical dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10  
Models TI1, TI2, TI3, TI4, TG3, and TG4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10  
Models TI8, TI9, TG8, TG9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11  
Models TF6 and TM6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12  
Power requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12  
Hardware requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13  
Software requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13  
Operating system requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13  
Application requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14  
Resident code pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15  
Bar codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15  
Printer overview  
Figure 1. IBM SureMark printers  
The IBM SureMark printers are high-performance, high-function printers. The  
SureMark is available in several models:  
v Models TI3, TI4, TG3, and TG4 feature a thermal customer receipt station and an  
impact document insert station. The dual print heads enable quiet, fast printing at  
the customer receipt station while providing the capability to print and frank  
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1997, 2006  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Updated April 2, 2009  
checks and to print multipart forms through the document insert station. (Models  
TI1 and TI2 are older versions of Models TI3 and TI4, respectively. Production of  
the older models has ceased.)  
v Models TI8, TI9, TG8, and TG9 provide a document scanner and a powered  
flipper, in addition to all the features of Model TI4.  
v Models TF6 and TM6 are single-station thermal printers. They contain no  
document insert station. These models cost less, weigh less, and have a smaller  
footprint than the thermal/impact SureMark printers. Models TF6 and TM6 have  
been designed for wall mounting, if desired by the retailer.  
All SureMark printers provide:  
v Fast, quiet receipt printing  
v Easy paper loading  
v 256-KB flash memory for storing messages, logos, code pages, and electronic  
journal data  
v Models TI8, TI9, TG8 and TG9 have 1 MB of flash memory for scanned image  
storage  
v Bar code generation  
v Downloadable fonts and code pages  
v Downloadable microcode  
v Small footprint  
v Support for EIA-232 (RS-232) and RS-485 (EIA-485) interfaces  
Note: RS-232 and EIA-232 are synonymous; EIA-232 is used throughout this  
document. RS-485 and EIA-485 are synonymous; RS-485 is used  
throughout this document.  
v Support for Universal Serial Bus (USB) interface  
The single-station SureMark printers, the SureMark Model TI8, TI9, TG8 and TG9,  
and SureMark Models TI3, TI4, TG3, and TG4 that have been updated with the  
latest firmware, support the following in the thermal station:  
v Proportional fonts  
v Scalable fonts  
v Color printing: black plus one accent on two-color thermal paper (thermal station  
only)  
v Upside-down printing  
Additional features of some SureMark models include:  
v Single-pass handling of checks (Models TI2, TI4, TI8, TI9, TG4, TG8, TG9)  
v Easy-to-load ribbon cartridge (Models TI1, TI2, TI3, TI4, TI8, TI9, TG3, TG4,  
TG8, TG9)  
v Epson emulation (Models TF6, TM6)  
v Document scanning (Models TI8, TG8, TI9, TG9)  
v Check 21 compliance (Models TI9, TG9)  
Description of models  
Note: All TGx models are functionally equivalent to the corresponding TIx models.  
TGx models have iron gray covers, while TIx models have pearl white  
covers.  
The SureMark printers are available in the following models:  
4
SureMark Printers User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Updated April 2, 2009  
Models TI1 and TI3  
Standard models that support receipt and document printing. (Model TI1  
can no longer be ordered.)  
Models T12 and TI4  
High-function models that feature improved check handling. Check handling  
uses the magnetic character ink recognition (MICR) reader and check  
flipper that are included in these models. (Model TI2 can no longer be  
ordered.)  
With one insertion of a check into a Model TI2, TI4, TI8, or TI9 printer, the  
printer uses its MICR reader to read the magnetic-ink-character line on the  
check, franks the check, and prints the face of the check. While the printer  
is processing the check, the operator is free to attend to the customer’s  
needs, which shortens the total transaction time.  
Model TI8  
In addition to the features of the Model TI4, these models have a document  
scanner feature. Scanned documents can be stored and retrieved in TIFF,  
JPEG, and BMP formats. The Model TI8 has increased flipper speed due to  
a powered flipper. (Model TI8 can no longer be ordered.)  
Model TI9  
In addition to the features of the Model TI8, the TI9 is compliant with Check  
21 legislation, which means that it enables single-insertion check handling  
and scanning of both sides of the full length of the document.  
Models TF6 and TM6  
Smaller models that contain only a thermal customer receipt station.  
Because there is no document insert station, these models do not support  
document printing.  
Models TF6 and TM6 have an audible alarm, a spill-resistant design, and  
an optional wall mount.  
For Food Service customers, Model TF6 covers match the IBM SurePOS™  
500 Series systems. For Retail customers, Model TM6 covers match the  
IBM 4694 systems if the EIA-232/RS-485 interface is ordered, and the  
covers match the IBM SurePOS 700 Series systems if the USB interface is  
ordered.  
Note: Model TG3 is functionally equivalent to TI3, TG4 is functionally equivalent to  
TI4, and so on.  
Table 1 shows the warranty information for each printer model.  
Table 1. Warranty information  
Machine type  
Description  
Warranty  
service  
Warranty  
upgrade  
4610-TI3  
4610-TI4  
EIA-232, RS-485, USB (Pearl white covers)  
EIA-232, RS-485, USB (Pearl white covers)  
IOR 24x7  
IOR 24x7  
IOR 24x7  
none  
none  
none  
4610-TI5 (DBCS, EIA-232, RS-485, USB (Pearl white covers)  
AP only)  
4610-TI8  
4610-TI9  
4610-TM6  
EIA-232, RS-485, USB (Pearl white covers)  
EIA-232, RS-485, USB (Pearl white covers)  
EIA-232, RS-485, USB (Pearl white covers)  
IOR 24x7  
IOR 24x7  
IOR 24x7  
none  
none  
none  
Chapter 1. Introduction  
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Updated April 2, 2009  
Table 1. Warranty information (continued)  
Machine type  
Description  
Warranty  
service  
Warranty  
upgrade  
4610-TM7  
(DBCS, AP only)  
EIA-232, RS-485, USB (Pearl white covers)  
TM6 with iron gray covers  
TM7 with iron gray covers  
IOR 24x7  
none  
4610-TF6  
4610-TF7  
4610-IF6  
4610-TG3  
4610-TG4  
4610-TG5  
Depot  
repair  
IOR 24x7,  
9x5  
Depot  
repair  
IOR 24x7,  
9x5  
Functionally equivalent to TF6 with iron gray IOR 24x7  
covers but with IOR warranty  
none  
none  
none  
none  
none  
none  
Functionally equivalent to Model TI3 with iron IOR 24x7  
gray covers  
Functionally equivalent to Model TI4 with iron IOR 24x7  
gray covers  
Functionally equivalent to Model TI5 with iron IOR 24x7  
(DBCS, AP only) gray covers  
4610-TG8  
4610-TG9  
4610-DG3  
4610-DG4  
4610-DI3  
4610-DI4  
4610-DI8  
4610-DI9  
4610-DM6  
4610-DG8  
4610-DG9  
Functionally equivalent to Model TI8 with iron IOR 24x7  
gray covers  
Functionally equivalent to Model TI9 with iron IOR 24x7  
gray covers  
Functionally equivalent to Model TG3 but  
with Depot warranty  
Depot  
repair  
IOR 24x7,  
9x5  
Functionally equivalent to Model TG4 but  
with Depot warranty  
Depot  
repair  
IOR 24x7,  
9x5  
Functionally equivalent to Model TI3 but with Depot  
Depot warranty repair  
IOR 24x7,  
9x5  
Functionally equivalent to Model TI4 but with Depot  
Depot warranty repair  
IOR 24x7,  
9x5  
Functionally equivalent to Model TI8 but with Depot  
Depot warranty repair  
IOR 24x7,  
9x5  
Functionally equivalent to Model TI9 but with Depot  
Depot warranty  
IOR 24x7,  
9x5  
repair  
Functionally equivalent to Model TM6 but  
with Depot warranty  
Depot  
repair  
IOR 24x7,  
9x5  
Functionally equivalent to Model TG8 but  
with Depot warranty  
Depot  
repair  
IOR 24x7,  
9x5  
Functionally equivalent to Model TG9 but  
with Depot warranty  
Depot  
repair  
IOR 24x7,  
9x5  
Note: IOR 24x7 is IBM on-site repair 24 hours times seven days per week. 9x5 is  
nine hours per day for five days per week.  
Features used with the SureMark printers  
All models support the following features:  
v Integration Panel  
v 40-Character VFD or LCD Post Extension  
v Distributed Printer Cable (RS-485)  
v Integrated Cable (RS-485)  
6
SureMark Printers User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Updated April 2, 2009  
v Short EIA-232 Communications Cable, 2 m (about 6.6 ft), P/N 40N4780  
v Long EIA-232 Communications Cable, 4 m (about 13.1 ft), P/N 40N4781  
v Power Supply (EIA-232 and USB), P/N 40N5051  
v Power Cords (country-specific)  
v EIA-232/RS-485 Interface Card  
Models TI3, TI4, TI8, TI9, TG3, TG4, TG8, TG9, TM6 and TF6 support the following  
features:  
v USB Cable, Powered, 0.5 m (about 1.6 ft), P/N 40N4715  
v USB Cable, Powered, 3.8 m (about 12.5 ft), P/N 40N4716  
v USB Cable, Standard, 5.0 m (about 16.4 ft), P/N 40N4767  
v USB Interface Card  
Because a cash drawer can attach directly to the SureMark, all models also support  
the following features:  
v Compact Cash Drawer, Vertical Till  
v Compact Cash Drawer, Horizontal Till  
v Full-size Cash Drawer, Adjustable Till  
v Full-size Cash Drawer, Fixed Till Insert  
v Short Cash Drawer Cable, P/N 40N4778  
v Long Cash Drawer Cable, P/N 40N4779  
Comparison of the SureMark models  
The SureMark models can be divided into three groups:  
v Models TI1 and TI2 can no longer be ordered. Because these are not currently  
being manufactured, they do not support some functions that are on the current  
models.  
v Models TI3, TI4, TI8, TI9, TG3, TG4, TG8, and TG9 have a thermal print station  
for customer receipts and an impact print station for document processing. These  
models are currently being manufactured.  
– Models TI8 and TG8 additionally have document scanning.  
– Models TI9 and TG9 additionally have document scanning compliant with  
Check 21.  
v Models TF6 and TM6 have only a thermal print station for customer receipts.  
Differences among SureMark models  
v Different microcode is required to operate each of the following groups of  
printers:  
– Models TI1 and TI2  
– Models TI3, TI4, TG3, TG4, TM6, TF6  
– Models TI3, TI4, TG3, TG4, TF6, TM6 with the 2 MB card option  
– Models TI3, TI4, TG3, and TG4 with the 8 MB card option  
– Models TI8, TI9, TG8, and TG9  
v Total amount of data space available for the download of graphic messages is  
65 376 bytes for Models TI1 and TI2, but only 65 136 bytes for Models TI3, TI4,  
TG3, and TG4. Models TI8, TI9, TG8, and TG9 have from 0 KB to 1 MB, user  
allocatable.  
Chapter 1. Introduction  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Updated April 2, 2009  
v Memory allocated to store incoming commands and data is 16 KB for Models  
TI3, TI4, TI8, TI9, TG3, TG4, TG8, and TG9, but only 4 KB for Models TI1 and  
TI2.  
v Models TI3, TI4, TI8, TI9, TG3, TG4, TG8, and TG9 operate at higher speeds  
than Models TI1 and TI2.  
v Code page 858, which contains the euro character symbol, is resident in Models  
TI3, TI4, TI8, TI9, TG3, and TG4. Code page 850, which contains all character  
symbols from code page 858 excluding the euro character symbol, is resident in  
Models TI1 and TI2.  
v The second byte of the device ID specifies what model of SureMark is being  
used. The 4690 OS uses the printer model to determine the name of the  
microcode update file:  
– ADXPJPUF.DAT for Models TI1 and TI2  
– ADXPJPFF.DAT for Models TI3, TI4, TG3, TG4, TM6, TF6  
– ADXPJP2F.DAT for Models TI3, TI4, TG3, and TG4 with the 2 MB card option  
– For microcode update information for Models TI8, TI9, TG8, and TG9, see the  
IBM Retail Store Solutions Web site at http://www.ibm.com/solutions/retail/  
store/support/.  
Differences between Models TI3, TI4, TI8, TI9, TG3, TG4, TG8,  
TG9, and Models TF6, TM6  
Models TF6 and TM6 are single-station thermal printers. These models do not  
include an impact station. Therefore they can not be used for any of the check  
handling that thermal/impact SureMark Models TI3, TI4, TI8, TI9, TG3, TG4, TG8,  
and TG9 support.  
The single-station SureMark printers have a lower weight, lower cost, and smaller  
footprint than the thermal/impact printers. The single-station SureMark printers are  
designed to provide a cost-effective printer in environments that do not require  
document printing and check processing.  
The single-station SureMark printers are spill-resistant, which makes them a good  
choice for food service customers. In the single-station printers, the logic card and  
interface card are mounted vertically, which minimizes the possibility of damage  
from spills. (In the thermal/impact printers, although the logic card is mounted  
vertically, the interface card is mounted horizontally.) For particularly hazardous  
locations, an optional spill cover is available for Models TF6 and TM6.  
Models TI3, TI4, TI8, TI9, TG3, TG4, TG8, and TG9 have a trap-door design that  
allows you to easily change to a new interface, for example when upgrading from  
EIA-232 to USB. To change the interface on a single-station SureMark, you must  
remove the bottom cover, then remove both the logic card and the interface card  
(they are joined by a connector).  
The single-station SureMark printers support a 90 mm diameter paper roll, instead  
of the 80 mm paper roll that is used with the thermal/impact printers. The  
single-station printers also support an external larger paper roll via RPQ. When the  
external paper roll is used, the paper feeds into the printer through a slot in the  
bottom cover of the printer.  
A power switch is located inside the top cover of the single-station SureMark  
printers. Power to the thermal/impact SureMark printers is controlled by the system  
or by an external power supply.  
8
SureMark Printers User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Updated April 2, 2009  
Because of their smaller size and lighter weight, the single-station SureMark  
printers are designed for wall mounting. Like the other SureMark printers, they can  
also be mounted on a system unit or a countertop.  
Planning information  
This section contains information that helps you plan your environment, supply  
requirements, and power requirements.  
Your responsibilities  
You are responsible for replenishing consumable supplies, including roll paper for  
the thermal (customer receipt station) printer, and, depending on your model, forms,  
ribbon cartridges for the impact (document insert) station, and MICR read head  
cleaning cards for the MICR reader. (See Appendix A, “Consumable supplies,” on  
page 81.)  
It is your responsibility to update printer firmware as needed prior to installing  
printers, and as desired during the printer’s life.  
If you plan to use EIA-232 communications, you are responsible for ordering a 24 V  
dc power supply with a power cord. You are also responsible for ordering the  
EIA-232 cable.  
Note: If a 3-wire EIA-232 cable is to be used, the printer must be set to  
XON/XOFF mode. (See “EIA-232 communications protocol selection” on  
page 28.)  
If you plan to use RS-485 communications, you are responsible for ordering the  
RS-485 cable.  
If you plan to use USB communications, you are responsible for ordering one of the  
following:  
v A powered USB cable. The 3.8-m USB cable for a distributed configuration is  
P/N 40N4716 and the 0.5-m USB cable for an integrated configuration is P/N  
40N4715.  
v A standard USB cable, P/N 40N4767, with a Type B connector for the printer,  
and a power brick.  
With SureMark printer models you can use an electronic journaling  
application. Electronic journaling eliminates the need to store paper journal tapes  
and the time-consuming task of searching papers should the need arise.  
Limitations  
SureMark printers have a safety feature which slows printing if excessive duty  
cycles are used. This feature protects the printer hardware from potential damage  
and should not be noticeable during normal operation.  
For Model TI2, TI4, TI8, and TI9, sources of electromagnetic noise (for example,  
displays, security towers, and other sources) can interfere with the MICR read  
head. The printer is equipped to filter noise from many of these devices. If the  
MICR reader does not function properly, rearranging the printer relative to the  
device may improve MICR reading. The noise source should be as far away as  
possible from the right side of the printer. For additional information on  
troubleshooting MICR reader problems, see “Offline tests” on page 62.  
Chapter 1. Introduction  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Updated April 2, 2009  
The single-insert check handling feature of SureMark Models TI2, TI4, TI8, TI9,  
TG4, TG8, and TG9 is provided as an added convenience when customer service  
is a priority. Checks in good condition will feed reliably; damaged checks may not.  
Communication interfaces  
All SureMark printers can support the EIA-232 and RS-485 interfaces. Models TI3,  
TI4, TI8, TI9, TG3, TG4, TG8, TG9, TM6, and TF6 can also support the USB  
interface. For SureMark models that can support the USB interface, you can  
upgrade installed printers from EIA-232/RS-485 to USB by ordering a USB interface  
card.  
EIA-232 supports 9600 and 19 200 bps baud rates and, in the Models TI8, TG8,  
TI9, and TG9 only, 115 200 bps.  
RS-485 operates at a 187.5 Kbps baud rate.  
USB supports data rates up to 12 Mbps.  
Temperature and humidity limits  
Shipping  
-40° to 60° C (-40° to 140° F) with 5% to 100% relative humidity  
including condensation, but excluding rain  
Storage  
0° to 60° C (32° to 140° F)  
Operating  
0° to 40° C (32° to 104° F) with 8% to 80% relative humidity  
To allow convection cooling, ventilation holes in the covers must not be blocked.  
Physical dimensions  
Models TI1, TI2, TI3, TI4, TG3, and TG4 all have the same dimensions. Models TI8,  
TI9, TG8, are TG9 are taller, whereas Models TF6 and TM6 have a smaller  
footprint.  
Models TI1, TI2, TI3, TI4, TG3, and TG4  
Width  
Depth  
Height  
Weight  
190.5 mm (7.5 in.)  
255 mm (10 in.)  
Front: 140 mm (5.5 in.), Rear: 190 mm (7.5 in.)  
4.4 kg (9.6 lb) without paper  
10 SureMark Printers User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Updated April 2, 2009  
Figure 2. SureMark printer dimensions (Models TI1, TI2, TI3, TI4, TG3, and TG4)  
Models TI8, TI9, TG8, TG9  
Width  
Depth  
Height  
Weight  
190.5 mm (7.5 in.)  
255 mm (10 in.)  
Front: 153.4 mm (6.0 in.), Rear: 199.5 mm (7.9 in.)  
4.9 kg (10.8 lb) without paper  
Figure 3. SureMark printer dimensions (Models TI8, TI9, TG8, TG9)  
Chapter 1. Introduction 11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Updated April 2, 2009  
Models TF6 and TM6  
Width  
Depth  
Height  
Weight  
145 mm (5.7 in.)  
177 mm (7.0 in.)  
Front: 95 mm (3.7 in.), Rear: 121 mm (4.8 in.)  
1.4 kg (3.0 lb) without paper  
Figure 4. SureMark printer dimensions (Models TF6 and TM6)  
Power requirements  
SureMark printers do not contain a power supply. When the printer is operating in  
EIA-232 mode, an external power supply must be attached to connector J2 of the  
interface card of the printer. This connector is located under the printer and is  
accessible without removing the printer covers. (See Figure 5 on page 18 for  
thermal/impact SureMark printers, and Figure 6 on page 19 for single-station  
SureMark printers.) Connector J2 has the following pin functions:  
Table 2. J2 connector pin assignments  
Pin  
1
Signal  
+24 V dc  
Not Connected  
Ground  
2
3
When the SureMark is operating in RS-485 mode, power is supplied to the printer  
from the IBM POS system. The system supplies 38V dc and 5V dc to the printer.  
When the SureMark has the USB feature installed and is using the powered USB  
cable with a SurePOS 700 Series system, 24 V is supplied from the system unit.  
12 SureMark Printers User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Updated April 2, 2009  
When the SureMark has the USB feature installed and is using a 4-wire cable with  
a Type B connector, an external power brick (+24 V dc) must be used.  
Hardware requirements  
SureMark printers work with the following systems:  
v IBM 4614 SureOne® POS terminal (EIA-232 connection only)  
v IBM 4683 systems (RS-485 connection only)  
v IBM 4693 systems  
v IBM 4694 systems  
v IBM 4695 systems (EIA-232 connection only and with power supply)  
v 7497 POS Attachment Adapter (RPQ 8Q1238 in US, RS-485 only)  
v PC or other store controller with an EIA-232 or USB port  
v SurePOS 700 Series systems  
v SurePOS 500 Series systems  
v SurePOS 300 Series systems  
v IBM Self Checkout solution  
Software requirements  
Operating system requirements  
POSS drivers can be downloaded from the Retail Store Solutions Web site. See  
“Resources on the Internet” on page 44 for more information.  
If you use the RS-485 interface, you must use POSS or 4690 OS drivers. If you use  
the EIA-232 interface, use the commands described in Appendix D, “EIA-232  
programming information,” on page 101.  
EIA-232 interface: When using the EIA-232 interface, attach thermal/impact  
SureMark printers to systems that are running one of these operating systems:  
v Windows® XP Professional  
v Novell Linux® Point of Service (NLPOS)  
v IBM Retail Environment for SUSE Linux  
v Windows 2000 Professional with OPOS and JavaPOS support from POS Suite  
V1.2 or later  
v Windows 98 Second Edition or Windows NT® 4.0 with OPOS and JavaPOS  
support from POS Suite V1.0 or later  
When using the EIA-232 interface, attach single-station SureMark printers to  
systems that are running Windows 2000 Professional, Windows 98 Second Edition,  
or Windows NT 4.0 with OPOS and JavaPOS support from POS Suite V1.3.1 or  
later.  
RS-485 interface: When using the RS-485 interface, attach thermal/impact  
SureMark printers to systems that are running one of these operating systems:  
v 4690 Operating System Version 1 at maintenance level 9910, 4690 OS V2 or  
4690 OS V2R3  
v IBM Retail Environment for SUSE Linux  
v Novell Linux Point of Service  
v IBM PC DOS 2000 or later with POSS for DOS V1.60(b) plus delta package  
160(D), or later  
v Windows XP Professional  
v Windows 2000 Professional with:  
– POSS for Windows from POS Suite V1.1 or later  
– OPOS and JavaPOS support from POS Suite V1.2 or later  
Chapter 1. Introduction 13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Updated April 2, 2009  
v Windows 98 Second Edition or Windows NT 4.0 with POSS for Windows, OPOS  
and JavaPOS support from POS Suite V1.0 or later  
When using the RS-485 interface, attach single-station SureMark printers to  
systems that are running one of these operating systems:  
v IBM PC DOS 2000 with POSS for DOS V2.10 or later (Model TM6 only)  
v Windows XP Professional, Windows 2000 Professional, Windows 98 Second  
Edition, or Windows NT 4.0 with:  
– POSS for Windows from POS Suite V1.3.0 or later  
– IBM Retail Environment for SUSE Linux  
– OPOS and JavaPOS support from POS Suite V1.3.1 or later  
USB interface: When using the USB interface, attach thermal/impact SureMark  
printers to systems that are running one of these operating systems:  
v 4690 OS V2R3, which includes JavaPOS 1.4  
v Windows XP Professional  
v IBM Retail Environment for SUSE Linux  
v Novell Linux Point of Service  
v Windows 2000 Professional with:  
– POSS for Windows from POS Suite V1.1 or later  
– OPOS and JavaPOS support from POS Suite V1.2 or later  
v Windows 98 Second Edition or Windows NT 4.0 with POSS for Windows, OPOS  
and JavaPOS support from POS Suite V1.0 or later  
When using the USB interface, attach single-station SureMark printers to systems  
that are running one of these operating systems:  
v Windows XP Professional, Windows 2000 Professional, Windows 98 Second  
Edition, or Windows NT 4.0 with:  
– POSS for Windows from POS Suite V1.3.0 or later  
– OPOS and JavaPOS support from POS Suite V1.3.1 or later  
Application requirements  
Customers must be at these application levels (or higher) when running the 4690  
OS:  
Application Name  
Product  
Number  
Maintenance Level  
N/A  
IBM SUREPOS Application Client/Server  
Environment for 4690 OS  
5745-C44  
IBM Chain Drug Sales Application  
5669-212  
5696-546  
9701 with PRPQ 5799-QYP  
IBM 4680/4690 General Sales Application  
9701 with APAR IR33229 and  
PRPQ 5799-QYN  
IBM 4680/4690 Supermarket Application  
5696-536  
9701 with APAR IR33228 plus  
PRPQ 5799-QYL  
StoreFlow™ (see note 1)  
Release 1.4  
Notes:  
1. Where available, supports Models TI3, TI4, TG3, and TG4 at the point of sale.  
2. 4690 Terminal Services for Windows NT is required when you use Windows NT 4.0 or  
Windows 2000 as the primary operating system with these 4690 applications.  
14 SureMark Printers User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Updated April 2, 2009  
Resident code pages  
These code pages are resident in the printer:  
v Generic  
v 437 (US)  
v 850 (International) – only Models TI1 and TI2  
v 858 (International) – only Models TI3, TI4, TI8, TG3, TG4, TF6 and TM6  
v 860 (Portuguese)  
v 863 (Canadian French)  
v 865 (Norwegian)  
Additional code pages (four thermal and two impact) can be downloaded, if desired,  
using diskettes that are available on the Web. See “Resources on the Internet” on  
page 44 for more information about downloading diskettes.  
Bar codes  
SureMark printers can generate these bar codes:  
v UPC-A  
v UPC-E  
v JAN13 (EAN-13)  
v JAN8 (EAN-8)  
v Code 39  
v ITF  
v Codabar  
v Code 128C  
v Codes 128A, 128B, and 128C (only Models TI3, TI4, TI8, TI9, TG3, TG4, TG8,  
TG9, TF6 and TM6)  
v Code 93  
v PDF417  
Chapter 1. Introduction 15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Updated April 2, 2009  
16 SureMark Printers User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Updated April 2, 2009  
Chapter 2. Installation instructions  
Unpacking the printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18  
Installing a SureMark printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18  
Installing for EIA-232/RS-485 communication. . . . . . . . . . . . . 18  
Installing SureMark for USB communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21  
Using the wall mounting feature. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23  
Installing the fillers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24  
Installing fillers for EIA-232/RS-485 printers . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24  
Installing fillers for USB printers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26  
EIA-232 communication mode selections (all models except TI8, TI9, TG8, TG9) 28  
Baud rate selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28  
EIA-232 communications protocol selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28  
DTR/DSR control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29  
XON/XOFF control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29  
EIA-232 communication mode selections (Models TI8, TI9, TG8, TG9) . . . . 30  
Baud rate selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30  
EIA-232 communications protocol selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30  
DTR/DSR control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30  
XON/XOFF control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30  
USB communication mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31  
USB selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31  
Before installing an IBM SureMark printer, be sure to read “Electronic emission  
notices” on page 205.  
DANGER  
To avoid a shock hazard, do not connect or disconnect any cables  
or perform installation, maintenance, or reconfiguration of this  
product during an electrical storm.  
DANGER  
To avoid shock hazard:  
The power cord must be connected to a properly wired and  
earthed receptacle.  
Any equipment to which this product will be attached must also  
be connected to properly wired receptacles.  
Note: For translations of these safety notices, see IBM Safety Information—Read  
This First, GA27-4004.  
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1997, 2006  
17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Updated April 2, 2009  
Unpacking the printer  
Note: Save all packing material and shipping containers.  
1. Remove the SureMark printer from the shipping container and place it on a flat  
surface.  
2. Open any shipping containers of additional options and accessories to install  
with the SureMark printer.  
3. Carefully remove any remaining packing material and packing tape.  
Installing a SureMark printer  
This section describes SureMark printer installation.  
Installing for EIA-232/RS-485 communication  
1. Power the system off and disconnect the EIA-232 power supply.  
2. Locate the rear cable connectors.  
3. If you are using the EIA-232 communication port:  
a. For all models except TI8, TG8, TI9, TG9, check the settings on the  
EIA-232 mode switch, which is near the rear cable connections. See  
Figure 5 for thermal/impact printers. See Figure 6 on page 19 and Figure 7  
on page 19 for single-station printers.  
Notes:  
1) If the EIA-232 communication cable has only 3 wires or if the system  
output is 3 pins (2 signals and a ground), you must use XON/XOFF  
mode.  
2) Models TI8, TG8, TI9, TG9 do not have a mode switch for EIA-232  
settings. See “EIA-232 communication mode selections (Models TI8,  
TI9, TG8, TG9)” on page 30.  
b. Connect the power supply to the printer.  
Cash  
Drawer Port (EIA-232 Port  
Port Only)  
Power Supply EIA 232  
EIA-232  
Mode  
Switch  
(some  
RS-485 Port  
models)  
Figure 5. Cable connectors and EIA-232 settings switch for thermal/impact SureMark printers.  
(View is from the bottom rear of the printer)  
18 SureMark Printers User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Updated April 2, 2009  
Power supply port (EIA-232 only)  
EIA-232 port  
RS-485 port  
Cash drawer connector  
Figure 6. Cable connectors for single-station SureMark printers. (View is from the bottom rear  
of the printer)  
EIA-232 mode switches  
Cash drawer connector  
Figure 7. EIA-232 mode switches for single-station SureMark printers. (View is from the  
bottom rear of the printer)  
4. Connect the RS-485 or EIA-232 communication cable to the correct port.  
5. For single-station printers, route any power cord and cables as shown in  
Figure 8 on page 20.  
Chapter 2. Installation instructions 19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Updated April 2, 2009  
Cash drawer cable  
Power cord  
Cash drawer cable  
RS-485 cable  
EIA-232 cable  
Figure 8. EIA-232 and RS-485 cable routing for single-station SureMark printers  
6. Connect any other signal cables for I/O devices to the correct ports.  
7. Check that all signal cables are installed and seated in the correct ports.  
8. If you are installing the printer on an integrated unit:  
a. Pull out the locking lever at the left side of the system unit. (wide systems  
only)  
b. For single-station printers, place the printer in the square-shaped filler  
panel.  
c. Route the keyboard cable to the side of the tab as shown in Figure 13 on  
page 25.  
d. Route all cables attached to the printer through the center opening of the  
system unit and place the printer (with its filler panel, if it is a single-station  
printer) on the system unit.  
e. If you have additional fillers to install, go to “Installing the fillers” on page  
24.  
f. Lift the system unit rear cover and attach any cables from the printer to the  
system unit. (If this is a EIA-232-attached printer, reattach the brick power  
cord if you had to detach it to route it through the center opening.)  
9. Power on the printer by either:  
v Connecting the brick power supply cable to a properly wired and grounded  
power source and powering it on.  
v Powering on the POS system unit for an RS-485-attached printer.  
Attention: Never connect both voltage sources to the printer at the same  
time, even if one of the sources is powered off. Potential system damage  
could occur under these conditions.  
10. For single-station SureMark printers, turn on the power on/off switch on the  
printer.  
20 SureMark Printers User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Updated April 2, 2009  
11. For thermal/impact SureMark printers, locate the ribbon cartridge and install it  
in the printer. (See “Ribbon loading” on page 51.) Be sure that the ribbon is  
routed through the print head correctly.  
12. Load the paper roll into the printer. See “Paper loading” on page 53 for  
thermal/impact SureMark printers or “Paper loading” on page 71 for  
single-station SureMark printers.  
13. Installation is now complete. Go to Chapter 5, “Testing and problem analysis,”  
on page 61 for thermal/impact printers or Chapter 7, “Testing and problem  
analysis (Models TF6 and TM6),” on page 75 for single-station printers and run  
the offline tests.  
Installing SureMark for USB communication  
1. Disconnect the power brick from the printer, if one is connected.  
2. Locate the rear cable connectors on the printer.  
Standard  
USB Port  
Cash  
Drawer Supply  
Port Port  
Power  
Powered  
USB Port  
Figure 9. USB Ports for thermal/impact SureMark printers. (View is from the bottom rear of  
the printer)  
Chapter 2. Installation instructions 21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Updated April 2, 2009  
Power supply port  
Powered USB port  
Standard USB port  
Cash drawer connector  
Figure 10. USB ports for single-station SureMark printers. (View is from the bottom rear of  
the printer)  
3. For single-station printers, route any power cord and cables as shown in  
Figure 11.  
Cash drawer cable  
Standard USB cable  
Power cord  
Cash drawer cable  
Powered USB cable  
Figure 11. USB cable routing for single-station SureMark printers  
4. Connect the USB communication cable to the correct port.  
5. Connect any other signal cables for I/O devices to the correct ports.  
22 SureMark Printers User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Updated April 2, 2009  
6. Check that all signal cables are installed and seated in the correct ports.  
7. If you are installing the printer on an integrated SurePOS 700 Series system:  
a. For single-station printers, place the printer in the square-shaped filler  
panel.  
b. Route all cables attached to the printer through a rear opening of the  
system unit and place the printer (with its filler panel, if it is a single-station  
printer) on the system unit.  
c. Make the side of the printer overlap the tab on the side of the system unit  
(wide systems only).  
d. If you have additional fillers to install, go to “Installing the fillers” on page  
24.  
e. If a fence or I/O tray is installed, lift the system unit rear cover and attach  
any cables from the printer to the system unit. (If a power brick was  
disconnected at the beginning of the installation or is needed because a  
standard USB cable is being used, attach the power brick.)  
8. If you are using a power brick, power on the printer by connecting the power  
brick supply cable to a properly wired and grounded power source and  
powering it on.  
9. For single-station SureMark printers, turn on the power on/off switch on the  
printer.  
10. For thermal/impact printers, locate the ribbon cartridge and install it in the  
printer. (See “Ribbon loading” on page 51.) Be sure that the ribbon is routed  
through the print head correctly.  
11. Load the paper roll into the printer. See “Paper loading” on page 53 for  
thermal/impact SureMark printers or “Paper loading” on page 71 for  
single-station SureMark printers.  
12. Installation is now complete. Go to Chapter 5, “Testing and problem analysis,”  
on page 61 for thermal/impact printers or Chapter 7, “Testing and problem  
analysis (Models TF6 and TM6),” on page 75 for single-station printers and run  
the offline tests.  
Using the wall mounting feature  
Because of their light weight and small footprint, the single-station SureMark  
printers can be mounted on a wall. This is a useful feature when counter space is  
limited.  
Note: To correctly function in a wall mount, a SureMark printer must have paper  
roll pivots.  
To use the printer with the wall mounting feature:  
1. Position the mounting bracket on a wall that has no dangerous objects, such as  
electrical wires or pipes hidden beneath the wall surface.  
Note: Position the bracket so that the installed printer will not extend more than  
10 cm (4 in.) into a walk, hall, corridor, passageway or aisle.  
2. Attach the bracket securely to the wall with four 6 mm (0.25 in.) screws. The  
screws are not provided. You should use fasteners that are suitable for the type  
of wall construction, such that the bracket is securely attached to the wall. For  
walls that are constructed of gypsum wallboard on wood or metal studs, use  
four good-quality medium-capacity or high-capacity hollow-wall anchors.  
3. Route the communication cable up the wall surface or through the bracket.  
Chapter 2. Installation instructions 23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Updated April 2, 2009  
4. Connect the cables to the printer.  
5. Place the SureMark printer on the two bracket posts. Slide the printer down until  
a click sounds.  
Wall bracket  
Mounting posts  
Screws (not provided)  
SureMark with top cover open  
Figure 12. Mounting a single-station SureMark on a wall  
Installing the fillers  
Installing fillers for EIA-232/RS-485 printers  
Notes:  
1. On an integrated unit, pull out on the locking lever at the left side of system unit.  
2. Ensure that the side of each filler overlaps the tab on the side of the system  
unit.  
To install fillers:  
1. Power the system off and disconnect the EIA-232 power supply (if connected).  
See Figure 5 on page 18.  
2. If you have a video display on an integrated system:  
a. Move the display on its arm to the side and remove any tape holding the  
alignment ring.  
b. Remove the knockout section of the display filler.  
c. Align the display filler with the alignment ring and slide the filler onto the  
ring. Press the display filler into place. See Figure 13 on page 25.  
24 SureMark Printers User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Updated April 2, 2009  
Knockout  
Section  
Alignment  
Ring  
Display Filler  
Printer Filler  
Display Filler  
Keyboard Filler  
Tab  
Locking Lever  
Cable  
Figure 13. Installing the fillers for EIA-232/RS-485 systems  
3. If you do not have a video display, place the display filler on the system unit.  
Chapter 2. Installation instructions 25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Updated April 2, 2009  
4. If you have a short keyboard, place the keyboard filler beside the keyboard. See  
Figure 13 on page 25.  
5. Place the printer filler beside the display filler. Make sure you route the printer  
cable to the side, as shown in Figure 13 on page 25.  
Installing fillers for USB printers  
1. Disconnect the power brick from the printer (if connected).  
2. Place the display filler appropriate for the video display on the system unit. See  
Figure 14 on page 27.  
3. If you have a short keyboard, place the keyboard filler beside the keyboard. See  
Figure 14 on page 27.  
4. Place the printer filler beside the display filler. Make sure you route the  
keyboard cable to the side, as shown in Figure 14 on page 27.  
26 SureMark Printers User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Updated April 2, 2009  
Alignment  
Ring  
Knockout  
Section  
DisplayFiller  
Printer Filler  
DisplayFiller  
KeyboardFiller  
Tab  
Cable  
Locking Lever  
Figure 14. Installing the fillers for USB systems  
Chapter 2. Installation instructions 27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Updated April 2, 2009  
Figure 15. SurePOS 500 integration  
EIA-232 communication mode selections (all models except TI8, TI9,  
TG8, TG9)  
Switch settings described in this section apply only when the printer is connected to  
the system with the EIA-232 cable. The switch is accessible without removing the  
printer covers. (See Figure 5 on page 18 to see how to access the switch.)  
Baud rate selection  
SureMark printers support two EIA-232 baud rates, 9600 and 19 200 bps. The baud  
rate is selected using switch 1 on the EIA-232 settings switch. Set the switch as  
follows:  
Switch 1 OFF 9600 bps  
Switch 1 ON 19 200 bps  
The printer normally ships with switch 1 in the OFF position, which selects the 9600  
bps baud rate.  
EIA-232 communications protocol selection  
SureMark printers support EIA-232 protocol using either DTR/DSR or XON/XOFF to  
control data transmission. XON/XOFF mode uses system and printer software to  
control the flow of data. This is called flow control.  
Use switch 2 on the EIA-232 settings switch to select the mode. Switch settings  
are:  
Switch 2 OFF DTR/DSR control  
28 SureMark Printers User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Updated April 2, 2009  
Switch 2 ON XON/XOFF control (required with a 3-wire interface)  
The printer normally ships with switch 2 in the OFF position, which selects  
DTR/DSR control.  
DTR/DSR control  
DSR DSR is an output from the printer. It indicates when the printer is ready to  
receive data. A DSR signal becomes inactive when the printer is not ready  
to receive data (for example, at power-on reset or when its buffer is full).  
DTR  
DTR is an input to the printer. It indicates to the printer that the system is  
ready to receive data. A DTR signal becomes inactive when the system is  
not ready to receive data (for example, at power-on reset or when its buffer  
is full).  
XON/XOFF control  
XON = DC1 (X'11')  
XOFF = DC3 (X'13')  
During XON/XOFF control, the printer transmits an XON every 3 seconds after a  
power-on reset (POR) completes to indicate the printer is ready to receive data.  
When the first message is received, the printer stops transmitting the XON signal.  
The printer transmits an XOFF when the EIA-232 input buffer is 80% full, after  
which it transmits one XON when the buffer is 20% full.  
XON/XOFF transparent mode operation: This is the default mode. See  
“Message from the printer” on page 184 for the format of printer to system  
messages, which include a byte count, status bytes, and optional extended status  
bytes or user data.  
Transparent mode should always be used when selecting XON/XOFF mode for  
Models TI8 and TI9.  
XON and XOFF are transmitted independently, and can occur at any point inside or  
outside of messages transmitted by the printer. When a message includes optional  
user data, the byte count (bytes 1 and 2) can include X'10', X'11', or X'13'. When  
X'10', X'11', or X'13' occur in transparent XON/XOFF mode, the byte count is  
bit-exclusive-ORed with X'21' and is prefixed by the DLE (X'10') character to  
become:  
Value in message  
Becomes  
X'1031'  
X'1030'  
X'1032'  
X'10'  
X'11'  
X'13'  
User data with X'10', X'11', or X'13' is also treated this way in transparent  
XON/XOFF mode. The byte count is not incremented for such extra characters.  
Determining XON/XOFF control: You can determine whether XON/XOFF control  
is being used by sending the extended address command and checking the feature  
byte, bit 3. If this bit is set, the printer is in XON/XOFF mode. (See “Extended  
address command-request printer ID” on page 112.)  
Disabling XON/XOFF transparent mode: You can disable transparent  
XON/XOFF mode as described in “Real-time requests” on page 175. When  
Chapter 2. Installation instructions 29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Updated April 2, 2009  
disabled, X'10', X'11', or X'13' can occur within messages. However, because such  
values are actual count bytes or data bytes and are not XON or XOFF characters  
(DLE, XON, and XOFF characters do not occur within messages), no transform  
takes place. The values are not bit-exclusive-ORed with X'21' because no transform  
occurs for such values within messages as it does during transparent XON/XOFF  
mode. DLE, XON, or XOFF occur only before or after a message.  
EIA-232 communication mode selections (Models TI8, TI9, TG8, TG9)  
Settings described in this section apply only when the printer is connected to the  
system with the EIA-232 cable.  
Baud rate selection  
You must have power ON and paper installed in the thermal print station.  
1. Open both the document cover and the receipt cover.  
2. Press and hold both operator buttons until the Customer Receipt (CR) light  
blinks rapidly.  
3. Close the Document Insert (DI) cover. This is the front cover.  
4. Close the CR cover. This is the rear cover. A menu is printed on the CR paper.  
5. Follow the instructions on the menu to set the baud rate and the communication  
protocol. The information provided in “EIA-232 communications protocol  
selection” describes the selections and their purposes.  
EIA-232 communications protocol selection  
SureMark printers support the EIA-232 protocol using either DTR/DSR or  
XON/XOFF to control data transmission. XON/XOFF mode uses system and printer  
software to control the flow of data. This is called flow control.  
DTR/DSR control  
DSR DSR is an output from the printer. It indicates when the printer is ready to  
receive data. A DSR signal becomes inactive when the printer is not ready  
to receive data (for example, at power-on reset or when its buffer is full).  
DTR  
DTR is an input to the printer. It indicates to the printer that the system is  
ready to receive data. A DTR signal becomes inactive when the system is  
not ready to receive data (for example, at power-on reset or when its buffer  
is full).  
XON/XOFF control  
XON = DC1 (X'11')  
XOFF = DC3 (X'13')  
During XON/XOFF control, the printer transmits an XON every 3 seconds after a  
POR completes to indicate the printer is ready to receive data. When the first  
message is received, the printer stops transmitting the XON signal. The printer  
transmits an XOFF when the EIA-232 input buffer is 80% full, after which it  
transmits one XON when the buffer is 20% full.  
XON/XOFF transparent mode operation: This is the default mode. See  
“Message from the printer” on page 184 for the format of printer to system  
messages, which include a byte count, status bytes, and optional extended status  
bytes or user data.  
30 SureMark Printers User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Updated April 2, 2009  
XON and XOFF signals are always transmitted independently and are not inside  
any part of the message, including the byte count, status bytes, or user data. When  
a message includes optional user data, the byte count (bytes 1 and 2) can include  
X'10', X'11', or X'13'. When X'10', X'11', or X'13' occur in transparent XON/XOFF  
mode, the byte count is bit-exclusive-ORed with X'21' and is prefixed by the DLE  
(X'10') character to become:  
Value in message  
Becomes  
X'1031'  
X'1030'  
X'1032'  
X'10'  
X'11'  
X'13'  
User data with X'10', X'11', or X'13' is also treated this way in transparent  
XON/XOFF mode. The byte count is not incremented for such extra characters.  
Determining XON/XOFF control: You can determine whether or not XON/XOFF  
control is being used by sending the extended address command and checking bit  
3 of the feature byte. If this bit is set, the printer is in XON/XOFF mode. (See  
“Extended address command-request printer ID” on page 112.)  
Disabling XON/XOFF transparent mode: You can disable transparent  
XON/XOFF mode as described in “Real-time requests” on page 175. When  
disabled, X'10', X'11', or X'13' can occur within messages. The values are not  
bit-exclusive-ORed with X'21' because no transform occurs for such values within  
messages as it does during transparent XON/XOFF mode.  
Note: Disabling XON/XOFF transparent mode should be done with Model TI4 only.  
It is not recommended with Model TI8.  
USB communication mode  
No switches or special commands are required for USB communication. With the  
USB interface card and cables in place, the system automatically detects the printer  
when it is attached and performs any necessary setup. The printer operates at data  
rates up to 12 Mbps.  
USB selection  
USB is an industry standard communication interface. It is used to attach devices  
such as printers, displays, and keyboards to personal computers or to IBM POS  
systems that have USB ports. The standard USB port (with a power brick) is used  
to attach the SureMark to personal computers. The powered USB port is used to  
attach the SureMark to IBM POS systems. See Figure 9 on page 21 for the  
thermal/impact SureMark printers and Figure 10 on page 22 for the single-station  
SureMark printers.  
Chapter 2. Installation instructions 31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Updated April 2, 2009  
32 SureMark Printers User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Updated April 2, 2009  
Chapter 3. SureMark installation, service, and utility software  
Software adjustments (Models TI1, TI2, TI3, TI4, TI8, TI9, TG3, TG4, TG8, and  
TG9) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34  
Offline configurations for Models TI8, TI9, TG8, TG9 . . . . . . . . . . 34  
Using the IBM Diagnostics for the POS Systems and Peripherals (all models  
except Models TI1 and TI2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34  
Using the reference/service diskettes (Models TI1 and TI2) . . . . . . . 35  
4610 fonts and logos utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37  
Utility diskette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37  
IBM Diagnostics for POS Systems and Peripherals package (all models  
except TI1 and TI2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37  
Proportional font conversion utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37  
Firmware update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37  
Using a firmware update diskette (Models TI1 and TI2 only) . . . . . . . 38  
Using POSS for Windows to update SureMark printer firmware (RS-485 and  
USB only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39  
Using JavaPOS for Windows to update SureMark printer firmware (EIA-232,  
RS-485, and USB). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39  
Automatic update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39  
Command line utility (AipFlash46s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40  
Updating SureMark firmware using temporary EIA-232 attachment . . . . . 40  
Limitation on updating firmware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41  
Emulating the IBM Model 3 or Model 4 printers . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41  
Limitations for emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41  
Printing saved data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41  
Printing buffer data on thermal/impact printers . . . . . . . . . . . 42  
Printing buffer data on single-station printers . . . . . . . . . . . . 42  
Emulating an Epson single-station printer (single-station only) . . . . . . . 43  
Enabling Epson emulation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43  
Limitations for Epson emulation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43  
MICR data parser sample code (Models TI2, TI4, TI8, TI9, TG4, TG8, and TG9  
only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44  
Resources on the Internet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44  
This chapter describes how to make software adjustments using either the IBM  
Diagnostics for POS Systems and Peripherals (POSS for Windows, RS-485 and  
USB only) or diskettes and other resources that are available from the Retail Store  
Solutions Web site. See “Resources on the Internet” on page 44 for more  
information.  
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1997, 2006  
33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Updated April 2, 2009  
Software adjustments (Models TI1, TI2, TI3, TI4, TI8, TI9, TG3, TG4,  
TG8, and TG9)  
When a printer main logic card is replaced, the following software adjustments  
should be run:  
v Character alignment procedure (see Figure 16 on page 36)  
v Document insert front load print line adjustment (see Figure 16 on page 36)  
v Document landscape adjustment (see Figure 16 on page 36)  
v Store printer's serial number  
v Update the firmware to the latest level  
v Reset printer statistics  
v Scanner calibration (Models TI8, TI9, TG8, TG9)  
v 4610 Model configuration (If the configuration is not set correctly, the printer may  
act unpredictably.)  
Notes:  
1. Cards for TI1s and TI2s are set up as TI2s.  
2. Cards for Tx3s and Tx4s are set up as Tx4s.  
3. Cards for Tx8s and Tx9s are set up as Tx8s.  
Depending on your SureMark model, you can use the following to make software  
adjustments to the printer:  
v Offline configuration for Models TI8, TI9, TG8, TG9  
v IBM Diagnostics for POS Systems and Peripherals (except Models TI1 and TI2)  
v Reference/service diskettes (Models TI1 and TI2 only)  
Offline configurations for Models TI8, TI9, TG8, TG9  
You must use the calibration procedure to calibrate the scanner.  
You must have power ON and paper installed in the thermal print station.  
1. Open both the document cover and the receipt cover.  
2. Press and hold both operator buttons until the Customer Receipt (CR) light  
blinks rapidly.  
3. Close the Document Insert (DI) cover. This is the front cover.  
4. Close the CR cover. This is the rear cover. A menu is printed on the CR paper.  
5. Follow the instructions on the menu to:  
v set the EIA-232 parameter  
v set the baud rate  
v set the communication protocol  
v invoke scanner calibration  
v set the 4610 model configuration  
The information provided in “EIA-232 communications protocol selection” on  
page 30 describes the selections and their purposes.  
Using the IBM Diagnostics for the POS Systems and Peripherals (all  
models except Models TI1 and TI2)  
The IBM Diagnostics for the POS Systems and Peripherals is a GUI-based  
diagnostic package on a USB flash drive. It is used to troubleshoot hardware  
problems, and it includes these 4610 printer utilities:  
34 SureMark Printers User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Updated April 2, 2009  
v Microcode update  
v Logo download  
v Message download  
v Printer Configuration Utility, which includes:  
– Scanner calibration  
– Print current adjustment values (see Figure 16 on page 36)  
– Character alignment procedure (see Figure 16 on page 36)  
– Backlash adjustment (document landscape, see Figure 16 on page 36)  
– DI front load print line adjustment (see Figure 16 on page 36)  
– Set serial number  
– Reset printer statistics  
– Set printer type (4610 model configuration)  
Using the reference/service diskettes (Models TI1 and TI2)  
1. Load the reference/service diskette. See the hardware service manual for your  
system for reference/service diskette procedures.  
2. Select Test Menu.  
3. Select Run POS Device Tests for an RS-485 connection. Select EIA-232 4610  
Printer Test for an EIA-232 connection.  
4. If another system is attached, select the system whose printer you want to  
adjust. This is unnecessary when there is no other system attached.  
5. Select Printer Utilities.  
6. Select the adjustment you want to make from the menu.  
v Print current adjustment values: see Figure 16 on page 36.  
v Character alignment procedure: see Figure 16 on page 36.  
v DI front load print line adjustment: see Figure 16 on page 36.  
v Document landscape adjustment: see Figure 16 on page 36.  
v Engineering use only  
v Change 4610 Model Configuration  
v Reset printer statistics  
Note: Because the first four adjustments affect only the document insert  
station, they are not displayed as selectable options if the printer is a  
single-station SureMark.  
Chapter 3. SureMark installation, service, and utility software 35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Updated April 2, 2009  
TL1  
TL2  
TL3  
TL4  
TL5  
TL6  
TL7  
CURRENT ADJUSTMENT VALUES  
H 5 = Character alignment  
TL8  
TL9  
TL5 = Top line front insert  
BL3 = Bottom line top insert  
Measure from the top edge of this  
paper to the top of each print line.  
Press the key (1-9) that corresponds  
to the print line that is closest to 5MM.  
CHARACTER ALIGNMENT PROCEDURE  
Press the key (1-9) that corresponds  
to the pair of H's that appear to be  
most aligned  
5 = selected line  
Figure 16. Adjustment and alignment printouts  
7. Follow the instructions that are printed on the printer or displayed on the screen.  
8. Press S1 (Esc on the Enhanced A/N Keyboard) to return to the previous menu.  
36 SureMark Printers User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Updated April 2, 2009  
4610 fonts and logos utilities  
There are utilities available on the Retail Store Solutions Web site. Depending on  
your model, you may either use the utility diskette or use the IBM Diagnostics for  
POS Systems and Peripherals package.  
The utility program allows you to perform the following functions:  
v Update printer firmware  
v Configure the printer model  
v Create, edit, and download user-defined character fonts, logo images, and  
messages  
v Download proportional fonts (not supported for Models TI1 and TI2)  
v Convert fonts and logo files from impact to thermal  
Utility diskette  
This utility is for both EIA-232 and RS-485 operation. You can download the utility  
from the Retail Store Solutions Web site. See “Resources on the Internet” on page  
44 for more information.  
From the same Web site, you can also download the following sample files for use  
with the utility program:  
v User-defined characters file  
v Message file  
v Logo file  
IBM Diagnostics for POS Systems and Peripherals package (all models  
except TI1 and TI2)  
This utility is for EIA-232, RS-485, and USB operation. Refer to the README file in  
this package for details on how to run these utilities.  
Proportional font conversion utility  
As part of its support for proportional fonts, IBM provides three TrueType fonts and  
a utility that you can use to convert the fonts to files that the SureMark printer can  
use.  
The application and instructions for downloading the converted fonts are available  
from the Retail Store Solutions Web site. See “Resources on the Internet” on page  
44 for more information.  
Note: You might have TrueType fonts other than those supplied by IBM on your  
system. Before using the conversion utility to convert and download any  
non-IBM fonts for use by the SureMark printer, you must confirm that you  
have received authorization from the owner of the fonts to convert and  
download the fonts.  
Firmware update  
The SureMark printer has the capability to receive SureMark firmware updates from  
the host system unit to which it is attached for either RS-485-attached,  
EIA-232-attached, or USB-attached SureMark printers.  
The following mediums can be used to update the SureMark firmware:  
v Firmware update diskettes  
Chapter 3. SureMark installation, service, and utility software 37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Updated April 2, 2009  
v POSS for Windows 4610 Printer Firmware Update Program  
v Alternative 4610 firmware update method via EIA-232 attachment cable  
Use the appropriate procedure that follows to update the SureMark firmware, after  
downloading the latest level software from the Retail Store Solutions Web site (see  
“Resources on the Internet” on page 44).  
Using a firmware update diskette (Models TI1 and TI2 only)  
Use a firmware update diskette to update the firmware in configurations when the  
SureMark is attached by either an EIA-232 or RS-485 cable and when the system  
has a floppy diskette drive, a PC keyboard, and display.  
1. Download the latest level of firmware update diskette from the Web (see  
“Resources on the Internet” on page 44). You can select from several update  
methods, including attended, unattended, and automatic.  
2. Insert the firmware update diskette in drive A.  
3. Power on the system unit that has the SureMark attached by either an EIA-232  
or RS-485 cable.  
4. Select RS-485 or EIA-232 connection.  
5. Follow the messages displayed to complete the firmware update.  
a. Press Enter (OK) at the logo screen to proceed.  
b. Choose connection type (RS-485 or EIA-232). For EIA-232 connections,  
also make the following selections (refer to the communications mode  
selections switches, located on the bottom rear of the SureMark printer, to  
determine the following selections):  
v Communications port (COM1, COM2, COM3, COM4)  
v Baud rate (9600 or 19 200 bps)  
v Control Flow (DTR/DSR or XON/XOFF)  
c. Press Enter (OK) to proceed.  
d. Press F10 (Menu).  
e. Select O (Operations).  
f. Select A (Advanced Options).  
g. Select U (Update Firmware).  
h. Press Enter twice to select the desired firmware image file (usually only the  
latest firmware image file is available for selection).  
i. Press Enter (YES) again to commit to firmware update.  
j. The Information screen will display the update percent completed.  
Note: The SureMark flash update will take several minutes. Do not power off  
the host system or the SureMark printer after the update has started.  
6. After the firmware update is complete, the SureMark printer will be reset.  
a. Press Enter (OK) to confirm.  
b. Press Alt+X (Exit).  
c. Press Enter to exit.  
7. Remove the diskette from drive A.  
8. Press Ctrl+Alt+Del to reboot the system.  
38 SureMark Printers User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Updated April 2, 2009  
Using POSS for Windows to update SureMark printer firmware (RS-485  
and USB only)  
Windows users with SureMark printers can use the POSS for Windows 4610 Printer  
Firmware Update program (AIPFLD46.EXE) to update SureMark firmware. For  
additional information, refer to the POSS Programming Reference and User’s  
Guide.  
Note: POSS Suite V1.0.0 or greater is required to use this utility.  
1. Download the latest SureMark firmware update image file from the Web. The file  
is:  
v AIP46MC.HEX for Models TI1 and TI2  
v AIP46MCH.HEX for Models TI3, TI4, TG3, and TG4. This file is also for  
single-station printers with 512 KB or 8 MB of memory  
v AIP46MCD.HEX for Models TI3, TI4, TG3, TG4, TF6, and TM6 with the 2 MB  
memory option.  
v For Model TI8, see the IBM Retail Store Solutions Web site at  
http://www.ibm.com/solutions/retail/store/support/.  
2. Copy the latest SureMark firmware update image file to the C:\POS\BIN  
directory. Because the file in the directory is more current than the old file, the  
firmware will be automatically updated when the system is powered off and  
back on.  
3. To update the firmware manually, enter the AIPFLD46.EXE -S slot_number -P  
port_number -F microcode_file [-Q] command to update the SureMark firmware,  
where:  
slot_number  
SureMark slot number, usually = 1. The slot number must be specified  
with decimal values only; hexadecimal values are not accepted.  
port_number  
SureMark port number specified with a decimal value, usually = 17  
microcode_file  
Either C:\POS\BIN\AIP46MC.HEX, C:\POS\BIN\AIP46MCH.HEX, or  
C:\POS\BIN\AIP46MCD.HEX  
-Q  
(Optional) Quiet mode installation (no progress information)  
4. The SureMark flash update will take several minutes.  
Using JavaPOS for Windows to update SureMark printer firmware  
(EIA-232, RS-485, and USB)  
The firmware can be updated by automatic update or by the command line utility.  
Automatic update  
Follow these steps to update the POSPrinter firmware for Linux:  
1. Obtain the appropriate flash file from the Web:  
v AIP46MCH.HEX for 4610 Tx3, Tx4 and Tx6  
v AIP46MCD.HEX for 4610 TI5 and TI7  
v AIP46TI8.HEX for TI8 and TI9  
Go to http://www.ibm.com/solutions/retail/store/support/. Click the links to  
JavaPOS POSPrinter support.  
2. Create an rs485 directory as follows:  
Chapter 3. SureMark installation, service, and utility software 39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Updated April 2, 2009  
v For Linux, go to the directory /opt/ibm/javapos/flash on the target system and  
create an rs485 directory. This is done as shown in the following example:  
% cd /opt/ibm/javapos/flash  
% mkdir rs485  
v For Windows, go to the directory root install directory\IBMJPOS\res\  
flash on the target system and create an rs485 directory. This is shown in  
the following example, where the root install directory is C:\POS.  
C:\> cd\POS\IBMJPOS\res\flash  
C:\> mkdir rs485  
3. Place the correct flash file (ensure it matches the printer type) into the new  
directory.  
4. Make sure the printer is attached and reboot the system. (The flash will take a  
few minutes to complete during boot-up.)  
Command line utility (AipFlash46s)  
The IBM 4610 printer firmware can be downloaded using a command utility. The  
syntax for the utility is java com.ibm.jpos.util.flash.AipFlash46s [param]  
[RS-485_flash_filename].  
Valid values for the variables are:  
param -e: flash printer EC level  
RS-485_flash_filename  
Includes the absolute path name of the flash file (for example:  
/opt/ibm/javapos/flash/aipmch46.hex)  
Updating SureMark firmware using temporary EIA-232 attachment  
To use the firmware update diskettes to update SureMark firmware for  
configurations that do not have a floppy diskette drive and PC display and  
keyboard, you must provide a temporary EIA-232 attachment to a host PC that  
does have a floppy diskette drive.  
Note: A 4610 firmware update diskette at V3.10 or greater is required to use this  
utility.  
Before starting the firmware update, you must obtain the following parts:  
v EIA-232 attachment cable, either 2 meters in length (P/N 40N4780) or 4 meters  
in length (P/N 86H2195).  
v SureMark Power Supply for EIA-232 configurations only (P/N 40N5051).  
If the SureMark is currently attached to a host system unit that does not support a  
floppy diskette drive, use the following procedure to temporarily connect the printer  
to a host PC that has a floppy diskette drive, EIA-232 port, PC keyboard and  
display.  
1. Disconnect the SureMark (RS-485 #7) attachment cable and temporarily  
connect a EIA-232 attachment cable to the SureMark.  
2. Connect the SureMark via the EIA-232 port connector to an alternate host PC  
that has a floppy diskette drive.  
3. Follow the procedure in “Using a firmware update diskette (Models TI1 and TI2  
only)” on page 38 to complete the SureMark firmware update.  
4. Reconnect the SureMark to the original host system unit using the original  
attachment cables.  
40 SureMark Printers User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Updated April 2, 2009  
Limitation on updating firmware  
The following limitation must be considered when updating firmware on the  
SureMark printer:  
v SureMark firmware update can not be performed if the printer currently has  
Model 4 emulation enabled. If emulation is enabled, temporarily disable Model 4  
emulation, then start the SureMark firmware update. After the firmware update is  
complete, re-enable Model 4 emulation. See “Emulating the IBM Model 3 or  
Model 4 printers” for additional information.  
Emulating the IBM Model 3 or Model 4 printers  
Note: All SureMark firmware levels for Models TI3, TI4, TG3, TG4, TF6 and TM6  
support emulation; no other models support this emulation.  
It is possible to emulate the IBM Model 3 or Model 4 printer with the SureMark  
printer. You must change the configuration to enable the SureMark to emulate the  
Model 3 or Model 4 printers.  
To set up the Model 3 or Model 4 emulation, use the IBM Diagnostics for POS  
Systems and Peripherals package. Refer to the README file in that package for  
the Change Printer Type utility.  
Note: Model 3 and Model 4 emulation is not supported in firmware levels 43 and  
greater. For the latest level of firmware that includes Model 3 and 4  
emulation please use the Model 4 Emulation Support diskette.  
Limitations for emulation  
The following limitations must be considered when using the SureMark printer to  
emulate the Model 3 or Model 4 printer.  
v Printing the face of checks requires application changes (franking the back of  
checks should not).  
v Printing wide documents may require changes. The document station on the  
Model 4 printer supports 86 characters, the SureMark supports 47 characters.  
v Journal commands can be ignored or stored in the flash memory of the printer.  
This needs to be decided when the printer is initially configured.  
v There is no top document registration (documents must be inserted from the  
front).  
v User-defined special characters are not supported.  
v Because SureMark Models TF6 and TM6 do not have a document insert station,  
they do not emulate document station commands.  
v Emulation mode does not support the Model 4A double-byte character set.  
v For RS-485, emulation mode is currently only supported on 4690 OS and DOS  
systems. For USB, emulation mode is currently only supported on 4690 OS.  
Emulation is not supported for EIA-232.  
v On the DI portrait station, 1 inch = 51 motor steps (1 mm = 2 steps). This is  
different from a Model 3 or 4 printer, where 1 inch = 48 steps.  
Printing saved data  
When the printer is offline in Model 3 or 4 emulation mode and the option for  
storing data to the printer is selected, it is possible to fill up the printer flash  
memory. When the memory is full, a printer error indicates the journal station is out  
Chapter 3. SureMark installation, service, and utility software 41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Updated April 2, 2009  
of paper. You can empty the printer buffer by printing out the data that is stored in  
the flash memory. The data prints on the customer receipt station. The data in the  
buffer is erased only after the last line of data is printed.  
Note: If the SureMark has the 2 MB option installed, up to three rolls of paper  
might be needed to print all the electronic journal data.  
You can upload an electronic journal while in Model 4 emulation mode. See  
Appendix E, “Uploading electronic journal data,” on page 187 for detailed  
information.  
Printing buffer data on thermal/impact printers  
To print the buffer data from the beginning:  
1. Press and hold both buttons. When the printer ready indicator begins blinking,  
release both buttons.  
2. Press and release both buttons again.  
Notes:  
1. If the SureMark printer encounters an error (for example, the paper runs out or  
the cover is opened) while printing the data, the data remains intact.  
2. To stop printing the data, open and close the ribbon cover. When you are ready  
to print the data, use the procedure above to restart printing from the beginning.  
3. To stop printing and restart at the current position, open and close the paper  
cover. Printing immediately restarts.  
Printing buffer data on single-station printers  
To print the buffer data from the beginning:  
1. Open the top cover. The LED will flash quickly.  
2. Press and hold the paper feed button for 5 seconds.  
Note: The paper feed button is the small button next to the LED.  
3. The LED will show one short blink, accompanied by a beep, followed by a 1  
second pause.  
4. Press and hold the paper feed button for 5 seconds.  
5. The LED will change to a long blink. The beeper will sound continuously.  
6. Close the cover to begin printing the electronic journal data.  
Notes:  
1. If the SureMark printer encounters an error (for example, the paper runs out or  
the cover is opened) while printing the data, the data remains intact.  
2. To stop printing the data, open the top cover, turn the printer power switch OFF,  
turn the printer power switch back ON, and close the top cover. When you are  
ready to print the data, use the procedure above to restart printing from the  
beginning.  
3. To stop printing and restart at the current position, open and close the top cover.  
Printing immediately restarts.  
4. To return the printer to normal mode, press and release the paper feed button a  
third time before closing the top cover.  
42 SureMark Printers User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Updated April 2, 2009  
Emulating an Epson single-station printer (single-station only)  
Emulation of an Epson single-station printer is supported on the single-station  
SureMark printers. See Appendix G, “Emulation support for Epson single-station  
printer,” on page 193.  
Enabling Epson emulation  
To enable emulation of an Epson single-station printer on a single-station SureMark  
printer, you must set switch 3 on the main logic card. See Figure 17 for the location  
of the switch.  
EIA-232 mode switches  
Cash drawer connector  
Figure 17. Switch for Epson emulation  
Limitations for Epson emulation  
The following limitations must be considered when using a single-station SureMark  
printer to emulate an Epson single-station printer:  
v Logos and downloadable characters are supported in emulation mode. However,  
because the Epson printer prints at 180 dpi and the SureMark prints at 200 dpi,  
the emulated printout will be smaller.  
v Emulation of page mode is not supported on the SureMark.  
v Epson supports the Select paper sensor to stop printing command. IBM does not  
support a low paper sensor.  
v In order to implement fixes, new functionality, and other improvements, new  
releases of printer microcode are routinely published. It is advisable that you run  
the most recent version of firmware on the printer; however, the 4610 firmware  
can not be updated when running in Epson emulation mode. Therefore, you must  
first switch the printer to native mode, to upgrade the microcode.  
Chapter 3. SureMark installation, service, and utility software 43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Updated April 2, 2009  
MICR data parser sample code (Models TI2, TI4, TI8, TI9, TG4, TG8,  
and TG9 only)  
The MICR data parser download package includes:  
v Sample source code (in C) that contains algorithms for parsing MICR data from a  
check.  
v An exception data file that is used with the parsing code. You can edit this file to  
add new check formats, if necessary.  
Refer to the README file in this download package for additional information.  
Resources on the Internet  
The IBM Retail Store Solutions Web site at http://www.ibm.com/solutions/retail/store/  
support/ contains publications for the SureMark printer. The Web site also provides  
access to diskettes, drivers, and miscellaneous documentation, such as README  
files and information about OEM papers that have been certified.  
Select IBM SureMark Printer. The displayed page contains links both to  
documentation and to diskettes and drivers that you can download for the SureMark  
printers.  
44 SureMark Printers User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Updated April 2, 2009  
Part 2. Models TI1, TI2, TI3, TI4, TI8, TI9, TG3, TG4, TG8, TG9  
This part contains operational, testing, and problem determination information for  
the thermal/impact SureMark printers Models TI1, TI2, TI3, TI4, TI8, TI9, TG3, TG4,  
TG8, TG9. All references to Model TI3 pertain to Model TG3, references to TI4  
pertain to Model TG4, and so on.  
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1997, 2006  
45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Updated April 2, 2009  
46 SureMark Printers User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Updated April 2, 2009  
Chapter 4. Operation  
Operating controls and indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47  
Ribbon loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51  
Paper loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53  
Clearing jams in the check flipper area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55  
MICR reader read head cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56  
Thermal print head cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57  
Document scanner cleaning (Model TI8, TI9, TG8, TG9) . . . . . . . . . 59  
Document scanner calibration (Models TI8, TI9, TG8, TG9) . . . . . . . . 60  
%
Note: All covers must be installed on the SureMark printer during operation.  
Operating controls and indicators  
There are two triangular-shaped buttons and two LED indicators located on top of  
the printer. The buttons serve multiple functions.  
When the topmost indicator is on continuously, the printer is powered ON and ready  
for printing. When the indicator blinks, one of the following conditions exists:  
v The printer is out of paper.  
v The cover is open.  
v The printer is offline.  
v The printer has a nonrecoverable home error.  
The second LED is the Document Present indicator. It lights when a document is  
inserted far enough into the document insert station to reach the DI sensor. When  
this LED blinks, the DI station is waiting for you to insert a document.  
The topmost button is the customer receipt paper feed button. Press this button to  
advance the CR paper. The lower button is the document feed button. Press this  
button to advance the document.  
If you press both buttons at the same time and then release them, the document  
insert throat opens. The throat must be open to insert a document from the side.  
Press and then release both buttons again to close the throat.  
Both buttons are also used to test the printer. See “Offline tests” on page 62 for  
additional button functions.  
Paper Cover  
Customer Receipt Printer  
Ribbon Cover  
Printer Ready LED  
Document Printer  
Customer Receipt Feed Button  
Document Present LED  
Document Feed Button  
Figure 18. SureMark printer indicators, controls, and printing stations (Models TI1, TI2, TI3,  
TI4, TI8, TI9, TG3, TG4, TG8, and TG9)  
The printer is capable of printing verification information on a check and printing  
information on an inserted document. Figure 19 on page 48, Figure 20 on page 48,  
and Figure 21 on page 49 show the correct positioning of checks and documents in  
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1997, 2006  
47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Updated April 2, 2009  
SureMark printers with impact (document insert) stations. Those figures also show  
how to side load a document to align it exactly where you want it to be printed.  
Notes:  
1. When side loading a Model TI8 or TG8, the document must be placed lower  
than with the other models.  
2. Side loading is not available with Models TI9 and TG9.  
Insertion of Check  
for MICR Reading  
and Franking  
Insertion of Check  
for Printing the Face  
4001  
19  
$
Pay To The  
Order Of  
Dollars  
Memo  
041117847096 095867238671  
4001  
Figure 19. Inserting checks for all models except TF6 and TM6  
Insertion of Document  
(Front Load)  
Figure 20. Inserting checks or documents in a Model TI2, TI4, TI8, TI9, TG4, TG8, or TG9  
printer  
48 SureMark Printers User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Updated April 2, 2009  
Insertion of Document  
(Side Load)  
Print Position  
Figure 21. Inserting checks or documents in a Model TI2 or TI4 printer  
Figure 22. Side insertion of documents in a Model TI8 printer  
Figure 23 and Figure 24 on page 50 show the printable area on an inserted  
document for both portrait and landscape.  
Chapter 4. Operation 49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Updated April 2, 2009  
Figure 23. Printable area of an inserted document (portrait)  
Figure 24. Printable area of an inserted document (landscape)  
50 SureMark Printers User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Updated April 2, 2009  
Ribbon loading  
1. Open the ribbon cover. As the cover is opened, the print head moves to a  
position where you can easily load a ribbon.  
Figure 25. Opening the ribbon cover  
2. If there is already a ribbon cartridge installed, remove it by lifting it straight up.  
Note: You might need to grasp the body of the cartridge rather than the top to  
remove it.  
Figure 26. Ribbon cartridge loading  
Chapter 4. Operation 51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Updated April 2, 2009  
3. Maintain ribbon tension by turning the ribbon cartridge knob as shown in  
Figure 26 on page 51. Lower the cartridge into position until the notches on its  
sides snap into place on the printer guides. Once the cartridge is in place, turn  
the knob until the ribbon slides into place between the print head and the ribbon  
shield. See Figure 27 for correct ribbon positioning.  
Ribbon Shield  
Printhead  
Correct  
Not Correct  
Figure 27. Ribbon path around the print head  
4. Close the ribbon cover.  
52 SureMark Printers User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Updated April 2, 2009  
Paper loading  
1. Open the paper cover.  
2. If there is any unused paper or if there is an empty paper roll core in the paper  
roll bucket inside the printer, remove it before inserting a new paper roll. You  
can throw the core in the trash can.  
Note: Refer to the label on the inside of the paper cover for a diagram of how  
to load paper.  
Figure 28. Paper cover (Models TI1, TI2, TI3, TI4, TI8, TI9, TG3, TG4, TG8, and TG9)  
3. See Figure 29 on page 54 and place the paper roll into the paper roll bucket as  
shown. The leading edge of the paper should come from the direction of the  
front of the printer and go across the top of the roll as shown in the diagram. If  
it feeds from the bottom of the roll, nothing will be printed on the paper.  
Note: The thermal print head will not print on paper with glue on it. If the new  
paper roll was sealed by glue, tear off the 6 to 8 inches of paper with  
glue on it before loading it.  
Chapter 4. Operation 53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Updated April 2, 2009  
Not Correct  
Correct  
Paper Roll  
Thermal  
Platen  
Paper  
Roll Core  
Figure 29. Paper loading path (Models TI1, TI2, TI3,TI4, TI8, TI9, TG3, TG4, TG8, and TG9)  
4. See Figure 29. Place the leading edge of the paper over the metal guide.  
5. Close the paper cover.  
6. Press the customer receipt feed button to advance the paper, to verify that the  
paper is feeding correctly. Feed 30 cm (about 1 ft.) of paper through to test for  
correct alignment.  
Attention: Do not pull the receipt paper out of the printer with the paper access  
cover closed. This disengages the paper feed. The paper feed motor must then  
catch up before the printer can feed the paper, which causes missing lines or partial  
lines of print. Use the customer receipt feed button to advance the receipt and all  
lines will print.  
54 SureMark Printers User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Updated April 2, 2009  
Clearing jams in the check flipper area  
This procedure is for the SureMark printer Models TI2, TI4, TI8, and TI9 (MICR  
Reader and Check Flipper features) only.  
If a check jams in the Check Flipper mechanism:  
1. Lift up the left front corner of the lower document insert cover and pull the cover  
from the printer. (See Figure 30.)  
Figure 30. Removing the lower document insert cover  
2. The action you take in this step depends on whether the document is visible  
and can be removed:  
v If you can remove the document:  
a. Remove the document.  
b. Replace the lower document insert cover.  
c. You are finished with this procedure.  
v If you can not remove the document, continue with Step 3.  
3. Lift up the tab on the left side of the check flipper cartridge and remove the  
assembly from the printer. (See Figure 31 on page 56.)  
Note: For printers with a powered flipper (Models TI8, TI9, TG8, TG9) the  
cartridge is attached to the printer with an electrical cable and can not be  
removed. Simply raise the front edge of the cartridge to remove a  
jammed document underneath.  
Chapter 4. Operation 55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Updated April 2, 2009  
Figure 31. Removing the check flipper cartridge (except Models TI8, TI9)  
4. Reach inside the document insert station and carefully remove the jammed  
check.  
5. Reinstall the check flipper cartridge and the lower DI cover.  
% MICR reader read head cleaning  
%
%
The MICR reader read head should be cleaned after 10000 checks are processed  
or every 3 months, as required.  
%
%
1. Open the ribbon cover.  
2. Move the impact printhead to its rightmost position.  
%
%
3. Rotate the document sensor assembly towards the front of the printer to expose  
the MICR read head.  
%
%
4. Use a cotton swab that is lightly soaked with alcohol to wipe any residue or dirt  
from the MICR read head surface.  
%
%
5. Gently return the document sensor assembly to its original position.  
56 SureMark Printers User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Updated April 2, 2009  
%
MICR Read Head  
Document Sensor Assembly  
%
%
%
Figure 32. MICR reader read head  
Thermal print head cleaning  
The thermal print head can be cleaned whenever print quality deteriorates.  
1. Open the paper cover.  
2. Using a cotton swab soaked in isopropyl alcohol, gently wipe the print head  
several times on its print line and on the surrounding area. See Figure 33 on  
page 58.  
Chapter 4. Operation 57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Updated April 2, 2009  
Detailed View of Thermal Printhead  
Thermal Print Line  
Paper Cover  
Figure 33. Print head and print line area (Models TI1, TI2, TI3, TI4, TI8, TI9, TG3, TG4, TG8, and TG9)  
3. Wipe off any residual alcohol with a dry swab.  
If print quality does not improve after cleaning the thermal print head, call for  
service.  
58 SureMark Printers User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Updated April 2, 2009  
Document scanner cleaning (Model TI8, TI9, TG8, TG9)  
The scanner surface should be cleaned after 10 000 documents or every three  
months or whenever image quality deteriorates.  
1. Open the ribbon cover. See Figure 34.  
Registration Plate  
Print Head  
Scanner  
Surface  
Ribbon Access Cover  
Figure 34. Scanner and print head location (Model TI8, TI9, TG8, TG9)  
2. Move the impact print head to its rightmost position, as shown.  
3. Rotate the scanner registration plate 180° up to expose the glass scanner  
surface. See Figure 34.  
4. Use a cotton swab that is lightly soaked with alcohol to wipe any residue from  
the scanner glass surface.  
5. Gently return the scanner registration plate to its original position.  
6. The scanner should be recalibrated after it has been cleaned. See “Document  
scanner calibration (Models TI8, TI9, TG8, TG9)” on page 60.  
Chapter 4. Operation 59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Updated April 2, 2009  
Document scanner calibration (Models TI8, TI9, TG8, TG9)  
The printer must have power ON. Use a clean sheet of white copier paper (not  
recycled paper) as the calibration target. Fold the paper in half. (Optional: cut paper  
to 4.25 in. wide.)  
1. Always begin by making sure the scanner window is clean.  
2. Put paper in the CR station (paper will be used for printing in later step).  
3. Insert the target paper into the document insert station as you would insert a  
check. The folded edge should be up (or inserted first) and the right edge  
should be against the right side of the paper path. Press the DI button to  
automatically advance the paper to the ready position.  
4. Enter offline mode by doing the following:  
a. Open the CR cover and the DI cover.  
b. Press and hold both buttons until the LED flashes rapidly.  
c. Close the DI cover.  
d. Close the CR cover.  
5. Follow the directions that are printed in the CR station to perform the calibration.  
6. Remove the target paper when complete.  
7. Power the printer OFF and then ON for the changes to take effect.  
60 SureMark Printers User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Updated April 2, 2009  
Chapter 5. Testing and problem analysis  
DANGER  
To avoid a shock hazard, do not connect or disconnect any cables  
or perform installation, maintenance, or reconfiguration of this  
product during an electrical storm.  
DANGER  
To avoid shock hazard:  
The power cord must be connected to a properly wired and  
earthed receptacle.  
Any equipment to which this product will be attached must also  
be connected to properly wired receptacles.  
Note: For translations of these safety notices, see IBM Safety Information—Read  
This First, GA27-4004.  
Testing the printer  
When you power ON the SureMark printer, it runs a power-on self-test (POST). If  
the POST finds no errors, the printer is ready for operation. Follow this procedure to  
determine if there are errors.  
Note: Never connect or disconnect the printer when power is applied (when LEDs  
are ON).  
1. If the printer is powered ON, power OFF the printer and power it ON again.  
v If the printer is attached to the system with the EIA-232 cable or the standard  
USB cable with a power brick, disconnect the power cord, then reconnect the  
power cord to a properly wired and grounded power source.  
v If the printer is attached to the system with the RS-485 cable, power OFF the  
POS system, and then power ON the system, which also powers ON the  
printer.  
v If the printer is attached to the system with a powered USB cable, the USB  
attached printer can be hot-plugged.  
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1997, 2006  
61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Updated April 2, 2009  
Printer Ready LED  
Customer Receipt Feed Button  
Document Present LED  
Document Feed Button  
Figure 35. Printer buttons  
2. Check the status of the Printer Ready indicator:  
Printer ready indicator ON:  
The power-on self-test completed successfully.  
Printer ready indicator OFF or blinking:  
The POST failed.  
3. If the POST fails or if you suspect problems with your system, see “Problem  
determination” on page 67.  
4. See “Offline tests” and run the offline tests. If the offline tests fail or you suspect  
problems with your system, see “Problem determination” on page 67.  
Offline tests  
The following offline tests are used as diagnostic tools to ensure the printer is  
operating correctly.  
Customer receipt test  
1. Press and hold both buttons to enter offline mode. When the printer ready  
indicator begins blinking, release both buttons.  
2. Press and release the customer receipt feed button to start this test.  
3. See Figure 36 on page 64 and verify that your printer has printed correct  
information for your model and configuration:  
v MICR reader enabled and check flipper enabled (Model TI2, TI4, TI8, TI9,  
TG4, TG8, TG9)  
v Optical scanner enabled (Model TI8, TI9, TG8, TG9)  
v Full check scan enabled (Model TI9, TG9)  
v Double-byte character sets enabled (2 MB RPQ)  
v EIA-232 or RS-485 serial interface or USB interface  
v 2 MB card with user flash storage enabled (Model TI3, TI4, TG3, TG4)  
v 2 MB card in single-byte mode (2 MB RPQ)  
v Applicable parameters for EIA-232 communications:  
– Baud rate (9600, 19 200, or 115 200 bps)  
– DTR/DSR or XON/XOFF control  
v A solid line should appear as the last line of the test pattern.  
If any characters that appear in Figure 36 on page 64 are missing from the test  
pattern that you print, or if the solid line is missing, go to “Problem  
determination” on page 67.  
62 SureMark Printers User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Updated April 2, 2009  
Document insert test  
1. Insert a document in the document insert station. The document present  
indicator should come on.  
v If the document present indicator does not come on, realign the document.  
v If pressing the document feed button does not feed the document, go to  
“Problem determination” on page 67.  
2. Press and hold both buttons to enter offline mode. When the printer ready  
indicator begins blinking, release both buttons.  
3. Press and release the document feed button to print the test pattern. The test  
pattern includes all printable characters in the resident code page, printed in the  
default font.  
4. See Figure 36 on page 64 and verify that your printer has printed correct  
information for your model and configuration:  
v MICR reader enabled and check flipper enabled (Model TI2, TI4, TI8, TI9,  
TG4, TG8, TG9)  
v Optical scanner enabled (Model TI8, TI9, TG8, TG9)  
v Full check scan enabled (Model TI9, TG9)  
v Double-byte character sets enabled (2 MB RPQ)  
v EIA-232 or RS-485 serial interface or USB interface  
v 2 MB card with user flash storage enabled (Model TI3, TI4, TG3, TG4)  
v 2 MB card in single-byte mode (2 MB RPQ)  
v Applicable parameters for EIA-232 communications:  
– Baud rate (9600, 19 200, or 115 200 bps)  
– DTR/DSR or XON/XOFF control  
v A solid line should appear as the last line of the test pattern.  
If any characters that appear in Figure 36 on page 64 are missing from the test  
pattern that you print, or if the solid line is missing, go to “Problem  
determination” on page 67.  
Chapter 5. Testing and problem analysis 63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Updated April 2, 2009  
Figure 36. Offline printer test pattern from the customer receipt station (Models TI1, TI2, TI3,  
TI4, TI8, TI9, TG3, TG4, TG8, TG9)  
Test Pattern Notes:  
1. The serial number that prints will be the actual serial number of your printer.  
2. The microcode level will be the actual level of your printer’s microcode.  
3. The serial interface will be specified as EIA-232, RS-485, or USB, depending on  
which interface is used to attach the printer to the system unit.  
4. The line speed information appears only when the EIA-232 interface is used.  
The value can be either 9.6 Kbps or 19.2 Kbps, depending on the EIA-232  
switch settings. See “EIA-232 communication mode selections (all models  
except TI8, TI9, TG8, TG9)” on page 28.  
5. The EIA-232 control mode information appears only when the EIA-232 interface  
is used. The value can be either DTR/DSR or XON/XOFF, depending on the  
EIA-232 switch settings. See “EIA-232 communication mode selections (all  
models except TI8, TI9, TG8, TG9)” on page 28 or “EIA-232 communication  
mode selections (Models TI8, TI9, TG8, TG9)” on page 30.  
6. The feature enabled lines will appear only when the feature is installed.  
7. These lines break at different points for the test pattern printed in the document  
insert station.  
8. This section contains printer usage statistics that you can use for problem  
determination.  
9. The line across the bottom should be solid with no blank spaces.  
64 SureMark Printers User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Updated April 2, 2009  
MICR reader and check flipper test (Models TI2, TI4, TI8, TI9, TG4, TG8,  
and TG9 only)  
Attention: Failure to perform these steps in the sequence shown will cause the  
entire electronic journal to print on the CR station. Printing the electronic journal  
erases the information from flash storage.  
1. Insert the check face down with the magnetic ink characters to the right.  
2. Press and hold both buttons to enter offline mode. When the printer ready  
indicator begins blinking, release both buttons.  
3. Press and release both buttons again.  
4. The printer will then perform a self-test of the MICR/flipper function.  
5. Remove the check.  
Characters that match the magnetic ink characters are printed on the customer  
receipt and the check is flipped over. Characters that can not be read will be  
replaced with question marks and will be printed at the customer receipt station. If  
the characters are not read properly or the check does not flip, go to “Problem  
determination” on page 67.  
If the Model TI2, TI4, TI8, TI9, TG4, TG8, or TG9 detects noise, it prints a message  
on the customer receipt below the magnetic characters from the check (Figure 37  
and Figure 39 on page 66 are examples; actual numbers may vary). The message  
shows noise characteristics. You can use the noise level to position your printer to  
minimize outside interference with the MICR reader. An acceptable noise level is  
less than 5 percent, if possible.  
Sources of electromagnetic noise (for example, displays, security towers, and other  
sources) can interfere with the MICR reader read head. If the printer shows an  
external noise source, rearrange the printer to make the noise source as far away  
as possible from the right side of the printer. This may eliminate the external noise.  
Figure 37. MICR reader test results (Models TI2, TI4, and TG4): Good noise level  
Magnetic: T1234567890T 0860861190A 0671  
Optical 1: T1234567890T 0860861190A 0671  
Optical 2: T1234567890T 0860861190A 0671  
Composite result:  
T1234567890T 0860861190A 0671  
The average MICR signal is 99% of normal  
Figure 38. MICR reader test results (Models TI8, TI9, TG8, TG9): Good noise level  
Chapter 5. Testing and problem analysis 65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Updated April 2, 2009  
Figure 39. MICR reader test results: Noise level needs adjusting  
Scanned check printout (ModelsTI8, TI9, TG8, TG9)  
Following the description of the test, Models TI8, TI9, TG8, and TG9 also print a  
copy of the check that has been scanned. This printout is in black and white, not  
grayscale.  
EIA-232 hex dump  
To enable hex dump mode for the printer:  
Power off the printer, press and hold the paper feed button and then power on the  
printer with the paper feed button still pressed.  
To exit, power OFF or reset the printer.  
Resetting the printer - offline  
1. Press and hold both buttons (Customer Receipt Feed button and Document  
Feed button) to enter offline mode.  
2. Release both buttons when the Printer Ready indicator begins to blink.  
3. Open the customer receipt cover, then close it. The printer resets.  
Electronic journal dump  
Note: Electronic journal data must be formatted and stored as printed lines for the  
journal data to be printed in readable format.  
1. Press and hold both buttons (Customer Receipt Feed button and Document  
Feed button) to enter offline mode.  
2. Release both buttons when the Printer Ready indicator begins to blink.  
3. Press and release both buttons.  
66 SureMark Printers User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Updated April 2, 2009  
Problem determination  
Any problems that arise with a SureMark printer are either software errors or  
hardware failures. This section contains information to help you determine the  
cause of a problem and how to solve it.  
If the SureMark printer fails, use Table 3 to identify and report the problem. Follow  
the procedures described in the table. If you can not identify and solve the problem,  
call your service representative.  
Table 3. Troubleshooting (Models TI1, TI2, TI3, TI4, TI8, TI9, TG3, TG4, TG8, and TG9)  
If the problem is...  
Then do this...  
Printer ready indicator is OFF.  
v If connected to a system using the RS-485 communication port, check that  
the system is powered ON and cable 7 is connected.  
v If using the EIA-232 communication port or a USB port with a power brick,  
check that the brick power supply is connected to the printer and plugged into  
an ac power source.  
v If using USB communication with a powered USB cable, check that the  
system is powered ON.  
Printer ready indicator is blinking.  
v Check that the customer receipt station has paper loaded correctly. Close the  
cover and push the Customer Receipt Feed button to feed a small amount of  
paper.  
v Check the document insert station print head and paper path for any  
obstructions.  
v Check that the paper and ribbon covers are closed.  
Checks not flipping  
Checks not reading  
Go to “Clearing jams in the check flipper area” on page 55.  
Go to “MICR reader read head cleaning” on page 56 or “Document scanner  
cleaning (Model TI8, TI9, TG8, TG9)” on page 59 or “Document scanner  
calibration (Models TI8, TI9, TG8, TG9)” on page 60.  
Customer receipt station is feeding  
paper, but is not printing.  
v Ensure that the paper roll is not upside down. Go to “Paper loading” on page  
53.  
v Clean the print head. See “Thermal print head cleaning” on page 57.  
Document insert station is not  
printing  
v Check the paper path.  
v Check to see if the ribbon is installed correctly.  
v Change the ribbon, go to “Ribbon loading” on page 51.  
Scanned images streaked, too  
light, or too dark  
v Clean the scanner window. Go to “Document scanner cleaning (Model TI8,  
TI9, TG8, TG9)” on page 59.  
v Calibrate the scanner. Go to “Document scanner calibration (Models TI8, TI9,  
TG8, TG9)” on page 60  
v Clean or replace the registration plate.  
Notes:  
1. Record all symptoms before calling for service.  
2. If you receive software error messages, refer to the application program’s  
software manual.  
3. Call your service representative.  
Chapter 5. Testing and problem analysis 67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Updated April 2, 2009  
68 SureMark Printers User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Updated April 2, 2009  
Part 3. Models TF6 and TM6  
This part contains operational, testing, and problem determination information for  
SureMark printer Models TF6 and TM6.  
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1997, 2006  
69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Updated April 2, 2009  
70 SureMark Printers User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Updated April 2, 2009  
Chapter 6. Operation (Models TF6 and TM6)  
Operating controls and indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71  
Paper loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71  
Thermal print head cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73  
Note: All covers must be installed on the SureMark printer during operation.  
Operating controls and indicators  
There is one triangular-shaped button and one LED indicator located on top of the  
printer.  
When the LED indicator is on continuously, the printer is powered ON and ready for  
printing. When the indicator blinks, one of the following conditions exists:  
v The printer is offline (offline testing is enabled).  
v The printer is out of paper.  
v The cover is open.  
v The cutter is jammed.  
See “Offline test” on page 76 for additional button functions.  
Top cover  
Printer ready  
LED  
Customer receipt  
feed button  
Figure 40. SureMark printer indicator, control, and printing station (Models TF6 and TM6)  
Paper loading  
1. Open the paper cover.  
2. If there is any unused paper or if there is an empty paper roll core in the paper  
roll holder inside the printer, remove it before inserting a new paper roll. You can  
throw the core in the trash can.  
3. Drop the roll into the bucket. The leading edge of the paper should come from  
the direction of the back of the printer and go across the bottom of the roll as  
shown in the diagram. See Figure 41 on page 72.  
Note: The thermal print head will not print on paper with glue on it. If the new  
paper roll was sealed by glue, tear off the 15 to 20 cm (6 to 8 in.) of  
paper with glue on it before loading it.  
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1997, 2006  
71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Updated April 2, 2009  
Top cover  
Paper roll  
Metal  
Spring  
Bucket  
Figure 41. Paper loading path (Models TF6 and TM6)  
4. Pull the end of the paper up over the paper roll and toward the back of the  
printer.  
Note: Refer to the label on the inside of the bottom cover for a diagram of how  
to load paper.  
5. Close the paper cover.  
6. Press the customer receipt feed button to advance the paper and verify that the  
paper is feeding correctly. Feed 30 cm (about 1 ft) of paper through to test for  
correct alignment.  
Attention: Do not pull the receipt paper out of the printer with the paper access  
cover closed. This might cause partial lines of print. Use the customer receipt feed  
button to advance the receipt.  
72 SureMark Printers User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Updated April 2, 2009  
Thermal print head cleaning  
The thermal print head can be cleaned whenever print quality deteriorates.  
1. Open the paper cover.  
2. Using a cotton swab soaked in isopropyl alcohol, gently wipe the print head  
several times on its print line and on the surrounding area. See Figure 42.  
3. Wipe off any residual alcohol with a dry swab.  
If print quality does not improve after cleaning the thermal print head, call for  
service.  
Detail View of Thermal Print Head  
Thermal Print Line  
Figure 42. Print head and print line area (Models TF6 and TM6)  
Chapter 6. Operation (Models TF6 and TM6) 73  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Updated April 2, 2009  
74 SureMark Printers User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Updated April 2, 2009  
Chapter 7. Testing and problem analysis (Models TF6 and  
TM6)  
Testing the printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75  
Offline test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76  
EIA-232 hex dump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77  
Resetting the printer - offline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78  
Problem determination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78  
DANGER  
To avoid a shock hazard, do not connect or disconnect any cables  
or perform installation, maintenance, or reconfiguration of this  
product during an electrical storm.  
DANGER  
To avoid shock hazard:  
The power cord must be connected to a properly wired and  
earthed receptacle.  
Any equipment to which this product will be attached must also  
be connected to properly wired receptacles.  
Note: For translations of these safety notices, see IBM Safety Information—Read  
This First, GA27-4004.  
Testing the printer  
When you power on the SureMark printer, it runs a power-on self-test (POST). If the  
POST finds no errors, the printer is ready for operation. Follow this procedure to  
determine if there are errors.  
Note: Never connect or disconnect the printer when power is applied (when the  
LED is on).  
1. If the printer is powered on, power OFF the printer and power it on again.  
v If the printer is attached to the system with the EIA-232 cable or the standard  
USB cable with a power brick, disconnect the power cord, then reconnect the  
power cord to a properly wired and grounded power source.  
v If the printer is attached to the system with the RS-485 cable, power OFF the  
POS system, and then power on the system, which also powers on the  
printer.  
v If the printer is attached to the system with a powered USB cable, the USB  
attached printer can be hot-plugged.  
v For single-station printers, use the printer’s power ON/OFF switch that is  
located under the top cover. Power OFF the printer, then power ON the  
printer.  
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1997, 2006  
75  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Updated April 2, 2009  
Top cover  
Printer ready  
LED  
Customer receipt  
feed button  
2. Check the status of the Printer Ready indicator:  
Printer Ready indicator ON:  
The POST completed successfully.  
Printer Ready indicator OFF or blinking:  
The POST failed.  
3. If the POST fails or if you suspect problems with your system, see “Problem  
determination” on page 78.  
4. See “Offline test” and run the offline test. If the offline test fails or you suspect  
problems with your system, see “Problem determination” on page 78.  
Offline test  
An offline printing test is provided as a diagnostic tool to ensure the printer is  
operating correctly.  
1. Open the top cover.  
2. Press and hold the paper feed button for 5 seconds. The LED indicator will  
make one quick flash followed by a pause. The beeper will make a short single  
tone periodically.  
Note: The paper feed button is the small button next to the LED.  
3. Release the paper feed button.  
4. Close the top cover.  
5. See Figure 43 on page 77 and verify that your printer has printed correct  
information for your model and configuration:  
v 2 MB card with user flash storage enabled  
v EIA-232, RS-485, or USB serial interface  
v Applicable parameters for EIA-232 communications:  
– Baud rate (9600 or 19 200 bps)  
– DTR/DSR or XON/XOFF control  
v A solid line should appear as the last line of the test pattern.  
If any characters that appear in Figure 43 on page 77 are missing from the test  
pattern you print, or if the solid line is missing, go to Table 4 on page 78.  
76 SureMark Printers User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Updated April 2, 2009  
The Printers S/N is 12345678  
1
Microcode EC level is 30  
Serial Interface: RS232  
Serial IInterfaace: 19.2K Baud, XON / XOFF  
2
3
4
5
,
6
7
|"#$%&'()*+,-./0123456789:;<->?ABCDEFGHIKJK  
LMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ[\]^_ abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvw  
xyz{|}~.CüéâäàåcêëèïîìÄÅÉæÆôöòûùÿÖÜø£ØSsáíóú  
·
ÁÑGg¿ · · · · ¡ · ·  
ÁÂÀI  
¢ · · · · · · · · ãà  
·
^
`
^
`
`
`
`
HIIII · · · · · · · · · · · · · õÐÊËÈÍÎÏÌÓßOO õÕµþÞUUUyY ÷ ·  
Cuts: 12301  
CR Characters Printed:  
CR Motor Steps:  
CR Cover Openings:  
77626  
8
9
88974  
40  
CR Cut Fails:  
7
Figure 43. Offline printer test pattern (Models TF6 and TM6)  
Test Pattern Notes:  
1. The serial number that prints will be the actual serial number of your printer. (If  
the logic card has been replaced, this number must be reset to the original  
serial number.)  
2. The microcode level will be the actual level of your printer’s microcode.  
3. The serial interface will be specified as EIA-232, RS-485, or USB, depending on  
which interface is used to attach the printer to the system unit.  
4. The line speed information appears only when the EIA-232 interface is used.  
The value can be either 9.6 K Baud or 19.2 K Baud, depending on the EIA-232  
switch settings. See “EIA-232 communication mode selections (all models  
except TI8, TI9, TG8, TG9)” on page 28.  
5. The EIA-232 control mode information appears only when the EIA-232 interface  
is used. The value can be either DTR/DSR or XON/XOFF, depending on the  
EIA-232 switch settings. See “EIA-232 communication mode selections (all  
models except TI8, TI9, TG8, TG9)” on page 28.  
6. The feature-enabled lines will appear only when a feature is installed.  
7. This section contains the test pattern.  
8. This section contains printer usage statistics that you can use for problem  
determination.  
9. The line across the bottom should be solid with no blank spaces.  
EIA-232 hex dump  
An EIA-232 hex dump is provided to help diagnose problems with Models TM6 and  
TF6.  
To enable hex dump mode for the Model TF6 or TM6 printer:  
Power off the printer, press and hold the paper feed button and then power on the  
printer with the paper feed button still pressed.  
Chapter 7. Testing and problem analysis (Models TF6 and TM6) 77  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Updated April 2, 2009  
To exit, power OFF or reset the printer.  
Resetting the printer - offline  
To reset the printer:  
1. Open the top cover.  
2. Power off the printer using the power ON/OFF switch that is located in the right  
front corner of the printer.  
3. Power on the printer.  
Problem determination  
Any problems that arise with a SureMark printer are either software errors or  
hardware failures. This section contains information to help you determine the  
cause of a problem and how to solve it.  
If the SureMark printer fails, use Table 4 to identify and report the problem. Follow  
the procedures described in the table. If you can not identify and solve the problem,  
call your service representative.  
Table 4. Troubleshooting (Models TF6 and TM6)  
If the problem is...  
Then do this...  
Printer ready indicator is OFF.  
v Check that the printer power switch, which is located under the top cover, is  
set ON.  
v If connected to a system using the RS-485 communication port, check that  
the system is powered on and cable 7 is connected.  
v If using the EIA-232 communication port or a USB port with a power brick,  
check that the brick power supply is connected to the printer and plugged into  
an ac power source.  
v If using USB communication with a powered USB cable, check that the  
system is powered ON.  
Printer ready indicator is blinking.  
v Check that the customer receipt station has paper loaded correctly. Close the  
cover and push the Customer Receipt Feed button to feed a small amount of  
paper.  
v Check that the cover is closed.  
Customer receipt station is feeding  
paper, but is not printing.  
v Ensure that the paper roll is in correctly. Go to “Paper loading” on page 53.  
v Clean the print head. See “Thermal print head cleaning” on page 57.  
Notes:  
1. Record all symptoms before calling for service.  
2. If you receive software error messages, refer to the application program’s  
software manual.  
3. Call your service representative.  
78 SureMark Printers User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Updated April 2, 2009  
Part 4. Appendixes  
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1997, 2006  
79  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Updated April 2, 2009  
80 SureMark Printers User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Updated April 2, 2009  
Appendix A. Consumable supplies  
Paper specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81  
Thermal paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81  
Document insert forms (Models TI1, TI2, TI3, TI4, TI8, TI9, TG3, TG4, TG8,  
and TG9 only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82  
Single and multipart form specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82  
Specifications for documents that can be flipped . . . . . . . . . . 82  
Print ribbons (Models TI1, TI2, TI3, TI4, TI8, TI9, TG3, TG4, TG8, and TG9  
only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83  
Expendable supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83  
%
Paper specifications  
Attention: Using an inferior grade of paper can affect print quality as well as the  
life of print heads and the printer mechanism. See “Resources on the Internet” on  
page 44 for information about OEM paper recommended for SureMark printers.  
Note: When selecting a paper, ensure that the paper’s archive life meets the  
requirements of the tax authorities of your country for archiving tax-related  
data.  
Thermal paper  
The paper used in the thermal receipt station must meet the following requirements:  
Width 79.5 0.5 mm (3.13 0.02 in.)  
Outside Diameter  
80 mm (3.15 in.) maximum for thermal/impact SureMark printers  
90 mm (3.54 in.) maximum for single-station SureMark printers  
Thickness  
0.0457–0.094 mm (0.0018–0.0037 in.) operating thickness range  
Important  
Paper has a significant manufacturing tolerance and nominal paper  
designations do not reflect actual measurements. The manufacturing  
tolerance must fall within the published operating thickness range. IBM  
strongly recommends that customers test paper in their specific  
configuration before use. The intent of this specification is that if any  
spot measurement of the paper is outside the specified range, the  
paper is deemed not to meet the specification and the customer is  
responsible for any problems caused by paper jams.  
Weight  
60 19 g/m2 (16 5 lb)  
The paper must be wound with the printing side facing out and with the outer edge  
glued to prevent unraveling. The paper should not be attached to the core in any  
manner. There should be 1.5 to 2.1 m (5 to 7 ft.) of red stripe at the end of the roll.  
Note: Non-topcoated thermal paper can be recycled along with other paper  
products. They can also be incinerated and sent to landfills with no more  
effect on the environment than regular office paper waste.  
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1997, 2006  
81  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Updated April 2, 2009  
Important  
Printer reliability and performance are directly related to the quality of the  
supplies used by the customer. The published parameters for printer  
performance are established using supplies that meet the specifications listed  
above.  
Thermal paper with post-processing, such as (but not limited to) watermarks,  
coupons, or advertisements printed on the front or back of the paper, is not  
covered by IBM specifications. Some inks and printing processes will work  
acceptably, while others will not. Printer problems that are caused by supplies  
that do not meet IBM specifications may result in a billable service call,  
regardless of the existence of a service contract.  
Document insert forms (Models TI1, TI2, TI3, TI4, TI8, TI9, TG3, TG4,  
TG8, and TG9 only)  
The printers will accommodate single and multipart forms.  
Single and multipart form specifications  
Specification  
Value  
Minimum width:  
50 mm (2 in.)  
Maximum thickness of multipart forms:  
0.47 mm (0.0185 in.)  
0.08 mm (0.003 in.)  
Maximum thickness of front sheet, multipart  
forms:  
Minimum thickness of single-part form:  
Maximum thickness of single-part form:  
Weight range for single-part forms:  
0.10 mm (0.004 in.)  
0.2 mm (0.008 in.)  
68–90 g/m2 (18–24 #)  
For best reliability, paper grain should be in the direction that the paper is fed into the  
printer.  
Notes:  
1. Test all forms in the printer to ensure acceptable performance prior to buying a  
significant quantity. There should be no binding holes or other holes within 10  
mm (0.4 in.) from the right edge of the form.  
2. Forms less than 0.15 mm (0.006 in.) thick with the grain of the paper  
perpendicular to the feed direction (short-grain paper) should not be used for  
landscape printing.  
Specifications for documents that can be flipped  
Multipart forms and short-grain single-part forms are not supported.  
Specification  
Value  
Minimum form length:  
Maximum form length:  
Maximum form width:  
Paper weight:  
80 mm (3.14 in.)  
223 mm (8.78 in.)  
102 mm (4 in.)  
75–95 g/m2  
82 SureMark Printers User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Updated April 2, 2009  
Print ribbons (Models TI1, TI2, TI3, TI4, TI8, TI9, TG3, TG4, TG8, and  
TG9 only)  
The ribbon is an Epson ERC-35 or equivalent. In addition to the Epson ERC-35, the  
Infotech RE35P ribbon was tested and approved for use in the SureMark printer.  
The Infotech ribbon, order number RE35P, Black, is available from:  
Infotech, Inc.  
2215 29th Street SE #B-1  
Grand Rapids, MI 49508  
Phone: (616) 452-5444  
Fax: (616) 452-5499  
Attention: Using an inferior grade of ribbon can affect print quality and the life of  
print heads and the printer mechanism.  
% Expendable supplies  
%
%
See “Resources on the Internet” on page 44 for information about OEM paper  
certifications for the SureMark printers.  
%
%
v Paper for the printer, order P/N locally  
v Q-Tip/Cotton Swab, P/N 69X7671  
Appendix A. Consumable supplies 83  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Updated April 2, 2009  
84 SureMark Printers User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Updated April 2, 2009  
Appendix B. Printer maintenance procedures  
Note: Power OFF all system components and unplug all power cables prior to  
cleaning.  
% Product care procedures  
%
%
%
Owners and users should periodically inspect their system unit and its components  
for cleanliness and perform the following procedures based on usage and  
environmental characteristics.  
%
1. Clean the cover for cosmetic purposes as required.  
%
%
v IBM suggests the use of a soft clean cloth with warm soapy water for  
cleaning the plastic parts on IBM product  
%
v Don’t use abrasives or any alkaline, ammonia, or chloride-based cleaner.  
%
%
%
Note: Do not apply cleaning solution directly to the cover. Always apply the  
cleaner on a clean cloth and then wipe the cover with the damp cloth.  
Be certain that the cloth is only damp and not dripping wet.  
%
2. MICR Reader Read Head Cleaning as required.  
%
%
%
v The MICR reader read head should be cleaned after 10 000 checks are  
processed or every 3 months. See “MICR reader read head cleaning” on  
page 56.  
%
%
3. Document scanner cleaning as required. (Model TI8, TI9, TG8, TG9 only.) See  
“Document scanner cleaning (Model TI8, TI9, TG8, TG9)” on page 59.  
%
%
%
4. Thermal Printhead Cleaning as required.  
The thermal printhead can be cleaned whenever print quality deteriorates.  
a. Open the paper cover.  
%
%
%
b. Using a cotton swab soaked in isopropyl alcohol, gently wipe the printhead  
several times on its print line and on the surrounding area. (See Figure 33  
on page 58 for more details.)  
%
c. Wipe off any residual alcohol with a dry swab.  
%
%
If the print quality does not improve after cleaning the thermal printhead, call  
for Service.  
Service provider system maintenance procedures  
Preventive Maintenance Scheduling  
The following procedures can be performed during normal service call  
routines:  
Models TI1, TI2, TI3, TI4, TI8, TI9, TG3, TG4, TG8, and TG9  
v Clean the dust and debris from the paper cover and ribbon cover areas.  
v If the printer has a check flipper, clean dust and debris from the area under the  
flipper cover and the flipper cartridge.  
v Check the document scanner for dust and dirt (Models TI8, TI9, TG8, TG9 only).  
Models TF6 and TM6  
v Clean the dust and debris from the top cover area.  
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1997, 2006  
85  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Updated April 2, 2009  
86 SureMark Printers User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Updated April 2, 2009  
Appendix C. Technical information  
General description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87  
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87  
Memory units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89  
Immediate commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89  
Voltage conversion circuitry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89  
RS-485 serial I/O parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90  
Cash drawer connector pin assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90  
EIA-232 connector pin assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91  
EIA-232 parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91  
USB connector pin assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92  
Code page definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92  
Generic code page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93  
Code page 437. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94  
Code page 858. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95  
Code page 860. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96  
Code page 863. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97  
Code page 865. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98  
Character fonts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98  
Thermal printing font . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98  
Impact printing fonts (Models TI1, TI2, TI3, TI4, TI8, TI9, TG3, TG4, TG8, and  
TG9) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99  
General description  
All SureMark printers print the customer receipt using the thermal print head. For  
SureMark printers that include a document insert station, documents are printed  
using the impact head.  
Thermal printing occurs by placing a heating element against a thermally sensitive  
paper. By energizing the elements, dots are formed. Thermal printers print dot rows  
horizontally across the page; 576 dots make up a single dot row across the paper.  
Printing continues row by row until the entire character is formed.  
Impact printing utilizes a standard ballistic print head. Each wire is fired against an  
inked ribbon which places a dot on the paper.  
SureMark printers contain all the circuitry, processing hardware, and software for  
operating a thermal and, except for Models TF6 and TM6, an impact printer  
mechanism. SureMark printers do not contain a power supply. However, they do  
contain voltage conversion circuitry to allow connection to a standard IBM system  
interface or to an EIA-232 24 V power supply. (See “Power requirements” on page  
12 for specific power supply specifications.)  
Specifications  
The information in the Document Insert Station column of Table 5 on page 88  
applies only to SureMark Models TI1, TI2, TI3, TI4, TI8, TI9, TG3, TG4, TG8, and  
TG9. There is no document insert station on Models TF6 and TM6.  
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1997, 2006  
87  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Updated April 2, 2009  
Table 5. Station characteristics  
Characteristic Customer Receipt Station  
Document Insert Station  
Speed (see  
note following  
table)  
Models TI1 and TI2: 19.6 lps at 6 lpi, 26 lps at 8 lpi  
4.3 lps  
Models TI3/TI4/TI8/TI9/TG3/TG4/TG8/TG9:  
39.2 lps at 6 lpi, 52 lps at 8 lpi;  
Models TF6 and TM6: 39.2 lps at 6 lpi, 52 lps at 8 lpi  
All models: 80 mm (3.54 in.)  
Paper Width  
Print Width  
All SureMark printers: 34 characters at 12 cpi,  
44 characters at 15 cpi,  
37 characters at 12 cpi,  
47 characters at 15 cpi,  
52 characters at 17 cpi.  
48 characters at 17 cpi  
All models except TI1 and TI2:  
57 characters at 20 cpi  
Pitch  
All SureMark printers: 12, 15, 17 cpi  
12, 15, 17 cpi  
All models except TI1 and TI2: 20 cpi  
Note: In order to conserve power, SureMark Models TI3, TI4, TI8, TI9, TG3, TG4,  
TG8, TG9, TF6 and TM6 reduce their throughput when printing high print  
densities, such as logo messages or full black lines. Because these types of  
print messages are used on a limited basis, the overall performance when  
printing a customer receipt is not noticeably affected.  
The reduced print speed is based on the number of print dots that are turned  
on for a given print line, which is defined as dot utilization. Dot utilization is  
typically low for normal character printing and up to 100% for full black line  
printing. The SureMark printer operates at 52 lps at low dot utilization, and at  
slower speeds as the dot utilization increases.  
Table 6. Sound characteristics  
Type  
Description  
LwAd  
Idling (bels) Operating  
(dB)  
LpAm  
Idling (dB)  
<LpA>m  
Operating  
(bels)  
Operating  
(dB)  
Idling (dB)  
SureMark  
TI1  
Printer  
5.7  
N/A  
61.5  
N/A  
47  
N/A  
Notes:  
LwAd The declared upper limit of the sound power level for a random  
sample of machines.  
LpAm The mean value of the A-weighted sound pressure levels at the  
operator position (if any) for a random sample of machines.  
<LpA>m  
The mean value of the A-weighted sound pressure levels at the  
one-meter (bystander) positions for a random sample of machines.  
N/A  
Indicates not applicable.  
All measurements were made in accordance with ISO 7779 and reported in  
conformance with ISO 9296.  
88 SureMark Printers User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Updated April 2, 2009  
Memory units  
Random access memory (RAM) is used for storing the image data for the thermal  
print head and program code. It is also used for storing incoming data from the  
communication port.  
Flash memory is used for many purposes, including:  
v Character set storage (80 KB)  
v Personalized message storage (8 KB)  
v Logo or APA message storage (64 KB)  
v Flash memory data storage (104 KB on standard printers, 1.9 MB on printers  
with the 2 MB memory option, 8 MB on printers with the 8 MB memory option)  
v Program code and resident character sets (256 KB) (except Models TI8 and TI9)  
v For Models TI8 and TI9, 1.25 MB is available for all uses.  
Personalized messages are those messages that are printed on each receipt in a  
POS environment. Storing these messages in the flash memory greatly reduces the  
data transmission time to the printer and the processing time of that data by the  
microprocessor. This is also true of graphics or APA messages, which require a  
significant amount of transmission and processing time.  
Flash memory can also be used as a storage place for customer data. This data  
could be journal data.  
Immediate commands  
The SureMark printer has 4 KB of memory on Models TI1 and TI2, and 16 KB of  
memory on Models TI3, TI4, TI8, TI9, TG3, TG4, TG8, TG9, TF6, and TM6 to store  
incoming commands and data.  
Most commands are received and then executed sequentially. However, several  
commands execute immediately upon receipt. These commands are:  
v “Download graphics (logo) commands” on page 115  
v “Predefine messages” on page 117  
v “Download user-defined characters” on page 118  
v “Extended address command-request printer ID” on page 112  
v “Real-time requests” on page 175.  
Voltage conversion circuitry  
The printer requires two voltages. The print heads and motors use +24 V dc.  
Powering the logic circuitry requires +5 V dc. Printer input voltage is one of the  
following:  
Communication Mode  
Power Requirement  
+38 V dc and +5 V dc  
+24 V dc  
RS-485  
EIA-232  
USB  
+24 V dc  
Appendix C. Technical information 89  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Updated April 2, 2009  
In each case, a single dc-to-dc converter converts voltage to +24 V dc and +5 V dc.  
An auto-switch circuit on the interface card senses the operating mode (RS-485,  
EIA-232, powered USB, or standard USB with power brick) and routes input  
voltages appropriately.  
v When operating in RS-485 mode, the +38 V dc is converted to +24 V dc and the  
+5 V dc is passed straight through.  
v When operating in EIA-232 or USB mode, the +24 V dc is passed through and is  
also converted to +5 V dc.  
Note: Both voltage sources should not be connected to the printer at the same  
time, even if one of the sources is powered off. System damage could occur  
under these conditions.  
RS-485 serial I/O parameters  
Printer Address  
35  
AWAIT-60H  
extra stop bits (after printer address)  
BWAIT-48H  
extra bits/byte (after printer data bytes)  
For more information about serial I/O communications, see 4680 Store Systems  
Serial I/O Channel Attachment Information, which is available from IBM Industry  
Corporate Relations.  
Cash drawer connector pin assignments  
The SureMark printers have a single cash drawer connector. This connector can  
drive either a single cash drawer (see “Description of models” on page 4 for the  
cable part number) or two cash drawers using a special cable. The connector also  
provides a status line which indicates if one of the cash drawers is open.  
Drive voltage for each cash drawer solenoid is 24 V dc at a current of 1 ampere.  
Connector pins are assigned as follows:  
Table 7. Cash drawer connector pin assignments  
Pin  
1
Signal  
Not Connected  
Solenoid 1 Driver  
Cash Drawer Status  
+24 V dc  
2
3
4
5
Solenoid 2 Driver  
Ground  
6
The cash drawer solenoids should be connected between pins 4 and 2 for cash  
drawer 1 and between pins 4 and 5 for cash drawer 2. A Y-cable is required to bring  
out all the appropriate lines to attach the two units.  
The cash drawer status line has a 10k resistor pull-up connected to the +5 V dc.  
90 SureMark Printers User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Updated April 2, 2009  
Note: The drawer sensor should switch pin 6 to pin 3 when the drawer is open.  
EIA-232 connector pin assignments  
SureMark printers contain a 9-pin D-shell connector port for EIA-232  
communication. This port is on the interface card, accessible under the printer  
without removing printer covers. The connector has the following pin functions:  
Table 8. EIA-232 connector pin functions  
Pin  
Signal  
Pin  
Signal  
1
Not Connected  
6
DSR (Not connected on 3-wire  
cable)  
2
3
4
Transmit  
Receive  
7
8
9
Not Connected  
RTS  
DTR (Not connected on 3-wire  
cable)  
Not Connected  
5
Signal Ground  
See “Description of models” on page 4 for the cable part number.  
EIA-232 parameters  
Protocol  
DTR/DSR mode or XON/XOFF mode. Dip switch selectable.  
Baud rate  
9600 or 19 200 kbps. Dip switch selectable.  
Start 1 bit  
Data 8 bits  
Parity None  
Stop 1 bit  
Table 9. 9-pin to 9-pin EIA-232 connector layout  
System Description  
Pin 2 - Rx (input)  
Printer Description  
Pin 2- Tx (Output)  
Pin 3 - Rx (Input)  
Pin 4 - DTR (Input)  
Pin 5 - Gnd  
Pin 3 - Tx (Output)  
Pin 4 - DTR (Output)  
Pin 5 - Gnd  
Pin 6 - DSR (Input)  
Pin 6 - DSR (Output)  
Pin 8 - RTS (Output)  
Pin 8 - CTS (Input)  
Table 10. 25-pin to 25-pin EIA-232 connector layout  
System Description  
Pin 2 - Tx (Output)  
Pin 3 - Rx (Input)  
Pin 5 - CTS (Input)  
Pin 6 - DSR (Input)  
Pin 7 - Gnd  
Printer Description  
Pin 3 - Rx (Input)  
Pin 2 - Tx (Output)  
Pin 8 - RTS (Output)  
Pin 6 - DSR (Output)  
Pin 5 - Gnd  
Pin 20 - DTR (Output)  
Pin 4 - DTR (Input)  
Appendix C. Technical information 91  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Updated April 2, 2009  
USB connector pin assignments  
SureMark printers contain a USB port, if the USB feature is installed. This port is on  
the interface card, accessible under the printer without removing printer covers.  
Connection to the port can be with either the standard USB Type B connector,  
which requires a 24 V power brick, or with the powered USB connector, which  
contains 24 V power lines within the communications cable.  
The standard USB Type B connector has the following pin functions:  
Table 11. Standard USB connector pin assignments  
Pin  
1
Signal  
Vbus (+5 V dc)  
Minus data  
Plus data  
Ground  
2
3
4
The powered USB connector has the following pin functions:  
Table 12. Powered USB connector pin assignments  
Pin  
1
Signal  
Ground (+24 V dc)  
+24 V dc  
2
3
Ground (Vbus)  
Plus data  
4
5
Minus data  
6
Vbus +5 V dc  
+24 V dc  
7
8
Ground (+24 V dc)  
See “Description of models” on page 4 for the cable part numbers.  
Code page definitions  
The SureMark printer has a resident character set that supports these code pages:  
v Generic  
v 437 (US)  
v 850 (International) – Models TI1 and TI2 only  
v 858 (International) – Models TI3, TI4, TI8, TI9, TG3, TG4, TG8, TG9, TF6 and  
TM6  
v 860 (Portuguese)  
v 863 (Canadian French)  
v 865 (Norwegian)  
Note: Code page 850 contains all characters from code page 858, except the  
EURO character.  
Four user-defined character sets for thermal printing and two character sets for  
impact printing can be downloaded, if desired, using the 4610 Installation Utility  
Diskette. See “Resources on the Internet” on page 44 for more information.  
92 SureMark Printers User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Updated April 2, 2009  
Generic code page  
Hex  
1st  
2nd  
°
Pt  
¥
C
tm  
sm  
§
R
Figure 44. Printer’s resident character set - generic code page  
Appendix C. Technical information 93  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Updated April 2, 2009  
Code page 437  
Figure 45. Code Page 437  
94 SureMark Printers User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Updated April 2, 2009  
Code page 858  
Hex1st  
2_ 3_ 4_ 5_ 6_ 7_ 8_ 9_ A_ B_ C_ D_ E_ F_  
2nd  
_0  
.
!
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
.
a
b
c
d
e
f
p
q
r
Ç
ü
é
â
ä
à
å
ç
ê
ë
è
ï
É
æ
Æ
ô
á
í
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
ð
Ð
Ê
Ë
È
C
Í
Ó
.
_1  
_2  
_3  
_4  
_5  
_6  
_7  
_8  
_9  
_A  
_B  
_C  
_D  
_E  
_F  
"
ó
ú
ñ
Ñ
G
g
¿
.
.
Ô
Ò
õ
Õ
µ
Þ
þ
Ú
Û
Ù
ý
.
.
#
$
%
&
'
s
t
.
ö
.
.
u
v
w
x
y
z
{
ò
Á
Â
À
I
.
û
÷
.
G
H
I
g
h
i
ù
Î
(
ÿ
Ï
.
)
Ö
Ü
ø
£
.
.
*
J
j
.
.
.
+
,
;
K
L
k
l
.
.
.
.
<
=
>
?
\
|
î
.
.
-
M
N
O
]
m
n
o
}
ì
Ø
S
s
i
.
Ý
.
.
¢
.
.
^
~
.
Ä
Å
.
Ì
H
I
/
-
.
.
¤
.
.
Figure 46. Code Page 858  
Appendix C. Technical information 95  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Updated April 2, 2009  
Code page 860  
Figure 47. Code Page 860  
96 SureMark Printers User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Updated April 2, 2009  
Code page 863  
Figure 48. Code Page 863  
Appendix C. Technical information 97  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Updated April 2, 2009  
Code page 865  
Figure 49. Code Page 865  
Character fonts  
This section describes font capabilities. For more information about font-related  
commands, see:  
v “Download user-defined characters” on page 118  
v “Set print station” on page 134  
v “Set print mode” on page 129  
v “Set code page” on page 135  
v “Set intercharacter spacing” on page 135  
v “Select user-defined or resident character sets” on page 134  
Thermal printing font  
There are three font sizes for the resident character set on Models TI3, TI4, TI8,  
TI9, TG3, TG4, TG8, TG9, TF6, and TM6 (only fonts A and B are available for  
Models TI1 and TI2):  
v Font A is 10 dots (wide) × 20 dots (high) with the last 2-dot row used for  
descenders.  
(1.25 mm × 2.5 mm character height including descenders, 1.25 mm × 2.25 mm  
excluding descenders)  
v Font B is 12 dots (wide) × 24 dots (high) with the last 2-dot row used for  
descenders.  
(1.5 mm × 3.0 mm character height including descenders, 1.5 mm × 2.75 mm  
excluding descenders)  
98 SureMark Printers User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Updated April 2, 2009  
v Font C is 8 dots (wide) × 16 dots (high) with the last 2-dot row used for  
descenders.  
(1.0 mm × 2.0 mm character height including descenders, 1.0 mm × 1.75 mm  
excluding descenders)  
v Font C, starting with level 38 micro code, is 8 dots (wide) and 20 dots (high) with  
the last 2-dot row used for descenders.  
(1.0 mm × 2.5 mm character height including descenders, 1.0 mm × 2.25 mm  
excluding descenders)  
The number of characters printed per inch depends on the character size, the  
intercharacter spacing, and the chosen font. For example:  
v 17 cpi ⇒ 10-dot wide character + 2-dot space (font A) ⇒ 48 characters per line  
v 15 cpi ⇒ 10-dot wide character + 3-dot space (font A) ⇒ 44 characters per line  
v 12 cpi ⇒ 12-dot wide character + 5-dot space (font B) ⇒ 34 characters per line  
v 20 cpi ⇒ 8-dot wide character + 2-dot space (font C) ⇒ 57 characters per line  
You can choose the character size of four user-defined character sets (code pages)  
or two proportional fonts. The parameter ranges for user-defined character sets are:  
v 8 ≤ dot width ≤ 16  
v 16 ≤ dot height ≤ 32 (must be a multiple of 2)  
The parameter ranges for characters in proportional fonts are:  
v 8 ≤ dot width ≤ 32  
v 8 ≤ dot height ≤ 32  
Notes:  
1. Any of the thermal printing fonts can be scaled up to eight times the defined  
width and eight times the defined height. The scaling factor for the width does  
not have to equal the scaling factor for the height. For example, you could  
specify twice the width and five times the height.  
2. For paper that has a width of 80 mm, the cash receipt print line is 72 mm (2.83  
in.) long. There are 576 dots per line and 203 dots per inch.  
Impact printing fonts (Models TI1, TI2, TI3, TI4, TI8, TI9, TG3, TG4, TG8,  
and TG9)  
The resident character set has a font of 7 half-dots (wide) × 9 dots (high). There are  
no descenders.  
v Font A prints 150 half-dots per inch = resident character size is 1.2 mm × 2 mm.  
v Font B prints 120 half-dots per inch = resident character size is 1.5 mm × 2 mm.  
The number of characters printed per inch depends on the character size, the  
intercharacter spacing, and the chosen font. For example:  
v 17 cpi ⇒ font A with 7 half-dot-wide character + 2 half-dot space ⇒ 52  
characters per line  
v 15 cpi ⇒ font A with 7 half-dot-wide character + 3 half-dot space ⇒ 47  
characters per line  
v 12 cpi ⇒ font B with 7 half-dot-wide character + 3 half-dot space ⇒ 37  
characters per line  
You can choose the character size of the two user-defined character sets (code  
pages) within the following parameters:  
v 4 ≤ half-dot width ≤ 16  
v 4 ≤ dot height ≤ 16  
Appendix C. Technical information 99  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Updated April 2, 2009  
Notes:  
1. Any of the impact printing fonts can be printed double-wide, double-high, or both  
double-wide and double-high unless the dot height is more than 9. With Models  
TI1 and TI2, you can not print the character double-high if its dot height is more  
than 9. For better print quality with double-high characters, set the printer to  
unidirectional print mode. (See “Set or cancel unidirectional printing” on page  
133.)  
2. User-defined characters greater than 9 dots high can not be printed in  
landscape mode.  
3. The portrait document print line is 80.35 mm (3.16 inches) long. There are 474  
half-dots per line for font A, and 379 half-dots per line for font B. The landscape  
print line depends on the size of the document inserted.  
4. You can print in two densities on the impact printer: 120 half-dots per inch or  
150 half-dots per inch. Refer to the description of bits 0 and 1 in “Set print  
mode” on page 129 for information about changing the density.  
100 SureMark Printers User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Updated April 2, 2009  
Appendix D. EIA-232 programming information  
EIA-232 commands summary by function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104  
Alphabetized EIA-232 commands summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108  
System commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111  
Exercise program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111  
Verify previous commands completed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111  
Status request. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112  
Extended address command-request printer ID . . . . . . . . . . . 112  
Preset or Onetime-Set commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114  
All models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114  
Models TI8 and TI9 only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114  
Download graphics (logo) commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115  
Predefine messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117  
Download user-defined characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118  
Thermal code page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119  
Proportional font . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120  
Impact code page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122  
Flash storage write . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123  
Erase flash EPROM sector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123  
Send checksum of flash EPROM sector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124  
Microcode tolerance (MCT) information - loading . . . . . . . . . . . 124  
Microcode tolerance (MCT) information - request . . . . . . . . . . . 125  
Setup commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129  
Set print mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129  
Set or cancel double-wide mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130  
Set or cancel double-high mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131  
Set or cancel underline mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131  
Set or cancel overline mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131  
Set or cancel invert mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131  
Set or cancel emphasized printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132  
Select maximum print speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132  
Set or cancel unidirectional printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133  
Request document length for landscape print . . . . . . . . . . . . 133  
Set document length for landscape print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133  
Set print station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134  
Select user-defined or resident character sets . . . . . . . . . . . . 134  
Set code page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135  
Set intercharacter spacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135  
Set or cancel rotated characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135  
Set print station parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136  
Select 1/8-inch line spacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136  
Select 1/6-inch line spacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136  
Select color printing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137  
Set line spacing using minimum units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137  
Set sheet eject length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138  
Set horizontal tab positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138  
Set left margin position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138  
Set relative position. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139  
Align positions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139  
Set error recovery function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140  
Define document wait time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141  
Status sent to system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141  
Select character for reprinted lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142  
Re-initialize the printer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142  
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1997, 2006  
101  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Updated April 2, 2009  
Enable or disable the feed buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143  
Enable or disable the beeper (Models TF6 and TM6 only) . . . . . . . 143  
Enable or disable upside-down printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144  
Select character size for scalable fonts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145  
Fix font matrix. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146  
Print logo inline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146  
Select thermal paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147  
Bar code commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147  
Print bar code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147  
Print bar code examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152  
Select horizontal size of bar code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152  
Select bar code height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152  
Select printing position of human readable information (HRI) . . . . . . 152  
Select font for HRI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153  
Print PDF417 bar code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153  
Print PDF417 bar code using binary mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154  
Select PDF417 ECC (error correction codewords) level . . . . . . . . 154  
Select aspect ratio PDF417 bar code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155  
Enable PDF417 truncation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155  
Print character commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156  
Print and line feed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156  
Print and line feed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156  
Print, form feed, and cut the paper (FF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156  
Print and feed paper n lines. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156  
Print and feed paper using minimum units . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156  
Print and feed paper in reverse using minimum units . . . . . . . . . 157  
Print graphic messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157  
Select and print a graphics (logo) command. . . . . . . . . . . . . 157  
Print predefined graphics (logo) command . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159  
Print predefined messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159  
Miscellaneous commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160  
Tab to next tab stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160  
Return home (select print head location) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160  
Paper cut/DI eject . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161  
Generate drive pulse for cash drawer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161  
Retrieve the flash storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161  
Retrieve size of user flash storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162  
Retrieve printer usage statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162  
Check processing commands (Models TI2, TI4, TI8, TI9, TG4, TG8, and TG9  
only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164  
Models TI8 and TI9 MICR read commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164  
MICR read . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165  
Flip check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166  
Document scanner commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166  
Start scan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166  
Print scanned image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168  
Store scanned image and/or select partial image for retrieval . . . . . . 169  
Retrieve scanned image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172  
Scanner calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173  
Retrieve next image location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174  
Retrieve first unread image location. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174  
Select compression format and scanned image threshold. . . . . . . . 174  
Asynchronous (real-time) commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175  
Real-time requests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175  
Data buffer management and batch printing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176  
Reset line count . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176  
102 SureMark Printers User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Updated April 2, 2009  
Disable line count . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176  
Hold printing until buffer is released . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177  
Page mode printing commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177  
Select page mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177  
Select standard mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177  
Select printable area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178  
Select printing direction/position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178  
Set vertical position. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178  
Set relative vertical position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179  
Set left margin position (standard mode), set absolute print position (page  
mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179  
Set relative horizontal position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180  
Set printing position. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180  
Print and form feed and cut the paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181  
Print page in page mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181  
Clear print data in page mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181  
Document handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181  
Portrait mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181  
Landscape mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182  
Landscape printing commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183  
Status summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184  
Message from the printer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184  
Status byte 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184  
Status byte 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185  
Status byte 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185  
Status byte 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185  
Status byte 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186  
Status byte 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186  
Status byte 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186  
Status byte 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186  
This information applies only to SureMark printers that attach to a POS system with  
an EIA-232 cable connection.  
If you use the RS-485 or USB communications interface, refer to either the  
SureMark driver documentation in the appropriate IBM book for your operating  
system (see Table 13) or, when using OPOS drivers, to the OLE for Retail POS  
Application Programming Guide.  
Table 13. Driver documentation by operating system  
Operating System  
IBM Publication  
4690 OS Version 1 and  
Version 2  
IBM 4690 OS API Specification for IBM 4610 Printers  
DOS  
IBM Point-of-Sale Subsystem for DOS Programming  
Reference  
OS/2, Windows NT, Windows IBM Point of Sale Subsystem Programming Reference and  
95, and Windows 3.1x User’s Guide  
The 4690 OS manual is available on the current maintenance diskette for the IBM  
4690 Operating System. Current versions of all three manuals are available on the  
Internet. See “Resources on the Internet” on page 44 for more information.  
Appendix D. EIA-232 programming information 103  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Updated April 2, 2009  
EIA-232 commands summary by function  
The commands listed in Table 14 are described in detail in following sections of this  
appendix.  
Table 14. EIA-232 commands organized by function  
Description  
Command  
Page  
System Commands  
Exercise Program  
Status request  
ESC x or X'1B78'  
111  
112  
112  
ESC v or X'1B76'  
Extended address command  
(request printer ID)  
GS | SOH or X'1D4901' This is an IMMEDIATE command.  
Verify previous commands  
completed  
X'1B008000'  
111  
115  
Preset or Onetime-Set Commands  
Download graphics (logo)  
commands  
GS * logo# n1 n2 data or X'1D2A';logo#;n1;n2;data  
Predefine messages  
GS : message# data GS : or X'1D3A; message#;data;'X'1D3A'  
117  
118  
119  
120  
123  
123  
124  
Download user-defined characters ESC & s n m data or X'1B26;s;n;m;data'  
Thermal code page  
Proportional font  
MCT commands  
ESC & s n m data or X'1B26;s;n;m;data'  
ESC ’ n1 n2 data or X'1B27;n1;n2;data'  
ESC # n or X'1B23;n'  
Flash storage write  
Erase flash EPROM sector  
Send checksum of flash EPROM ESC ″ n or X'1B22;n'  
sector  
Microcode tolerance (MCT)  
information - loading  
ESC M n h l or X'1B4D;n;h;l'.  
124  
125  
Microcode tolerance (MCT)  
information - request  
ESC S n or X'1B53;n'  
Setup Commands  
Set print mode  
ESC ! n or X'1B21;n'  
ESC W n or X'1B57;n'  
ESC h n or X'1B68;n'  
ESC − n or X'1B2D;n':  
ESC x‘5F’ n or X'1B5F;n'  
ESC H n or X'1B48;n'  
129  
130  
131  
131  
131  
131  
132  
132  
133  
Set or cancel double-wide mode  
Set or cancel double-high mode  
Set or cancel underline mode  
Set or cancel overline mode  
Set or cancel invert mode  
Set or cancel emphasized printing ESC G n or X'1B47;n'  
Select maximum print speed  
ESC / n or X'1B;2F;n'  
ESC U n or X'1B55;n'  
Set or cancel unidirectional  
printing  
Set or cancel rotated character  
Set print station  
ESC V n or X'1B56;n'  
ESC c 0 n or X'1B6330;n'  
ESC % n or X'1B25;n'  
135  
134  
134  
Select user-defined or resident  
character sets  
Set code page  
ESC t n or X'1B74;n'  
135  
135  
Set intercharacter spacing  
ESC SP n or X'1B20;n'  
104 SureMark Printers User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Updated April 2, 2009  
Table 14. EIA-232 commands organized by function (continued)  
Description  
Command  
Page  
136.  
136  
Set print station parameters  
Select 1/8-inch line spacing  
Select 1/6-inch line spacing  
Select color printing  
ESC c 1 n or X'1B6331;n'  
ESC 1 or X'1B31'.  
ESC 2 or X'1B32'  
ESC r n or X'1B72;n'  
ESC 3 n or X'1B33;n'  
136  
137  
Set line spacing using minimum  
units  
137  
Set sheet eject length  
Set horizontal tab positions  
Set left margin position  
Set relative position  
ESC C n or X'1B43;n'  
138  
138  
138  
139  
139  
140  
141  
141  
142  
142  
143.  
143  
144  
ESC D [n1 n2] NUL NUL or X'1B44[n1 n2]0000'  
ESC $ n1 n2 or X'1B24;n1;n2'  
ESC \ n1 n2 or X'1B5C;n1;n2'  
ESC a n or X'1B61;n'.  
Align positions  
Set error recovery function  
Define document wait time  
Status sent to system  
ESC c 4 n or X'1B63;34;n'  
ESC f x y or X'1B66;x;y'  
ESC ) n or X'1B29;n'  
Select character for reprinted lines ESC + n or X'1B2B;n'  
Re-initialize the printer  
ESC @ or X'1B40'.  
Enable/disable the feed buttons  
Enable/disable the beeper  
ESC c 5 n X'1B6335;n'  
ESC BEL n1 n2 or X'1B07;n1;n2'  
ESC { n or X'1B7B;n'  
Enable/disable upside-down  
printing  
Select character size for scalable GS ! n or X'1D21;n'  
145  
fonts  
Fix font matrix  
ESC : n or X'1B3A n'  
146  
146  
147  
133  
Print logo inline  
GS J d n1 n2 data or X'1D4A;d;n1;n2;data'  
GS ; n or X'1D3B;n'  
Enable/disable two-color printing  
Request document length for  
landscape print  
GS N X'02' Null or X'1D4E0200'  
Set document length for  
landscape print  
GS c 1 n where n is 2 bytes indicating the length of the document  
in print motor steps  
133  
Bar Code Commands  
Print bar code  
GS k n NUL or X'1D6B;n;data;00'  
147  
152  
152  
152  
Select horizontal size of bar code GS w n or X'1D77;n'  
Select bar code height  
GS h n or X'1D68;n'  
GS H n or X'1D48;n'  
Select printing position of  
human-readable information (HRI)  
Select font for HRI  
GS f n or X'1D66;n'  
153  
153  
154  
Print PDF417 bar code  
GS P data NUL or X'1D50;data;00'  
GS U datalength data or X'1D;55;datalength;data;00'  
Print PDF417 bar code using  
binary mode  
Select PDF417 ECC Level  
GS R n or X'1D52;n1;n2'  
GS S r;c or X'1D53;r;c'  
154  
155  
Select Aspect Ratio PDF417 bar  
code  
Appendix D. EIA-232 programming information 105  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Updated April 2, 2009  
Table 14. EIA-232 commands organized by function (continued)  
Description  
Command  
Page  
Enable PDF417 truncation  
Print Character Commands  
Print and line feed  
GS T n or X'1D54;n'  
155  
LF or X'0A'  
CR or X'0D'  
156  
156  
156  
Print and line feed  
Print, form feed, and cut the paper FF or X'0C'  
(FF)  
Print and feed paper n lines  
ESC d n or X'1B64;n'  
156  
156  
Print and feed paper using  
minimum units  
ESC J n X'1B4A;n'  
Print and feed paper in reverse  
using minimum units  
ESC K n X'1B4B;n'  
157  
Print Graphic Messages  
Select and print a graphics (logo) ESC * d w h data or X'1B2A;d;w;h;data'  
command  
157  
159  
159.  
Print predefined graphics (logo)  
command  
GS / m logo# or X'1D2F;m;logo#'  
Print predefined messages  
Miscellaneous Commands  
Tab to next tab stop  
GS ^ message# or X'1D5E;message#'  
HT or X'09'  
160  
160  
Return home (select print head  
location)  
ESC < n or 1B3C;n  
Paper cut/DI eject  
ESC i or ESC m -- X'1B69' or X'1B6D'  
161  
Generate drive pulse for cash  
drawer  
ESC p m n1 n2 or X'1B70;m;n1;n2'  
161.  
Retrieve the flash storage  
ESC 4 n1 n2 X'1B34;n1;n2'  
161  
162  
162  
Retrieve size of user flash storage ESC 4 x ’03 FF FF FF’ or X'1B3403FFFFFF'  
Retrieve printer usage statistics  
Check Processing Commands  
MICR read  
X'1B51 xx'  
ESC I or X'1B49'  
ESC 5 or X'1B35'  
165  
166  
Flip check  
Document Scanner Commands  
Start scan  
X'1B3E;n'  
166  
168  
169  
Print scanned image  
Store scanned image  
X'1B30;n1;x;y;dx;dy;s1;s2;n2'  
X’1B41;n1;x0;y0;dx0;dy0;x1;y1;dx1;dy1;x2;y2;  
dx2;dy2;x3;y3;dx3;dy3;tagdata’  
Retrieve scanned image  
Scanner calibration  
X'1B39;n1;n2;n3'  
172  
173  
174  
174  
GS c 0 or X'1D 63 30'  
Retrieve next image location  
GS N SOH NULL or X'1D4E0100'  
GS N SOH SOH or X'1D4E0101'  
Retrieve first unread image  
location  
Select compression format and  
scanned image threshold  
X'1B4d;x;n1;n2'  
174  
106 SureMark Printers User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Updated April 2, 2009  
Table 14. EIA-232 commands organized by function (continued)  
Description  
Asynchronous (Real-Time) Commands  
Real-time requests DLE ENQ n or X'1005n'  
Command  
Page  
175  
n
Description  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
37  
38  
40  
41  
42  
43  
Release print buffer  
Cancel print buffer  
Undefined  
EC request; send status  
Undefined  
Undefined  
Undefined  
Undefined  
Reset printer  
Enable unsolicited status  
Disable unsolicited status  
Disable transparent XON/XOFF  
Data Buffer Management and Batch Printing  
Reset line count  
Disable line count  
ESC 6 or X'1B36'  
176  
176  
177  
ESC 8 n or X'1B38'n  
Hold printing until buffer is  
released  
ESC 7 or X'1B37'  
Page Mode Printing Commands  
Select page mode  
ESC L or X'1B4C'  
177  
177  
178  
178  
178  
179  
179  
Select standard mode  
ESC S or X'1B4f'  
Select printable area  
ESC X or X'1B58;x;y;dx;dy'  
ESC T n or X'1B54;n'  
GS $ y or X'1D24;y'  
GS \ y or X'1D5C;y'  
Select printing direction/position  
Set vertical position  
Set relative vertical position  
Set left margin position (standard ESC $ n1 n2 or X'1B24;n1;n2'  
mode), Set absolute print position  
(page mode)  
Set relative horizontal position  
Set printing position  
ESC <5C>h n1 n2 or X'1B5C;n1;n2'  
GS ] x y or X'1D5D;x;y'  
FF or X'0C'  
180  
180  
181  
Print and form feed and cut the  
paper  
Print page in page mode  
ESC FF or X'1B0C'  
CAN or X'18'  
181  
181  
Clear print data in page mode  
Appendix D. EIA-232 programming information 107  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Updated April 2, 2009  
Alphabetized EIA-232 commands summary  
Table 15. EIA-232 commands in alphabetical order  
Description  
Command  
Page  
139  
181  
176  
141  
115  
Align positions  
ESC a n or X'1B61;n'  
Clear print data in page mode  
Disable line count  
CAN or X'18'  
ESC 8 n or X'1B;38'n  
Define document wait time  
ESC f x y or X'1B66;x;y'  
GS * logo# n1 n2 data or X'1D2A;logo#;n1;n2;data'  
Download graphics (logo)  
commands  
Download user-defined characters ESC & s n m data or X'1B26;s;n;m;data'  
118  
155  
143  
143.  
147  
144  
Enable PDF417 truncation  
GS T n or X'1D;54;n'  
Enable/disable the beeper  
ESC BEL n1 n2 or X'1B;07;n1;n2'  
ESC c 5 n X'1B;63;35;n'  
GS ; n or X'1D 3B n'  
Enable/disable the feed buttons  
Enable/disable two-color printing  
Enable/disable upside-down  
printing  
ESC { n or X'1B 7B n'  
Erase flash EPROM sector  
Exercise program  
ESC # n or X'1B23;n'  
ESC x or X'1B;78'  
GS | or X'1D49;01'  
123  
111  
112  
Extended address  
command-request printer ID  
Fix font matrix  
Flash storage write  
Flip check  
ESC : n or X'1B 3A n'  
146  
123  
166  
161  
ESC ’ n1 n2 data or X'1B27;n1;n2;data'  
ESC 5 or X'1B35'  
Generate drive pulse for cash  
drawer  
ESC p m n1 n2 or X'1B70;m;n1;n2'  
Hold printing until buffer is released ESC 7 or X'1B37'  
177  
122  
165  
124  
Impact code page  
MICR read  
MCT commands.  
ESC I or X'1B49'  
Microcode tolerance (MCT)  
information - loading  
ESC M n h l or X'1B4D;n;h;l'  
Microcode tolerance (MCT)  
information - request  
ESC S n or X'1B53;n'  
125  
Paper cut/DI eject  
ESC i or ESC m or X'1B69' or X'1B;6D'  
GS : message# data GS : or X'1D3A;message#;data;1D3A'  
ESC d n or X'1B64;n'  
161  
117  
156  
157  
Predefine messages  
Print and feed paper n lines  
Print and feed paper in reverse  
using minimum units  
ESC K n X'1B4B;n'  
Print and feed paper using  
minimum units  
ESC J n or X'1B4A;n'  
Print and form feed and cut the  
paper  
FF or X'0C'  
181  
Print and line feed  
Print and line feed  
Print bar code  
LF or X'0A'  
156  
156  
147  
CR or X'0D'  
GS k n NUL or X'1D6B;n;data;00'  
108 SureMark Printers User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Updated April 2, 2009  
Table 15. EIA-232 commands in alphabetical order (continued)  
Description  
Command  
Page  
146  
181  
153  
154  
Print logo inline  
GS J d n1 n2 data or X'1D 4A d n1 n2 data'  
ESC FF or X'1B 0C'  
Print page in page mode  
Print PDF417 bar code  
GS P data NUL or X'1D;50;data;00'  
Print PDF417 bar code using binary GS U datalength data or X'1D;55;datalength;data;00'  
mode  
Print predefined graphics (logo)  
command  
GS / m logo# or X'1D2F;m;logo#'  
159  
Print predefined messages  
Print scanned image  
Proportional font  
GS ^ message# or X'1D5E;message#'  
X'1B;30;n1;x;y;dx;dy;s1;s2;n2'  
159  
168  
120  
175  
ESC & s n m data or X'1B;26;s;n;m;data'  
DLE ENQ m or X'1005n'  
Real-time requests  
n
Description  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
37  
38  
40  
41  
42  
43  
Release print buffer  
Cancel print buffer  
Undefined  
EC request; send status  
Undefined  
Undefined  
Undefined  
Undefined  
Reset printer  
Enable unsolicited status  
Disable unsolicited status  
Disable transparent XON/XOFF  
Re-initialize the printer  
ESC @ or X'1B40'  
142  
133  
Request document length for  
landscape print  
GS N X'02' Null or X'1D;4E;02;00'  
Reset line count  
ESC 6 or X'1B36'  
176  
174  
174  
162  
172  
162  
161  
160  
Retrieve first unread image location GS N SOH SOH or X'1D 4E 01 01'  
Retrieve next image location  
Retrieve printer usage statistics  
Retrieve scanned image  
GS N SOH NULL or X'1D 4E 01 00'  
X'1B 51 xx'  
X'1B;39;n1;n2;n3'  
Retrieve size of user flash storage ESC 4 x ’03 FF FF FF’ or X'1B;34;03;FF;FF;FF'  
Retrieve the flash storage  
ESC 4 n1 n2 X'1B34;n1;n2'  
ESC < n or X'1B3C;n'  
Return home (select print head  
location)  
Scanner calibration  
GS c 0 or X'1D 63 30'  
173  
157  
Select and print a graphics (logo)  
command  
ESC * d w h data or X'1B2A;d;w;h;data'  
Select aspect ratio PDF417 bar  
code  
GS S r;c or X'1D;53;r;c'  
155  
Appendix D. EIA-232 programming information 109  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Updated April 2, 2009  
Table 15. EIA-232 commands in alphabetical order (continued)  
Description  
Command  
Page  
152  
Select bar code height  
GS h n or X'1D68;n'  
Select character for reprinted lines ESC + n or X'1B2B;n'  
142  
Select character size for scalable  
fonts  
GS ! n or X'1D;21;n'  
145  
Select color printing  
ESC r n or X'1B;72;n'  
137  
174  
Select compression format and  
scanned image threshold  
X'1B;4d;x;n1;n2'  
Select font for HRI  
GS f n or X'1D66;n'  
153  
152  
177  
154  
178  
178  
152  
Select horizontal size of bar code  
Select page mode  
GS w n or X'1D77;n'  
ESC L or X'1B;4C'  
Select PDF417 ECC level  
Select printable area  
GS R n or X'1D;52;n1;n2'  
ESC X or X'1B;58;x;y;dx;dy'  
ESC T n or X'1B;54;n'  
GS H n or X'1D48;n'  
Select printing direction/position  
Select printing position of  
human-readable information (HRI)  
Select standard mode  
ESC S or X'1B;4f'  
177  
134  
Select user-defined or resident  
character sets  
ESC % n or X'1B25;n'  
Select 1/6-inch line spacing  
Select 1/8-inch line spacing  
ESC 2 or X'1B32'  
ESC 1 or X'1B31'  
ESC ″ n or X'1B22;n'  
136  
136  
124  
Send checksum of flash EPROM  
sector  
Select maximum print speed  
Set code page  
ESC / n or X'1B;2F;n'  
ESC t n or X'1B74;n'  
132  
135  
Set document length for landscape GS c 1 n where n is 2 bytes indicating the length of the document 133  
print  
in print motor steps  
Set error recovery function  
Set horizontal tab positions  
Set intercharacter spacing  
Set left margin position  
ESC c 4 n or X'1B63;34;n'  
140  
138  
135  
138  
179  
ESC D [n1 n2] NUL NUL or X'1B44[n1n2]0000'  
ESC SP n or X'1B20;n'  
ESC $ n1 n2 or X'1B24;n1;n2'  
ESC $ n1 n2 or X'1B;24;n1;n2'  
Set left margin position (standard  
mode), Set absolute print position  
(page mode)  
Set line spacing using minimum  
units  
ESC 3 n or X'1B33;n'  
137  
Set or cancel double-high mode  
Set or cancel double-wide mode  
Set or cancel emphasized printing  
Set or cancel invert mode  
ESC h n or X'1B68;n'  
ESC W n or X'1B57;n'  
ESC G n or X'1B47;n'  
ESC H n or X'1B48;n'  
ESC x‘5F’ n or X'1B5F;n'  
ESC V n or X'1B56;n'  
ESC − n or X'1B2D;n'  
131  
130  
132  
131  
131  
135  
131  
133  
Set or cancel overline mode  
Set or cancel rotated character  
Set or cancel underline mode  
Set or cancel unidirectional printing ESC U n or X'1B55;n'  
110 SureMark Printers User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Updated April 2, 2009  
Table 15. EIA-232 commands in alphabetical order (continued)  
Description  
Command  
Page  
129  
136  
134  
180  
180  
139  
179  
138  
178  
166  
112  
141  
169  
Set print mode  
ESC ! n or X'1B21;n'  
ESC c 1 n or X'1B63;31;n'  
ESC c 0 n or X'1B63;30;n'  
GS ] x y or X'1D;5D;x;y'  
ESC <5C>h n1 n2 or X'1B;5C;n1;n2'  
ESC \ n1 n2 or X'1B5C;n1;n2'  
GS \ y or X'1D;5C;y'  
ESC C n or X'1B43;n'  
GS $ y or X'1D;24;y'  
X'1B;3E;n'  
Set print station parameters  
Set print station  
Set printing position  
Set relative horizontal position  
Set relative position  
Set relative vertical position  
Set sheet eject length  
Set vertical position  
Start scan  
Status request  
ESC v or X'1B76'  
Status sent to system  
Store scanned image  
ESC ) n or X'1B29;n'  
X’1B;41;n1;x0;y0;dx0;dy0;x1;y1;dx1;dy1;x2;y2;  
dx2;dy2;x3;y3;dx3;dy3;tagdata’  
Tab to next tab stop  
Thermal code page  
HT or X'09'  
160  
119  
111  
MCT commands; see Table 17 on page 125.  
X'1B;00;80;00'  
Verify previous commands  
completed  
System commands  
Exercise program  
EIA-232 Syntax:  
ESC x or X'1B;78'  
Purpose:  
This tests printing functions of the printer. A test message is printed. (See  
Figure 36 on page 64.) If there is a document in the printer, the test  
message prints on the document. Otherwise, it prints at the customer  
receipt station.  
Error Conditions:  
Home Error (on document station only)  
Cash Receipt Print Error  
Verify previous commands completed  
EIA-232 Syntax:  
X'1B;00;80;00'  
Purpose:  
This command can be used to ensure that all commands preceding it have  
been completed. The application would just wait for the status return with  
status byte 5, bit 1 set.  
Appendix D. EIA-232 programming information 111  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Updated April 2, 2009  
Remarks:  
The printer status is returned in status bytes 1–8. Status byte 5, bit 1 is set  
after this request has been executed. See “Status summary” on page 184  
for more information.  
Error Conditions:  
None.  
Status request  
EIA-232 Syntax:  
ESC v or X'1B;76'  
Purpose:  
The printer status is sent to the system. This command will be processed in  
the order it was received.  
Remarks:  
The printer status is returned in status bytes 1–8. See “Status summary” on  
page 184 for more information.  
Error Conditions:  
None.  
Extended address command-request printer ID  
EIA-232 Syntax:  
GS | SOH or X'1D;49;01'  
Purpose:  
This will return 8 bytes of printer status plus 5 bytes of printer-specific  
information.  
Status byte 5, bit 0 is set to 1 when responding to the extended address  
command. (See “Status summary” on page 184.)  
where:  
Byte 1  
v Device type = X'30' for non-TI8/TG8 or TI9/TG9 models and for  
Model TI8/TG8 or TI9/TG9 in TI4 mode  
v Device type = X'31' TI8/TG8 or TI9/TG9 models in TI8 or TI9  
mode  
Byte 2  
Device ID  
00  
01  
Models TI1 and TI2 (impact DI/thermal CR)  
Models TI3, TI4, TI8, TI9, TG3, and TG4 (high speed;  
impact DI/thermal CR)  
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
07  
Models TI3, TI4, TG3. and TG4 with the 2 MB option  
Models TF6 and TM6 (512K; thermal CR)  
Models TI3, TI4, TG3, and TG4 with the 8 MB option  
Models TF6 and TM6 with the 8 MB option  
Reserved  
Models TF6 and TM6 with the 2 MB option  
112 SureMark Printers User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Updated April 2, 2009  
Byte 3  
First byte of features  
Bit 0  
v When byte 1 = X'30': Set to 1 when MICR is present  
v When byte 1 = X'31': Reserved  
Bit 1  
Bit 2  
v When byte 1 = X'30': Set to 1 when Check Flipper is  
present  
v When byte 1 = X'31': Reserved  
v When byte 1 = X'30': Set to 1 when the printer has the 2  
MB option  
v When byte 1 = X'31': Reserved  
Bit 3 Set to 1 when the printer is in XON/XOFF mode  
Bit 4 Reserved  
Bit 5  
v When byte 1 = X'30': Set to 1 when the 2 MB option is  
used for user flash memory  
v When byte 1 = X'31': Reserved  
Bit 6 Set to 1 when two-color printing is enabled.  
Bit 7 Set to 1 when the printer is in Model 4 emulation mode.  
Byte 4  
Second byte of features  
Bit 0 Set to 1 when printer is set for 58 mm paper  
Bit 1 Set to 1 if Model TI8/TG8 or TI9/TG9 is in TI4 mode when  
byte 1 is set to X'30'  
Bit 2 Set to 1 if full scanning Model TI9 or TG9 printer  
Bit 3 Set to 1 when the USB interface is internal to the printer  
Bits 4  
Set to 1 when the printer is an RPQ, which disables the  
scanner  
Bits 5–7  
Reserved  
Byte 5  
EC level = EC level of loaded code  
Error Conditions:  
None.  
Remarks:  
This is an IMMEDIATE command.  
Appendix D. EIA-232 programming information 113  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Updated April 2, 2009  
Preset or Onetime-Set commands  
All models  
The SureMark printer has commands to specialize and tune each printer to improve  
its usability, performance, and uniqueness. This flexibility is provided through the  
use of flash erasable programmable read-only memory (flash EPROM) and an  
electrically erasable programmable read-only memory (EEPROM). Data in these  
memory devices will stay valid until it is redefined. This information only needs to be  
defined once because it will remain for the life of the printer or until it is redefined.  
To verify that data was previously stored in the printer, the system can request a  
checksum on data stored in each sector.  
Flash EPROM has 5 sectors. To rewrite information in a sector, you must first erase  
the sector.  
v For logo commands and predefined messages, erasing the sector is necessary  
only to replace a logo or predefined message number, or when the length of the  
logo or message exceeds space available in that sector.  
v For user flash memory, erasing the sector is necessary only when writing to an  
address that has already been written to.  
v For user-defined thermal and impact characters, new characters can be added if  
they have the same matrix as characters already in the character set. If new  
character sets are added, the flash memory does not have to be erased. To  
replace characters, you must first erase the sector.  
Sector Function  
1
2
3
4
5
Download graphics (logo) Commands  
Predefined Messages  
Two user-defined impact character sets  
User-defined thermal character set: four fixed matrix or 2 proportional  
User Flash Memory  
The EEPROM stores microcode tolerances (MCT) values.  
Models TI8 and TI9 only  
Note: Model TG8 is equivalent to TI8 and Model TG9 is equivalent to TI9.  
Models TI8 and TI9 provide five functions with which you can store and define data.  
They are:  
v User-defined thermal characters  
v User-defined impact characters  
v Logos  
v Predefined messages  
v User storage  
v Scanned image storage  
This allows greater flexibility in allocating memory because you can allocate  
additional memory for one function that has not been used by another function.  
114 SureMark Printers User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Updated April 2, 2009  
There are twenty-two 64 KB sectors, for a total of 1.4 MB of flash memory available  
for allocation. The MCT value represents the number of 64 KB sectors assigned to  
the respective function. The amount of memory allocated to each function is  
specified by the value stored in its respective MCT location.  
The user-defined thermal characters and user-defined impact characters are limited  
to one 64 KB sector each.  
To change the memory allocation for any function, all memory partitions must be  
erased. If memory is not erased, an MCT write error status is returned. After the  
MCT values are written, the new ones take effect only after a reset. The new  
memory allocations begin with the lowest MCT address and increment up. Memory  
is allocated until all requests are satisfied or until all memory has been used.  
Table 16. Memory allocation for Models TI8 and TI9 functions  
Function  
Default memory allocation MCT location  
User-defined impact  
characters  
64 KB  
X'A0'  
User-defined thermal  
characters  
64 KB  
X'A1'  
Logos  
64 KB  
64 KB  
128 KB  
1 MB  
X'A2'  
X'A3'  
X'A4'  
X'A5'  
Predefined messages  
User memory  
Scanned image storage  
Download graphics (logo) commands  
EIA-232 Syntax:  
GS * logo# n1 n2 data or X'1D;2A;logo#;n1;n2;data'  
where:  
logo# The logo number being stored.  
v range = 1 to 40 for all models except TI8 and TI9  
v range = 1 to 255 for Models TI8 and TI9  
n1  
One-eighth the number of dots in the horizontal direction (width = 8  
× n1).  
range = 1 to 72 for a thermal logo.  
range = 1 to 59 for an impact logo.  
n2  
One-eighth the number of dots in the vertical direction (height = 8 ×  
n2).  
range = 1 to 255 for a thermal logo.  
range = 1 to 5 for an impact logo.  
data  
The data to form the graphics image. The number of data bytes for  
the image is n1 × n2 × 8  
Purpose:  
To store all-points-addressable print messages.  
Appendix D. EIA-232 programming information 115  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Updated April 2, 2009  
Remarks:  
These messages can be positioned on the page using the commands for  
setting positions.  
Decimal values are shown, but all parameter values (logo number, n1, n2)  
must be hex values when sent to the printer.  
The dot density of these messages is specified when the message is  
printed. See “Print predefined graphics (logo) command” on page 159.  
The total number of data bytes defined for all (up to 40) defined graphics  
messages must be less than 65 376 in all models except TI8 and TI9, in  
which the value is user-defineable.  
If the parameters logo#, n1, or n2 are out of range, the command is  
discarded and its remaining data is processed as print data.  
This command should be sent only when the data buffer is empty. See the  
description of bit 6 in “Status byte 2” on page 185.  
Images for the thermal logo commands will be defined by one-dot-high rows  
(horizontal slices), and the impact will be defined by eight-dot-high rows  
(vertical slices).  
This command can be used to print signature captures at the printer.  
1. Capture the signature as a bitmap.  
2. Convert the bitmap to a series of graphics (logo) messages.  
3. Hold the printer’s buffer.  
4. Send the graphics messages to the printer.  
5. Release the printer’s buffer.  
Note: For a thermal graphic message that is 24 dots high, across the page (n1 =  
72, n2 = 3) takes over 2000 bytes of data.  
Example: n1 = 2 & n2 = 2  
116 SureMark Printers User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Updated April 2, 2009  
For Thermal Graphics - Defined as:  
X'1D2A010202AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA  
55555555555555555555555555555555'  
For Impact Graphics - Defined as:  
X'1D2A020202FF00FF00FF00FF00FF00FF00FF00FF00  
00FF00FF00FF00FF00FF00FF00FF00FF'  
Error Conditions:  
Flash EPROM load error - Verify the sector was erased before downloading  
images.  
Memory sector is full - The sector can store up to 64 KB of graphics data,  
after which the sector is full.  
Predefine messages  
EIA-232 Syntax:  
GS : message# data GS : or X'1D3A;message#;data;1D3A'  
where:  
message#  
data  
The message number being stored.  
range is 1 to 25 for all models except TI8 and TI9  
range is 1 to 255 for Models TI8 and TI9  
All data and commands to be included in this message. No  
immediate commands can be included in the data.  
Purpose:  
To store predefined messages. This cuts transmission time. This is where  
you can store the header and the trailer of receipts, for example.  
Remarks:  
v After a ″GS :″ occurs, all incoming commands are stored in the message  
until another ″GS :″ occurs.  
v “Print predefined graphics (logo) command” on page 159 can be included  
in this command.  
v The size of all predefined messages can not exceed 8000 bytes for all  
models except TI8 and TI9, in which the value is user-defineable.  
Example:  
Store a trailer message:  
X'1D3A01'  
’Thank You For Shopping’ X'0D'  
’ At RSD STORE’ X'0D'  
’Store #1234567’ X'0D'  
X'1D3A'  
This would store this message as predefined message 1. See “Print  
predefined messages” on page 159 for printing this trailer message.  
Commands for selecting the print station and print characteristics must be  
included with the stored message.  
Limitations:  
Appendix D. EIA-232 programming information 117  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Updated April 2, 2009  
v “Print predefined graphics (logo) command” on page 159 can be included  
in this command. Select and print a graphics command can not be used.  
See “Print graphic messages” on page 157.  
v “Print predefined messages” on page 159 can be included in this  
command, but can only be nested one message deep.  
Example: Store a predefined message (’Jane Doe’) at location 3, then  
issue the following commands:  
1. X'1D3A06'  
2. ’Welcome to Our Store’ X'0D'  
3. X'1D5E03' (This prints the message that has been stored at location  
3. The message can not have a X'1D5Exx' in it, because that would  
be more than one level of nesting.)  
4. ’Is Your Cashier Today’ X'0D'  
5. X'1D3A'  
Using the stored message and the above commands, the resulting text  
will be:  
Welcome to Our Store  
Jane Doe Is Your Cashier Today  
v These commands can not be included in the predefined message:  
– “Define document wait time” on page 141.  
– “Select character for reprinted lines” on page 142.  
– “Set sheet eject length” on page 138.  
– “Select and print a graphics (logo) command” on page 157.  
v This command should be sent only when the data buffer is empty. See  
the description of bit 6 in “Status byte 2” on page 185.  
Error Conditions:  
Flash EPROM load error - Verify the sector was erased before downloading  
the messages.  
Memory sector is full  
Download user-defined characters  
EIA-232 Syntax:  
ESC & s n m data or X'1B26;s;n;m;data'  
where:  
s
The character set being defined.  
1
2
3
4
5
6
User-defined thermal code page 1  
User-defined thermal code page 2  
User-defined thermal code page 3  
User-defined thermal code page 4  
User-defined impact code page 1  
User-defined impact code page 2  
n
The beginning ASCII address of the characters being defined.  
The ending ASCII address of the characters being defined.  
m
data  
The slice data for the defined characters. Note the number of bytes  
is determined by which code page is being defined and the  
character matrix of that code page.  
118 SureMark Printers User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Updated April 2, 2009  
Purpose:  
To define a matrix pattern for user-definable code pages stored in flash  
EPROM.  
Remarks:  
v After characters are downloaded to the printer, they remain valid until you  
redefine them. This is true even if power to the printer is removed.  
v Before the characters are defined, the sector of the flash EPROM which  
stores this data must be erased. (See “Erase flash EPROM sector” on  
page 123.) Also, the character matrix for the code page must have  
already been defined. (See Table 17 on page 125, MCT# 3, 4, and 5.)  
v Flash EPROM sector 4 contains all user-defined code pages for the  
thermal print head. To redefine a code page, you must erase and  
reprogram all of them.  
v Flash EPROM sector 3 contains both user-defined code pages for the  
impact print head. To redefine a code page, you must erase and  
reprogram both of them.  
v Thermal height must be even.  
v There is no way to redefine one character only. You must redefine a  
whole code page.  
v If the parameter s, n, or m is out of range, the command is discarded  
and the remaining data is processed as print data.  
v This command should be sent only when the data buffer is empty. See  
the description of bit 6 in “Status byte 2” on page 185.  
v ASCII characters 0 through 31 are reserved for EIA-232 functions and  
can not be defined.  
Thermal code page  
You define the character matrix for each code page with MCT #2, MCT #3, MCT  
#23, and MCT #24 for thermal code pages 1, 2, 3, and 4, respectively. See  
Table 17 on page 125.  
The number of data bytes per character loaded is 2 × the character height. The  
total number of data bytes for this command is 2 × the character height × (1+m−n).  
Appendix D. EIA-232 programming information 119  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Updated April 2, 2009  
Example: 10 wide × 20 high  
Defined as:  
X'1B26014848 C0C0C0C0C0C0C0C0C0C0C0C0C0C0FFC0FFC0F  
C0C0C0C0C0C0C0C0C0C0C0C0C0C0C0C0C0C0'  
The above statement defines character X'48' as an ’H’.  
Note: The number of data bytes = 2 × dot height (20) = 40 bytes.  
Proportional font  
This command is supported only for Models TI3, TI4, TI8, TI9, TG3, TG4, TG8,  
TG9, TF6 and TM6.  
EIA-232 Syntax:  
ESC & s n m data or X'1B;26;s;n;m;data'  
where:  
s
The character set being defined.  
1
3
User-defined thermal code page 1.  
User-defined thermal code page 3.  
n
The beginning ASCII address of the characters being defined.  
The ending ASCII address of the characters being defined.  
m
data  
The height and width of the character, and the matrix pattern for the  
data. The number of data bytes is (m−n+1) × (2+wb×32). wb is  
defined in the MCT command.  
Purpose:  
To download and print proportional fonts (True Type fonts) in the thermal  
station. Each character in the code page has its own unique width and  
height. The matrix must be within the following ranges:  
120 SureMark Printers User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Updated April 2, 2009  
Width 8 ≤ width ≤ 32  
Height  
8 ≤ width ≤ 32  
Remarks:  
v Proportional and standard fonts may be used on the same line. If both  
types of fonts are used on a line, you would probably use proportional  
fonts for the description and resident fonts for the amounts.  
v For alignment, a command that will allow right and left alignment on the  
same line may be used. This will allow the user to align a column  
(decimal point) on the right, and still be left-aligned. (See “Align positions”  
on page 139.)  
v Once characters are downloaded to the printer, they remain valid until  
you redefine them. This is true even if power to the printer is removed.  
v Before the characters are defined, the sector of the flash EPROM which  
stores this data must be erased. (See “Erase flash EPROM sector” on  
page 123.)  
v There is no way to redefine one character only. You must redefine a  
whole code page.  
v If the parameter s, n, or m is out of range, the command is discarded  
and the remaining data is processed as print data.  
v This command should be sent only when the data buffer is empty. See  
the description of bit 6 in “Status byte 2” on page 185.  
v ASCII characters 0 through 31 are reserved for EIA-232 functions and  
can not be defined.  
v See Appendix F, “Proportional fonts,” on page 189 for suggestions about  
how to implement proportional fonts.  
Limitations:  
The memory required for proportional fonts is much greater than the  
memory that was required for user-defined fonts. Therefore, when code  
page 1 (or 3) is set up as proportional, code page 2 (or 4) is not valid.  
You can not set up code page 2 or code page 4 as a proportional font.  
To download the font:  
1. Store the code page matrix as an MCT value. Use the command X'1B  
4D x 55 wb' where:  
x
X'02' for thermal code page 1, X'17' for thermal code page 3  
wb  
The number of bytes, which is also 1⁄8 the number of dots, in  
the width of the widest character. The valid range is 2≤wb≤4.  
2. Erase the existing character set using the command X'1B 23 04'.  
3. Use the Proportional Font command to download the font.  
Example:  
To define an A to code page 1 when wb is set to 02, enter the following:  
X'1B260141410C16'  
X'0F001F803FC070E06060C030C030C030C030C030C030'  
X'C030FFF0FFF0C030C030C030C030C030C030C030'  
X'C030000000000000000000000000000000000000000000'  
This command specifies a character width of 12 dots (X'0C') and a  
character height of 22 dots (X'16'). Following the width and height are 64  
Appendix D. EIA-232 programming information 121  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Updated April 2, 2009  
bytes that define the character. If, as in this case, the character is defined  
before all 64 bytes have been used, the rest of the bytes are filled with X'0'  
(see Figure 50).  
Note: If wb were set to 03, then the total number of data bytes would be  
98 (3×32+2)  
row #  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0000111100000000  
0001111110000000  
0011111111000000  
0111000011100000  
0110000001100000  
1100000000110000  
1100000000110000  
1100000000110000  
1100000000110000  
1100000000110000  
1100000000110000  
1100000000110000  
1111111111110000  
1111111111110000  
1100000000110000  
1100000000110000  
1100000000110000  
1100000000110000  
1100000000110000  
1100000000110000  
1100000000110000  
1100000000110000  
0000000000000000  
0000000000000000  
0000000000000000  
0000000000000000  
0000000000000000  
0000000000000000  
0000000000000000  
0000000000000000  
0000000000000000  
0F00  
1F80  
3FC0  
70E0  
6060  
C030  
C030  
C030  
C030  
C030  
C030  
C030  
FFF0  
FFF0  
C030  
C030  
C030  
C030  
C030  
C030  
C030  
C030  
0000  
0000  
0000  
0000  
0000  
0000  
0000  
0000  
0000  
8
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
0000000000000000  
0000  
32  
Figure 50. Proportional font example  
Impact code page  
You define the character matrix for each code page with MCT #4 for impact code  
page 1 and MCT #5 for impact code page 2. See Table 17 on page 125.  
If the matrix defines the characters as 9 dots high or less, a print line will be printed  
in one pass of the print head. When the matrix is defined as greater than 9 dots  
high, it takes two passes of the print head per print line.  
Landscape printing is limited to characters with a height of 9 dots or less. If  
user-defined characters are to be used in landscape print mode, they must be less  
than 10 dots high.  
The number of data bytes per character loaded is 2 × character width. The total  
number of data bytes for this command is 2 × character width × (1+m−n). Each  
slice is defined with two bytes; the most significant bit (MSB) of each slice is the  
bottom of the character.  
122 SureMark Printers User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Updated April 2, 2009  
When defining wire patterns, the same wire does not fire in consecutive, primary (P)  
and secondary (S) positions. (The printer does not check for errors in defining the  
character.) If the character is defined with dots in consecutive positions only one of  
the dots is fired.)  
Example: 11 half-dots wide (or 5.5 full dots) × 9 high  
Defined as:  
X'1B26034141FO00080014000200110000081100020014000800F000'  
The above statement defines character X'41' as an ‘A’.  
Note: The number of data bytes = 2 × dot width (11) = 22 bytes.  
Error Conditions:  
Flash EPROM load error - Verify the sector was erased before downloading  
images.  
Flash storage write  
EIA-232 Syntax:  
ESC ’ n1 n2 data or X'1B;27;n1;n2;data'  
where:  
n1  
n2  
= number of data bytes to store  
= 3-byte address where data bytes are to be stored  
Error Conditions:  
Flash EPROM load error - Verify the sector was erased before downloading  
images.  
Remarks:  
The valid address range for each SureMark depends on the model number  
and which memory option, if any, is installed. Use “Retrieve size of user  
flash storage” on page 162 to determine the valid range for your printer.  
The command is rejected when the address is out of range.  
The flash EPROM is guaranteed for a minimum life of 100,000 write/erase  
commands by the Flash manufacturer.  
Erase flash EPROM sector  
EIA-232 Syntax:  
ESC # n or X'1B;23;n'  
Appendix D. EIA-232 programming information 123  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Updated April 2, 2009  
where:  
n
01  
downloaded graphics  
02  
predefined messages  
03  
user-defined impact character set  
user-defined thermal character sets  
flash storage  
04  
05  
06 - 07  
Reserved  
08  
Scanned image storage area  
09 - FF  
Reserved  
Purpose:  
To erase the flash EPROM before downloading the data into the printer.  
Remarks:  
The command should only be sent to the printer when the buffer is empty  
(status byte 2, bit 6). No other commands should be sent until this  
command is complete.  
Status byte 3, bit 7 (command complete bit) is set to show erasing is  
finished and the command is complete.  
The flash EPROM is guaranteed for a minimum life of 100,000 write/erase  
commands by the Flash manufacturer.  
Send checksum of flash EPROM sector  
EIA-232 Syntax:  
ESC ″ n or X'1B;22;n'  
where:  
n =  
01  
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
downloaded graphics  
predefined messages  
user-defined impact character set  
user-defined thermal character sets  
flash storage  
Reserved  
Purpose:  
To verify data integrity of the data loaded in the flash EPROM in the printer.  
A 2-byte checksum is returned.  
Microcode tolerance (MCT) information - loading  
EIA-232 Syntax:  
ESC M n h l or X'1B;4D;n;h;l'  
where:  
n
Microcode tolerance (MCT) that is being adjusted  
124 SureMark Printers User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Updated April 2, 2009  
h
l
The high-order byte of MCT data  
The low-order byte of MCT data  
Purpose:  
The microcode tolerance (MCT) information is used to make adjustments to  
the printer’s microcode. MCT data is nonvolatile data stored in the printer  
EPROM that is specific to a printer. For example, an MCT parameter can  
be defined to adjust for mechanical tolerances which cause a print line to  
not be centered on a receipt. Another would be for adjusting for the number  
of motor steps to the first print position on a document. This data remains  
intact until changed by the user.  
Remarks:  
Table 17 lists the MCT values by the parameter (n). The table includes the  
default, the minimum, and the maximum values of each MCT.  
If you try to set an MCT value out of its defined range, it is set to the  
closest limit (the minimum or maximum value) or rejected.  
Error Conditions:  
EPROM load error  
Microcode tolerance (MCT) information - request  
EIA-232 Syntax:  
ESC S n or X'1B;53;n'  
where:  
n
Microcode tolerance (MCT) information that is being requested  
Purpose:  
To enable reading MCT information from EEPROM.  
Remarks:  
v MCT data is sent over the serial line in status bytes 9 and 10. See  
Table 17 for the values of parameter n.  
v MCT write command values that are out of range cause the command to  
be rejected. (See bit 7 of “Status byte 1” on page 184.)  
Table 17. MCT command definitions  
DEC  
HEX  
MCT  
Default  
Min  
Max  
2
2
Matrix of user-defined thermal code page X'0A14'  
X'0810'  
X'1020'  
1
(10x20)  
(16x32)  
Byte 1: Dot row width  
Byte 2: Dot row height  
3
4
3
4
Matrix of user-defined thermal code page X'0A14'  
X'0810'  
X'0404'  
X'1020'  
(16x32)  
2
(10x20)  
Byte 1: Dot row width  
Byte 2: Dot row height  
Matrix of user-defined impact code page X'0707'  
X'1010'  
(16x16)  
1
(07x07)  
Byte 1: Half-dot row width  
Byte 2: Dot row height  
Appendix D. EIA-232 programming information 125  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Updated April 2, 2009  
Table 17. MCT command definitions (continued)  
DEC  
HEX  
MCT  
Default  
Min  
Max  
5
5
Matrix of user-defined impact code page X'0707'  
X'0404'  
X'1010'  
2
(07x07)  
(16x16)  
Byte 1: Half-dot row width  
Byte 2: Dot row height  
6-22  
23  
6-16  
17  
Reserved - ATTENTION: Changing these values might damage the printer.  
Matrix of user-defined thermal code page X'0A14'  
X'0810'  
X'1020'  
(16x32)  
3
(10x20)  
Byte 1: Dot row width  
Byte 2: Dot row height  
24  
18  
Matrix of user-defined thermal code page X'0A14'  
X'0810'  
X'1020'  
(16x32)  
4
(10x20)  
Byte 1: Dot row width  
Byte 2: Dot row height  
25-29  
30  
19-1D  
1E  
Reserved - ATTENTION: Changing these values might damage the printer.  
Mode options  
X'FFFF'  
N/A  
N/A  
Bits 0–12  
Reserved for future use, should  
be left at 1  
Bit 13: (DI portrait mode only)  
v 1 = Line feeds NOT executed  
until DI ready. (non-IBM  
mode)  
v 0 = Line feeds are executed  
without regard for the state of  
DI ready. (IBM mode)  
Bit 14:  
Bit 15:  
v 1 = Normal operations (IBM  
mode)  
v 0 = Switch order of font A  
and font B (non-IBM mode)  
v 0 = Disable CR (X'0D') in CR  
station. No line feeds in DI.  
(non-IBM mode)  
v 1 = Normal operations. Treat  
CR (X'0D') the same as line  
feeds (X'0A'). (IBM mode)  
31–53  
1F–35  
Reserved – IMPORTANT: Changing these values might change the printer function.  
126 SureMark Printers User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Updated April 2, 2009  
Table 17. MCT command definitions (continued)  
DEC  
HEX  
MCT  
Default  
Min  
Max  
54  
36  
TI8 and TI9 only: Reserved – IMPORTANT: Changing these values might change the  
printer function.  
TI3, TI4, TI6, TM6, TF6, and TI7:  
X'FFFF'  
X'0000'  
X'FFFF'  
Bits 9–15:  
Reserved for future use, should  
be left at 1  
Bit 8:  
v 1 = Function disabled  
v 0 = DBCS page mode,  
underline moved up two dot  
rows  
Bits 2–7:  
Reserved for future use  
Bit 1:  
v 1 = Function disabled  
v 0 = CR; paper is cut when  
button is pressed for at least  
120 motor steps  
Bit 0:  
v 1 = No mapping of user flash  
storage  
v 0 = Map user flash storage to  
logo space  
55–159 37–9F  
Reserved – IMPORTANT: Changing these values might damage the printer.  
160  
A0  
User-defined impact character memory  
allocation  
X'0001'  
X'0000'  
X'FFFF'  
X'FFFF'  
161  
A1  
User-defined thermal character memory X'0001'  
allocation  
X'0000'  
162  
163  
164  
165  
A2  
A3  
A4  
A5  
User-defined Logos  
X'0001'  
X'0000'  
X'0000'  
X'0000'  
X'0000'  
X'FFFF'  
X'FFFF'  
X'FFFF'  
X'FFFF'  
Predefined messages memory allocation X'0001'  
User flash storage memory allocation  
X'0002'  
X'0010'  
Scanned image storage memory  
allocation  
166–175 A6–AF  
Reserved  
176  
177  
178  
179  
180  
B0  
B1  
B2  
B3  
B4  
Scan1 storage template #1 predefined  
location X0  
Scan1 storage template #1 predefined  
location Y0  
Scan1 storage template #1 predefined  
location DX0  
Scan1 storage template #1 predefined  
location DY0  
Scan1 storage template #1 predefined  
location X1  
Appendix D. EIA-232 programming information 127  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Updated April 2, 2009  
Table 17. MCT command definitions (continued)  
DEC  
HEX  
MCT  
Default  
Min  
Max  
181  
B5  
Scan1 storage template #1 predefined  
location Y1  
182  
183  
184  
185  
186  
187  
188  
189  
190  
191  
192  
193  
194  
195  
196  
197  
198  
199  
200  
201  
202  
203  
B6  
B7  
B8  
B9  
BA  
BB  
BC  
BD  
BE  
BF  
C0  
C1  
C2  
C3  
C4  
C5  
C6  
C7  
C8  
C9  
CA  
CB  
Scan1 storage template #1 predefined  
location DX1  
Scan1 storage template #1 predefined  
location DY1  
Scan1 storage template #1 predefined  
location X2  
Scan1 storage template #1 predefined  
location Y2  
Scan1 storage template #1 predefined  
location DX2  
Scan1 storage template #1 predefined  
location DY2  
Scan1 storage template #1 predefined  
location X3  
Scan1 storage template #1 predefined  
location Y3  
Scan1 storage template #1 predefined  
location DX3  
Scan1 storage template #1 predefined  
location DY3  
Scan1 storage template #2 predefined  
location X0  
Scan1 storage template #2 predefined  
location Y0  
Scan1 storage template #2 predefined  
location DX0  
Scan1 storage template #2 predefined  
location DY0  
Scan1 storage template #2 predefined  
location X1  
Scan1 storage template #2 predefined  
location Y1  
Scan1 storage template #2 predefined  
location DX1  
Scan1 storage template #2 predefined  
location DY1  
Scan1 storage template #2 predefined  
location X2  
Scan1 storage template #2 predefined  
location Y2  
Scan1 storage template #2 predefined  
location DX2  
Scan1 storage template #2 predefined  
location DY2  
128 SureMark Printers User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Updated April 2, 2009  
Table 17. MCT command definitions (continued)  
DEC  
HEX  
MCT  
Default  
Min  
Max  
204  
CC  
Scan1 storage template #2 predefined  
location X3  
205  
206  
207  
CD  
CE  
CF  
Scan1 storage template #2 predefined  
location Y3  
Scan1 storage template #2 predefined  
location DX3  
Scan1 storage template #2 predefined  
location DY3  
Notes:  
1. See “Store scanned image and/or select partial image for retrieval” on page 169  
Setup commands  
Setup commands change character font, intercharacter spacing, and the target print  
station.  
Set print mode  
EIA-232 Syntax:  
ESC ! n or X'1B;21;n'  
where:  
n
Specifies print characteristics, such as user-defined thermal and  
impact code pages.  
Bit Number  
(LSB) 0  
Function  
Bit=0  
Bit=1  
Thermal  
Impact  
yes  
yes  
no  
yes  
yes  
yes  
no  
Char/Page 0  
Char/Page 1  
Overline  
Emphasized  
Double-high  
Double-wide  
Inverted Mode  
Underlined  
See Below See Below yes  
See Below See Below yes  
1
2
3
4
5
6
Cancel  
Cancel  
Cancel  
Cancel  
Cancel  
Cancel  
Set  
Set  
Set  
Set  
Set  
Set  
yes  
yes  
yes  
yes  
yes  
yes  
(MSB) 7  
no  
Table 18. Fonts for Models TI3, TI4, TG3, TG4, TG8, TG9, TI8, TI9, TF6, and TM6  
Bit 0  
Bit 1  
User-Defined Thermal  
Code Page  
User-Defined Impact Code  
Page @ Density  
Resident  
Thermal  
Resident  
Impact  
0
1
0
1
0
0
1
1
Code Page 1  
Code Page 2  
Code Page 3  
Code Page 4  
Code Page 1 @ 150 half-dots  
per inch  
Font A  
Font A  
Font B  
Font A  
Font B  
Code Page 1 @ 120 half-dots  
per inch  
Font B  
Code Page 2 @ 150 half-dots  
per inch  
Font C  
Code Page 2 @ 120 half-dots  
per inch  
Reserved  
1.  
Appendix D. EIA-232 programming information 129  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Updated April 2, 2009  
Table 19. Fonts for Models TI1 and TI2  
Bit 0  
Bit 1  
User-Defined Thermal  
Code Page  
User-Defined Impact Code  
Page @ Density  
Resident  
Thermal  
Resident  
Impact  
0
1
0
1
0
0
1
1
Code Page 1  
Code Page 2  
Code Page 3  
Code Page 4  
Code Page 1 @ 150 half-dots  
per inch  
Font A  
Font B  
Font A  
Font B  
Font A  
Font B  
Font A  
Font B  
Code Page 1 @ 120 half-dots  
per inch  
Code Page 2 @ 150 half-dots  
per inch  
Code Page 2 @ 120 half-dots  
per inch  
Default:  
n = 00  
Remarks:  
v For thermal printing with resident character sets:  
Font A = 10-dots (wide) × 20 dots (high) or 1.25 mm × 2.5 mm  
Font B = 12-dots (wide) × 24 dots (high) or 1.5 mm × 3.0 mm  
Font C = 8 dots (wide) × 16 dots (high) or 1.0 mm × 2.0 mm  
Font C, starting with level 38 micro code = 8-dots (wide) x 20 dots (high)  
or 1.0 mm x 2.5 mm  
v For impact printing:  
Font A = dot density of 150 half-dots per inch (resident characters = 1.2  
mm × 2.5 mm).  
Font B = dot density of 120 half-dots per inch (resident characters = 1.5  
mm × 2.5 mm).  
Emphasized printing enable and disable, and font A or font B selection  
must be at the beginning of a print line to be recognized.  
User-defined characters greater than 9 dots high can not be printed  
double high in landscape mode or in the portrait mode of Models TI1 and  
TI2.  
Double-high and emphasized characters are not valid in landscape  
mode.  
v Invert can not be used with overline or underline.  
v See “Character fonts” on page 98, “Download user-defined characters”  
on page 118, “Set print station” on page 134, and “Select user-defined or  
resident character sets” on page 134 for related information.  
Example:  
Print mode set to font B, emphasized and underlined enabled (n = 89 hex).  
Set or cancel double-wide mode  
EIA-232 Syntax:  
ESC W n or X'1B;57;n'  
where:  
n=00 Cancel double-wide mode  
n=01 Set double-wide mode  
130 SureMark Printers User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Updated April 2, 2009  
Default:  
n = 00  
Set or cancel double-high mode  
EIA-232 Syntax:  
ESC h n or X'1B;68;n'  
where:  
n=00 Cancel double-high mode  
n=01 Set double-high mode  
Default:  
n = 00  
Purpose:  
For better print quality with double-high characters in the document station.  
Remarks:  
See “Set or cancel unidirectional printing” on page 133.  
Set or cancel underline mode  
EIA-232 Syntax:  
ESC − n or X'1B;2D;n'  
where:  
n=00 Cancel underline mode  
n=01 Set underline mode  
Default:  
n = 00  
Remarks:  
This is valid in the customer receipt station only.  
Set or cancel overline mode  
EIA-232 Syntax:  
ESC x‘5F’ n or X'1B;5F;n'  
where:  
n=00 Cancel overline mode  
n=01 Set overline mode  
Default:  
n = 00  
Remarks:  
This is valid in the customer receipt station only.  
Set or cancel invert mode  
EIA-232 Syntax:  
ESC H n or X'1B;48;n'  
where:  
n=00 Cancel Invert Mode  
Appendix D. EIA-232 programming information 131  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Updated April 2, 2009  
n=01 Set Invert Mode  
Default:  
n = 00  
Remarks:  
This is valid in the customer receipt station only.  
Set or cancel emphasized printing  
EIA-232 Syntax:  
ESC G n or X'1B;47;n'  
where:  
n=00 Cancel Emphasized Mode  
n=01 Set Emphasized Mode  
Default:  
n = 00  
Remarks:  
This must be at the beginning of a print-line in the document portrait station.  
It is enabled for the entire line.  
Select maximum print speed  
EIA-232 Syntax:  
ESC ? n or X'1B;2F;n'  
where:  
n=00 52 lines per second  
n=01 35 lines per second  
n=02 26 lines per second  
n=03 15 lines per second  
Default:  
n = 00  
Remarks:  
v In the cash receipt station, the printing will slow down to the maximum  
selected speed. This will increase the quality of the printing and lower the  
current draw from the power supply when printing high density images,  
such as dark logos.  
v This is the maximum speed being selected, so the dot utilization  
algorithms can still slow the speed further when necessary.  
v If MCT 11 hex (17 dec), bit 11 has been set to a value of zero (maximum  
speed of 35 lps), then this command will not have an effect on the  
maximum print speed (the MCT value takes precedence).  
v This command does not affect the document station.  
v This command is not supported in TI-1/2 printers.  
v This command used to be called set/cancel high quality print mode  
and only supported parameter byte values of 0 and 1. Code level 40  
added parameter byte values of 2 and 3.  
132 SureMark Printers User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Updated April 2, 2009  
Set or cancel unidirectional printing  
EIA-232 Syntax:  
ESC U n or X'1B55;n'  
where:  
n=00 Cancels unidirectional printing  
n=01 Sets unidirectional printing  
Default:  
n = 00  
Remarks:  
This is valid in the document station in portrait mode only, when there must  
be two passes of the print head to print one print line.  
Example: double-high or emphasized print.  
When unidirectional mode is set to double-high characters, it takes three  
passes of the print head.  
In bidirectional mode, printing double-high characters takes only two passes  
of the print head.  
Unidirectional printing takes longer but increases the quality of the print.  
Request document length for landscape print  
EIA-232 Syntax:  
GS N X'02' NULL or X'1D;4E;02;00'  
Purpose  
To determine the length of the document in the Landscape Print station  
Remarks  
v Not supported on printer Models TI1 and TI2.  
v Document length data is sent in status bytes 9 and 10.  
v Status byte 5, bit 3, is sent to indicate that extra data (beyond status byte  
8) is attached.  
Set document length for landscape print  
EIA-232 syntax:  
GS c 1 n where n = 2 bytes indicating the length of the document in print  
motor steps.  
Remarks  
v Not supported on printer Models TI1 and TI2.  
v Document length data is sent in status bytes 9 and 10.  
v Status byte 5, bit 3, is sent to indicate that extra data (beyond status byte  
8) is attached.  
Note: There are 50 motor steps per inch. A 6-inch document = 300 steps. (Use  
295 to allow a margin for error; n=0x127.) To calculate the number of dots  
per printed line:  
v for 150 DPI (dots per inch)  
[(motor_steps - 75 * 3.12] - 10 = dots per line  
v or for a 6-inch document  
Appendix D. EIA-232 programming information 133  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Updated April 2, 2009  
(676 dots) / (10 = dots per character) = 67 characters per line  
v for 120 DPI  
[(motor steps - 75) * 2.5] - 10 = dots per line  
v or for a 6-inch document  
(540 dots) / (10 = dots per character) = 54 characters per line  
or  
Attention: It is recommended that you set the document length a few steps  
shorter than the actual document. If you set the document length too long the  
printer will feed the document out of the printer roller and an error will be generated.  
Set print station  
EIA-232 Syntax:  
ESC c 0 n or X'1B;6330;n'  
where:  
n
Specifies the print station.  
Bit # ↓ Station  
(LSB) 0 Reserved  
1 Customer Receipt Station  
2 Document Station - Portrait Mode  
3 Document Station - Landscape Mode  
4 Reserved  
5 Reserved  
6 Reserved  
( MSB) 7 Reserved  
Default:  
n = 02  
Remarks:  
See “Document handling” on page 181.  
Only one station can be set at a time. If you select more than one station,  
the command is ignored.  
Select user-defined or resident character sets  
EIA-232 Syntax:  
ESC % n or X'1B;25;n'  
where:  
n=00 Select resident character sets  
n=01 Select user-defined character sets  
Default:  
n = 00  
Remarks:  
See “Character fonts” on page 98 and “Download user-defined characters”  
on page 118.  
134 SureMark Printers User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Updated April 2, 2009  
Set code page  
EIA-232 Syntax:  
ESC t n or X'1B;74;n'  
where:  
n=00 Code Page 437 - United States  
n=01 Code Page 858 - Multilingual  
n=02 Code Page 863 - Canadian-French  
n=03 Code Page 860 - Portugal  
n=04 Code Page 865 - Norway  
n=05 Printer’s Generic Code Page  
Default:  
n = 01  
Remarks:  
Changing code pages is valid for resident character sets only. If  
user-defined character sets are enabled, this command will not do anything.  
Set intercharacter spacing  
EIA-232 Syntax:  
ESC SP n or X'1B20;n'  
where:  
n
The number of dot-spaces in the thermal print station or half-dot  
spaces in the impact print station.  
Default:  
n = 03  
Maximum:  
n = 08  
Remarks:  
If you select double-width printing, the space to the right of each character  
is doubled.  
Set or cancel rotated characters  
EIA-232 Syntax:  
ESC V n or X'1B56;n'  
where:  
n=00 Cancel Rotated Characters  
n=01 Set Rotated Character  
n=02 Code Page 863 - Canadian-French  
Default:  
n = 00  
Remarks:  
Rotation is 90 degrees clockwise. This command is supported only in the  
thermal print station.  
Appendix D. EIA-232 programming information 135  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Updated April 2, 2009  
Set print station parameters  
EIA-232 Syntax:  
ESC c 1 n or X'1B6331;n'  
where:  
n
Specifies the print station.  
Bit # ↓ Station  
LSB 0 Reserved  
1 Customer Receipt Station  
2 Document Station - Portrait Mode  
3 Document Station - Landscape Mode  
4 Reserved  
5 Reserved  
6 Reserved  
7 Reserved  
Purpose:  
This command is used for setting the line spacing, margins, and tabs.  
Remarks:  
More than one station can be selected at the same time if the settings are  
common to all of the selected stations.  
Default:  
n = 02 (customer receipt station)  
Select 1/8-inch line spacing  
EIA-232 Syntax:  
ESC 1 or X'1B31'  
Remarks:  
In the thermal (receipt) station this would set line feeding to 25 steps/line.  
In the impact (document - portrait) station this would be set to 6 steps/line.  
Note: Spacing in the document-portrait is actually 8.5 lines per inch. Line  
spacing dimension is approximate. For the impact printer in portrait  
mode, the actual line spacing must be calculated using 51 steps per  
inch.  
In the impact (document - landscape) station this would be set to 16  
steps/line.  
This command should be sent after “Set print station parameters.”  
Select 1/6-inch line spacing  
EIA-232 Syntax:  
ESC 2 or X'1B32'  
Remarks:  
In the thermal (receipt) station this would set line feeding to 34 steps/line.  
In the impact (document - portrait) station this would be set to 8 steps/line.  
136 SureMark Printers User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Updated April 2, 2009  
Note: Spacing in the document-portrait is actually 6.375 lines per inch. Line  
spacing dimension is approximate. For the impact printer in portrait  
mode, the actual line spacing must be calculated using 51 steps per  
inch.  
In the impact (document - landscape) station this would be set to 21  
steps/line.  
This command should be sent after “Set print station parameters” on page  
136.  
Select color printing  
This command is not supported for Models TI1 and TI2.  
EIA-232 Syntax:  
ESC r n or X'1B;72;n;'  
where:  
n =  
00  
01  
02  
Cancel color printing  
Enable full-character color printing  
Enable half-character color printing  
Default:  
n = 00  
Purpose:  
To enable half-character or full-character color printing, or to disable color  
printing.  
Remarks:  
v You can enable and disable full-character color printing within a print line.  
This enables you to print one word in a different color.  
v This command can be used up to 8 times in a line when full-character  
color printing is used.  
v Half-character color printing is only supported at the beginning of a print  
line.  
v If both bit 1 and bit 0 of n are set (n=03), only half-character color  
printing will be enabled.  
Limitations:  
v This command is only valid if the Enable Color Printing command (see  
“Select thermal paper” on page 147) is sent first.  
v When color paper is enabled, depending on the paper, the printer might  
be limited to printing at 15 lps when printing 8 lpi.  
Set line spacing using minimum units  
EIA-232 Syntax:  
ESC 3 n or X'1B33;n'  
where:  
n
Specifies line feed steps.  
In the customer receipt station, 1 inch = 204 steps and 1 mm = 8  
steps. Thermal must be an even number.  
Appendix D. EIA-232 programming information 137  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Updated April 2, 2009  
In the document portrait station, 1 inch = 51 steps and 1 mm = 2  
steps.  
In the document landscape station, 1 inch = 127 steps and 1 mm =  
5 steps.  
This command should be sent after “Set print station parameters”  
on page 136.  
Set sheet eject length  
EIA-232 Syntax:  
ESC C n or X'1B43;n'  
where:  
n
Specifies the number of line feed steps using minimum units moved  
when a FF is sent in the receipt station.  
In the document station, an eject will feed until the document has  
exited the lower document sensors - this length is not used.  
Default:  
n = A0 (160 decimal)  
Maximum:  
255 steps (FF hex)  
This value is stored in the EEPROM in the printer so that it is not lost when the  
printer is reset.  
Set horizontal tab positions  
EIA-232 Syntax:  
ESC D [n1 n2] NUL NUL or X'1B44[n1n2]0000'  
where:  
n1  
n2  
The high-order-byte dot offset for the horizontal tab.  
The low-order-byte dot offset for the horizontal tab.  
Default:  
There is a tab every 100 dots.  
Remarks:  
This command should be sent after “Set print station parameters” on page  
136.  
Up to 5 tab positions can be stored. All 5 n1 n2 value pairs can be included  
in one command. Values must be entered in hex.  
A tab is calculated from the left margin position.  
Tab values must be in ascending order.  
Example: To set 3 tab positions - at the 100, 150 and 300 dot positions:  
v X'1B4400640096012C0000'  
See “Tab to next tab stop” on page 160.  
Set left margin position  
EIA-232 Syntax:  
ESC $ n1 n2 or X'1B24;n1;n2'  
138 SureMark Printers User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Updated April 2, 2009  
where:  
n1  
n2  
The high-order byte of the dot offset from the beginning of the print  
line.  
The low-order byte of the dot offset from the beginning of the print  
line.  
Default:  
n1 = 0, n2 = 0  
Remarks:  
In the customer receipt station, 1 mm = 8 dots.  
In the document station, 1 inch = 150 half-dots (75 dots).  
n1 and n2 are hex values. Convert each to decimal. Then, use this formula  
to get the decimal equivalent: (n1 × 256) + n2.  
If the number exceeds the printable area, it is ignored.  
The maximum value for the customer receipt station is 576. The maximum  
value for the document insert station is 474.  
In the customer receipt station, this number is rounded back to a factor of  
8.  
This command should be sent after “Set print station parameters” on page  
136.  
Set relative position  
EIA-232 Syntax:  
ESC <5C>h n1 n2 or X'1B5C;n1;n2'  
where:  
n1  
n2  
The high-order byte of the dot offset from the left margin.  
The low-order byte of the dot offset from the left margin.  
Default:  
n1 = 0, n2 = 0  
Remarks:  
In the thermal station, 1 mm = 8 dots.  
In the impact station, 1 in. = 75-dots (150 half-dots).  
n1 and n2 are hex values. Convert each to decimal, then use this formula  
to get the decimal equivalent: (n2 × 256) + n1  
To move the position to the left, use a negative number.  
Example: To move N dots to the left⇒ 65536 − N.  
If this number plus the left margin exceeds the printable area it is ignored.  
See “Set left margin position” on page 138.  
In the customer receipt station, this number is rounded back to a factor of  
8.  
Align positions  
EIA-232 Syntax:  
ESC a n or X'1B61;n'  
Appendix D. EIA-232 programming information 139  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Updated April 2, 2009  
where:  
n = 00 Align Left  
n = 01 Align Center  
n = 02 Align Right  
n = 04 Align Column Right  
Default:  
n = 00  
Remarks:  
v Values 00, 01, and 02 are only valid at the beginning of a line.  
v Tabs are only valid when printing is aligned to the left. If tabs are used  
when left alignment is not used, results can be unpredictable. (See “Tab  
to next tab stop” on page 160.)  
v Alignment is relative to the left margin.  
v To use the Align Column Right command:  
1. Send the characters that you want to be left aligned.  
2. Send the Align Column Right command.  
3. Send the characters that you want to be right aligned.  
4. Send an end of line command, for example X'0A' or X'0D'.  
The printer will return to left aligned after the line is printed.  
Limitations for n=04:  
v The command is only valid in the cash receipt station.  
v This command is not supported for Models TI1 and TI2.  
v The command is ignored if the printer is not left aligned when the  
command is received.  
v If the Align Column Right command is received but the line is filled  
before an EOL is received, the filled line is treated as an EOL. There are  
usually a few dot positions available, but not enough for a full character.  
The column alignment will occur on the few dot positions available.  
Set error recovery function  
EIA-232 Syntax:  
ESC c 4 n or X'1B63;34;n'  
where:  
n
Selects the function.  
Bit # ↓ Function  
LSB 0 Reserved  
1 Reserved  
Bit=0  
N/A  
N/A  
Bit=1  
N/A  
N/A  
2 Release Print Buffer after Error  
Release  
Hold  
Correction  
32 Automatic retry on a Home Error  
4 Hold buffer when waiting for a  
document  
Enabled  
Release  
Not Enabled  
Hold  
5 Hold buffer after a flip error  
Release  
Hold  
Default:  
n = 00  
140 SureMark Printers User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Updated April 2, 2009  
Remarks:  
When set to not automatically release the print buffer after error correction  
(bit #2), the printer does not execute commands until it receives a  
“Real-time requests” on page 175 command to cancel or release the print  
buffer.  
When automatic retry on a home error is selected, the printer will try to  
reset the print head to a known location, then reprint the line on which the  
error occurred. If the printer is unable to reset the print head, operator  
intervention is needed.  
An error will be sent back to the system and the LED will blink.  
Define document wait time  
EIA-232 Syntax:  
ESC f x y or X'1B66;x;y'  
where:  
x
Time the printer should wait, from receiving a print line for the  
document station until the document is inserted.  
If the document has not been detected by the time the wait time  
ends, a document error is sent to the system. The system continues  
to wait for a document to be inserted.  
Wait Time = x * 0.5 seconds  
y
Delay from the time the document is detected until it is grabbed by  
the printer (start of document printing):  
v Side insertion - closes the document throat.  
v Front insertion - pulls the document into the printer and feeds it  
to its top of form.  
Delay = y × 0.1 seconds  
Defaults:  
x = 02 y = 03  
Remarks:  
If y = 0, the printer does not grab the document. The operator must use the  
document feed button to pull the document into the printer.  
If x = 0, the printer never sends error status if no print data is sent to the  
document station.  
This value is stored in the EEPROM in the printer so that it is not lost when  
the printer is reset.  
Status sent to system  
EIA-232 Syntax:  
ESC ) n or X'1B29;n'  
where:  
n
Selects the function.  
Bit # ↓ Function  
LSB 0 Print Buffer Empty/Full  
1 Reserved  
Bit=0  
Yes  
Yes  
Bit=1  
No  
No  
2 Front Document Sensor Change  
Yes  
No  
Appendix D. EIA-232 programming information 141  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Updated April 2, 2009  
3 Top Document Sensor Change  
4 After status byte 6 is incremented or Yes  
status byte 3, bit 7, is set  
Yes  
No  
No  
5 Cash Draw Sensor Change  
6 Key In Use  
7 Cover Open  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
No  
No  
Remarks:  
Bit 4 can be used in place of the Command Complete. When the buffer is  
empty, the system can assume that everything stored in the printer has  
been completed. To enable these status messages, unsolicited status must  
be enabled. See “Asynchronous (real-time) commands” on page 175.  
Select character for reprinted lines  
EIA-232 Syntax:  
ESC + n or X'1B2B;n'  
where:  
n
The ASCII representation of the character printed in the first  
character position on the print line when recovering from a home  
error. This occurs in impact print stations only.  
Default:  
n = 2A hex (This is an asterisk (*) in most code pages.)  
Remarks:  
The value is stored in EEPROM to prevent loss when the printer is reset.  
The default value after the reset is the value last sent.  
Re-initialize the printer  
EIA-232 Syntax:  
ESC @ or X'1B40'  
Purpose:  
Re-initialize all printer setting to their default values and reset the impact  
print head.  
Remarks:  
Commands in the print buffer are not lost when this command is issued.  
The settings that are re-initialized follow (all numbers are in hex):  
142 SureMark Printers User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Updated April 2, 2009  
Setting  
Default Value  
Print Mode  
00  
Print Station Selected  
User-Defined/Resident Character Sets  
Code Page  
02  
00  
01  
Intercharacter Spacing (Single Byte)  
Rotated Characters  
Station for line spacing  
Line Spacing all stations  
Tab Positions  
03  
00  
02  
Six LPI  
every 100 dots  
Left Margin  
Relative Position  
Align Positions  
Unidirectional printing  
Horizontal Size of Bar Code  
Vertical Size of Bar Code  
Position of HR  
00  
00  
00  
00  
03  
A2  
00  
00  
Font for HRI  
Error Conditions:  
None  
Enable or disable the feed buttons  
EIA-232 Syntax:  
ESC c 5 n or X'1B;63;35;n'  
where:  
n=0  
n=1  
Enables feed buttons  
Disables feed buttons  
Default:  
n = 0  
Purpose:  
To disable the feed buttons while in the middle of a transaction.  
Remarks:  
If the printer is set to have the buttons disabled, the offline tests will also be  
disabled. Supported on all models except TI1 and TI2.  
Enable or disable the beeper (Models TF6 and TM6 only)  
This command is supported only for Models TF6 and TM6.  
EIA-232 Syntax:  
ESC BEL n1 n2 or X'1B 07 n1 n2'  
where:  
n1  
Enables or disables beeper.  
X'00' Disable beeper.  
X'01'–X'FE'  
Timed enable beeper.  
X'FF' Enable beeper.  
n2  
Sets the beeper volume and tone.  
Appendix D. EIA-232 programming information 143  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Updated April 2, 2009  
Bits 0–3  
The note. Bit 0 is the LSB.  
Bits 4–5  
The octave.  
Bit 6 Reserved.  
Bit 7 Volume. 0 = loud, 1 = soft.  
Value (Bits 0–3)  
0000–0  
Note  
C
Value (Bits 0–3)  
1000–8  
Note  
Value (Bits 4–5) Octave  
G#  
00–0  
01–1  
10–2  
11–3  
1
2
3
4
0001–1  
C#  
D
1001–9  
A
0010–2  
1010–A  
A#  
0011–3  
D#  
E
1011–B  
B
0100–4  
1100–C  
Rest / Silence  
Reserved  
Reserved  
0101–5  
F
1101–D  
0110–6  
F#  
G
1110–E  
0111–7  
1111–F  
1 KHz (normal  
beep)  
Default:  
n = X'00'  
Purpose:  
To enable or disable the beeper.  
Remarks:  
v Any value other than X'00' or X'FF' is treated as an amount of time that  
the beeper is to be enabled. The time is calculated as n1×0.1 seconds.  
v To stop a beep command early, send the Disable Beeper command.  
v Timed beeps can be chained together. They can also be downloaded as  
canned messages.  
v A value of n2=X'2F' is recommended for the most audible tone.  
v Set bits 0–3 to 1100 to put a timed silence in a beep sequence.  
Enable or disable upside-down printing  
This command is not supported for Models TI1 and TI2. This command is only  
supported in the thermal station.  
EIA-232 Syntax:  
ESC { n or X'1B 7B n'  
where:  
n enables or disables upside-down printing.  
X'00' Disable upside-down printing.  
X'01' Enable upside-down printing.  
Default:  
n = X'00'  
Purpose:  
When the printer is wall-mounted, the front of the printer points up.  
144 SureMark Printers User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Updated April 2, 2009  
Therefore, the print data appears upside down when data is printed  
normally. This command allows the data to be right-side up as it comes out  
of the printer.  
Remarks:  
v When upside-down printing is enabled, the last line of data must be sent  
to the print first.  
v This command is valid only at the beginning of a print line.  
Select character size for scalable fonts  
This command is not supported for Models TI1 and TI2. This command is only  
supported in the thermal station.  
EIA-232 Syntax:  
GS ! n or X'1D;21;n'  
where:  
n
Defines the height and width of a character. The four least  
significant bits (LSBs) specify the height and the four most  
significant bits (MSBs) specify the width of the character. See  
Table 20.  
For example, if n=X'14' the scaled character will be twice the  
defined width and five times the defined height.  
Table 20. Width and height for scalable fonts  
Four MSBs (in Character Width  
hex)  
Four LSBs (in Character Height  
hex)  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
As defined  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
As defined  
2 × defined width  
3 × defined width  
4 × defined width  
5 × defined width  
6 × defined width  
7 × defined width  
8 × defined width  
2 × defined height  
3 × defined height  
4 × defined height  
5 × defined height  
6 × defined height  
7 × defined height  
8 × defined height  
Default:  
n = 00  
Purpose:  
To select the size of a character.  
Remarks:  
v This command is valid only in the thermal print station.  
v Bits 3 and 8 of n are ignored.  
v The Set Print Mode command (see “Set print mode” on page 129) can  
also select the character height (double high and double wide). The last  
command that is received is the effective command.  
v Underline and overline is not supported when the height is scaled 8x  
except on the TI8, TI9, TG8, and TG9.  
v The bar for overline and underline is not magnified in thickness except  
on the TI8, TI9, TG8, and TG9.  
Appendix D. EIA-232 programming information 145  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Updated April 2, 2009  
Fix font matrix  
This command is not supported for Models TI1 and TI2.  
EIA-232 Syntax:  
ESC : n or X'1B 3A n'  
where:  
n
The character width to which all proportional characters will be  
adjusted. The range of valid values is 8 ≤ n ≤ 32. Use X'00' to  
disable this command and print proportional characters normally.  
Default:  
n = 00  
Purpose:  
To fix the matrix of proportional fonts. This command will be used mostly to  
align numbers and decimal points.  
Remarks:  
v This command is valid only on proportional user-defined fonts.  
v If the character is larger than the width defined by this command, then  
the right side of the character will be truncated.  
v If the character is smaller than the width defined by this command, then  
the character will be centered in the space.  
Print logo inline  
This command is not supported for Models TI1 and TI2.  
EIA-232 Syntax:  
GS J d n1 n2 data or X'1D 4A d n1 n2 data'  
where:  
d
Relative height of the character.  
0
1
Single high  
Double high  
n1  
MSB of the logo width.  
n2  
LSB of the logo width.  
data  
The data to form the graphics image.  
Purpose:  
To print a small logo inline with characters.  
Remarks:  
v Thermal station only  
v Rotate characters must be disabled  
v n1 and n2 indicate the number of dots of the bit image in the horizontal  
direction. The number of dots is calculated as n1×256+n2 (after first  
converting n1 and n2 to decimal).  
v The logo is 24 dot rows high. If printed in double-high mode, the logo will  
be 48 rows high.  
v The number of data bytes to form the image is figured by  
{((n1×256+n2)−1)/8+1}×24.  
146 SureMark Printers User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Updated April 2, 2009  
v Like user-defined characters, if the image is only 14 dots wide, the last  
two dots should be zero to complete the byte. When printed, the image  
will be only 14 dots wide.  
Select thermal paper  
This command is not supported for Models TI1 and TI2.  
EIA-232 Syntax:  
GS ; n or X'1D 3B n'  
where:  
n = X'00'  
Disable two-color printing.  
n = X'01'  
Enable color printing using print parameter set 1.  
n = X'02'  
Enable color printing using print parameter set 2.  
n = X'03'  
Enable color printing using print parameter set 3.  
X'n = 04'–X'FF'  
Select the print parameters to be defined.  
Purpose:  
To enable two-color printing and select the print parameters that are best  
suited for the paper selected.  
Remarks:  
v New parameters will be defined as new color papers become available.  
v The speed of printing will change depending on the print parameters.  
When print parameter set 1 is used, the print speed will be 15 lines per  
second.  
v This command setting is saved in nonvolatile memory.  
Bar code commands  
Bar code commands are valid in the thermal print station only.  
Print bar code  
EIA-232 Syntax:  
GS k n NUL or X'1D6B;n;data'  
where: n =  
Bar Code  
X'00' UPC-A  
X'01' UPC-E  
X'02' JAN13 (EAN-13)  
X'03' JAN8 (EAN-8)  
X'04' CODE 39  
X'05' ITF  
X'06' CODABAR  
Appendix D. EIA-232 programming information 147  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Updated April 2, 2009  
X'07' CODE 128C  
X'08' CODE 93  
X'09' CODE 128A, 128B, and 128C (This command is not supported for  
Models TI1 and TI2.)  
data  
For n=00 through n=08, the ASCII representation of the characters to be  
printed.  
For n=09, the hexadecimal representation of the characters to be printed.  
The first byte of data must be the byte-count of the remaining data. The  
trailing X'00' should not be included for this command.  
Remarks:  
v Valid at the beginning of a line only.  
v This command will increment status byte 6.  
v Printing will not start until X'00' is received, or the end of a data packet in  
RS-485.  
v Data after any invalid character for a particular bar code will be  
discarded. The printer will continue to wait for X'00'.  
v If X'00' or an invalid character is received before the required number of  
data bytes, zeros will be inserted following the data until the required  
number is reached (for UPC-A, UPC-E, JAN13, and JAN8).  
v Excess characters will be discarded.  
v A check digit will be generated if one is not supplied for UPC-A, JAN13,  
and JAN8.  
v Check digits will be figured and added for Code 128C and Code 93.  
v Models TI1 and TI2 support only Code 128C (n=07). They do not support  
codes 128A and 128B (n=09).  
v For UPC-E, the printer will expand the data, generate a check digit and  
parse the data before generating the bar code (6 or 7 digits are  
executed). If 7 digits are received and digit 1 is 0, the last 6 digits are  
used.  
If digit 1 is not 0, digit 1 is used and the digit 7 is ignored.  
v For CODABAR, a stop and start character is required.  
v A leading zero will be added to the data for ITF bar codes if the data  
received has an odd number of bytes.  
v If a bar code width is greater than the paper width, the right of the bar  
code is truncated, making the bar code unreadable.  
v Bar codes will always be printed in black, regardless of color printing  
settings.  
148 SureMark Printers User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Updated April 2, 2009  
Table 21. Code 128 character set  
Value  
Code  
Decimal  
0
Hex  
0
Set A  
SP  
!
Set B  
SP  
!
Set C  
00  
01  
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
07  
08  
09  
10  
11  
1
1
2
2
“
“
3
3
#
$
%
&
‘
#
$
%
&
‘
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
(
(
9
9
)
)
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
37  
38  
A
*
*
B
+
‘
+
‘
C
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
37  
38  
D
–
.
–
.
E
F
/
/
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
1A  
1B  
1C  
1D  
1E  
1F  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
;
;
<
=
>
?
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
<
=
>
?
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
Appendix D. EIA-232 programming information 149  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Updated April 2, 2009  
Table 21. Code 128 character set (continued)  
Value  
Code  
Decimal  
39  
40  
41  
42  
43  
44  
45  
46  
47  
48  
49  
50  
51  
52  
53  
54  
55  
56  
57  
58  
59  
60  
61  
62  
63  
64  
65  
66  
67  
68  
69  
70  
71  
72  
73  
74  
75  
76  
77  
Hex  
27  
28  
29  
2A  
2B  
2C  
2D  
2E  
2F  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
37  
38  
39  
3A  
3B  
3C  
3D  
3E  
3F  
40  
41  
42  
43  
44  
45  
46  
47  
48  
49  
4A  
4B  
4C  
4D  
Set A  
G
Set B  
G
H
I
Set C  
39  
40  
41  
42  
43  
44  
45  
46  
47  
48  
49  
50  
51  
52  
53  
54  
55  
56  
57  
58  
59  
60  
61  
62  
63  
64  
65  
66  
67  
68  
69  
70  
71  
72  
73  
74  
75  
76  
77  
H
I
J
J
K
K
L
L
M
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
\
\
]
]
∧
∧
_
_
MUL  
SOH  
STX  
ETX  
EOT  
ENO  
ACK  
BEL  
BS  
HT  
LF  
VT  
FF  
CR  
‘
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
k
l
m
150 SureMark Printers User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Updated April 2, 2009  
Table 21. Code 128 character set (continued)  
Value  
Code  
Decimal  
78  
Hex  
4E  
4F  
50  
51  
52  
53  
54  
55  
56  
57  
58  
59  
5A  
5B  
5C  
5D  
5E  
5F  
60  
61  
62  
63  
64  
65  
66  
67  
68  
69  
Set A  
SO  
Set B  
Set C  
78  
n
79  
SI  
o
79  
80  
DLE  
p
80  
81  
DC1  
DC2  
DC3  
DC4  
NAK  
SYN  
ETB  
q
81  
82  
r
82  
83  
s
83  
84  
t
84  
85  
u
85  
86  
v
86  
87  
w
87  
88  
CAN  
EM  
x
88  
89  
y
89  
90  
SUB  
ESC  
FS  
z
90  
91  
{
91  
92  
|
}
92  
93  
GS  
93  
94  
RS  
~
94  
95  
US  
DEL  
95  
96  
FNC3  
FNC2  
SHIFT  
CODE C  
CODE B  
FNC4  
FNC1  
FNC3  
96  
97  
FNC2  
97  
98  
SHIFT  
98  
99  
CODE C  
FNC4  
99  
100  
101  
102  
103  
104  
105  
CODE B  
CODE A  
FNC1  
CODE A  
FNC1  
START CODE A  
START CODE B  
START CODE C  
Appendix D. EIA-232 programming information 151  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Updated April 2, 2009  
Print bar code examples  
Table 22. Print bar code examples  
Command  
n =  
Data  
UPC-A  
X'1D 68'  
X'1D 68'  
X'1D 68'  
X'00'  
X'30 33 31 33 32 33  
31 32 30 37 38'  
UPC-E  
X'01'  
X'02'  
X'34 39 30 36 39 30  
00'  
JAN 13 (EAN-130  
X'34 39 31 32 33 34  
35 36 37 38 39 30  
00'  
JAN8 (EAN-8)  
CODE 39  
ITF  
X'1D 68'  
X'1D 68'  
X'1D 68'  
X'1D 68'  
X'1D 68'  
X'03'  
X'04'  
X'05'  
X'06'  
X'07'  
34 39 31 32 33 34 35  
36 00  
30 31 32 33 34 35 36  
37 00  
31 32 33 34 35 36 37  
38 39 30 31 32 00  
CODABAR  
CODE 128C  
42 39 30 2E 2B 3A  
2F 24 2D 43 00  
35 34 35 35 35 36 35  
37 35 38 35 39 00  
CODE 93  
Reserved  
X'1D 68'  
X'1D 68'  
X'08'  
31 32 33 34 35 36 00  
X'0A - FF'  
Select horizontal size of bar code  
EIA-232 Syntax:  
GS w n or X'1D77;n'  
where:  
n
The horizontal magnification of the line width in the bar code, (2 ≤ n  
≤ 4).  
Default:  
n = 03  
Note: The last valid value is kept when an invalid value is sent.  
Select bar code height  
EIA-232 Syntax:  
GS h n or X'1D68;n'  
where:  
n
The dot height of the bar code, (1 ≤ n ≤ 255).  
Default:  
n = X'A2' (162 decimal)  
Select printing position of human readable information (HRI)  
EIA-232 Syntax:  
GS H n or X'1D48;n'  
where:  
152 SureMark Printers User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Updated April 2, 2009  
n = the print position  
n = X'00'  
Not Printed  
n = X'01'  
Above the bar code  
n = X'02'  
Below the bar code  
n = X'03'  
Both above and below the bar code.  
Default:  
n = X'00'  
Remarks:  
Human readable information is normal text associated with the bar code.  
Note: The last valid value is kept when an invalid value is sent.  
Select font for HRI  
EIA-232 Syntax:  
GS f n or X'1D66;n'  
where: n = the font for the HRI  
n = X'00'  
Font A  
n = X'01'  
Font B  
Default:  
n = X'00'  
Remarks:  
Only resident character sets are used:  
v Font A = 10-dots (W) × 20 dots (H) or 1.25 mm × 2.5 mm  
v Font B = 12-dots (W) × 24 dots (H) or 1.5 mm × 3.0 mm  
Note: The last valid value is kept when an invalid value is sent.  
Print PDF417 bar code  
EIA-232 Syntax:  
GS P data NUL or X'1D;50;data;00'  
where:  
data  
The ASCII representation of the characters to be printed.  
Remarks:  
Valid only at the beginning of a line. Printing will not start until a X'00' is  
received.  
This command will increment status byte 6.  
The maximum number of characters to be encoded is 1000.  
Appendix D. EIA-232 programming information 153  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Updated April 2, 2009  
Error Conditions:  
If an image can not be printed, status byte 7, bit 2 will be set. This may  
happen when the image is too big to print. Try decreasing the ECC level.  
Print PDF417 bar code using binary mode  
EIA-232 Syntax:  
GS U datalength data or X'1D;55;datalength;data;00'  
where:  
datalength  
The number of data bytes to follow the bytecount. This is a two-byte  
variable to accommodate the 1000 maximum data bytes, i.e.  
X'0200' = 512 decimal data bytes.  
data  
Remarks:  
The ASCII representation of the characters to be printed.  
Characters can have a value of X'00' to X'FF' inclusive.  
This command encodes data into PDF417 bar codes using binary mode.  
Valid only at the beginning of a line. Printing will not start until all data is  
received.  
This command will increment status byte 6.  
The maximum number of characters to be encoded is 1000.  
Error Conditions:  
If the encoder detects an error, status byte 7, bit 2 will be set. This may  
happen when the amount of data is too large to be encoded. In this case,  
try decreasing the ECC level or decreasing the amount of data to be  
encoded. An unsolicited status message will be sent. (A status will be sent  
even if the system is ready to receive it or not.)  
Select PDF417 ECC (error correction codewords) level  
EIA-232 Syntax:  
GS R n or X'1D;52;n1;n2'  
where:  
n1  
n2  
The high-order byte of the ECC level.  
The low-order byte of the ECC level.  
Default:  
n1 = 00  
n2 = 15  
Range:  
0 ≤ n1n2 ≤ 400 decimal (170 hex)  
Remarks:  
For 0 ≤ n1n2 ≤ 8, the ECC level is assumed as that particular security level.  
The security level determines the number of error correction codewords  
added to the symbol.  
Error Correction  
Security Level  
0
Codewords  
0
154 SureMark Printers User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Updated April 2, 2009  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
2
6
14  
30  
62  
126  
254  
510  
For 9 ≤ n1n2 ≤ 400, the ECC level is assumed as a percentage of  
the codewords in the bar code.  
Select aspect ratio PDF417 bar code  
EIA-232 Syntax:  
GS S r;c or X'1D;53;r;c'  
where:  
r
The height dimension for the ratio; 1 ≤ r ≤ 9.  
The width dimension for the ratio; 1 ≤ c ≤ 9.  
c
Default:  
r = 1, c = 2  
Remarks:  
This is not an exact ratio. The image will get as close as possible to the  
ratio. However, the maximum width of an image is 12 columns and the  
maximum height is 90 rows.  
Enable PDF417 truncation  
EIA-232 Syntax:  
GS T n or X'1D;54;n'  
where:  
n
0
1
Whether to enable truncation  
Disable truncation.  
Enable truncation.  
Default:  
n = 0  
Remarks:  
Truncated PDF generates a symbol with the right row indicator and stop  
pattern replaced by a single width bar. There is a slight degradation in  
decode performance if truncation is enabled, which allows more data to fit  
in the image width.  
Appendix D. EIA-232 programming information 155  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Updated April 2, 2009  
Print character commands  
These commands should be sent after ASCII data is sent to the printer and is being  
held in the print buffer. Any of these commands will increment the line count by 1.  
(See “Status byte 6” on page 186 and “Reset line count” on page 176.)  
Print and line feed  
EIA-232 Syntax:  
LF or X'0A'  
Purpose:  
Prints data in the print buffer and feeds the paper by a preset amount.  
Print and line feed  
EIA-232 Syntax:  
CR or X'0D'  
Purpose:  
Prints data in the print buffer and feeds the paper by a preset amount.  
Remarks:  
There is an MCT to enable or disable this command. The default is to  
disable or ignore the CR command.  
Print, form feed, and cut the paper (FF)  
EIA-232 Syntax:  
FF or X'0C'  
Purpose:  
Prints data in the print buffer and feeds the paper in the customer receipt  
station or document insert station by a preset amount, until the document  
exits the feed rollers. If a cutter is available at the station (CR station only),  
it cuts the paper.  
Print and feed paper n lines  
EIA-232 Syntax:  
ESC d n or X'1B64;n'  
where:  
n
Specifies the number of line feeds.  
Purpose:  
Prints data in the print buffer and feeds the paper by the amount specified  
in this command.  
Print and feed paper using minimum units  
EIA-232 Syntax:  
ESC J n or X'1B4A;n'  
where:  
n
Specifies the line feed steps.  
In the receipt station: 1 in. = 204 steps (1 mm = 8 steps).  
In the document portrait station: 1 in. = 51 steps (1 mm = 2 steps).  
156 SureMark Printers User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Updated April 2, 2009  
In the document landscape station: 1 in. = 127 steps (1 mm = 5  
steps).  
Note: Line spacing dimension is approximate. For the impact printer in  
portrait mode, the actual line spacing must be calculated using 51  
steps per inch.  
Purpose:  
Prints data in the print buffer and feeds the paper by the amount specified  
in this command.  
Print and feed paper in reverse using minimum units  
EIA-232 syntax:  
ESC K n X'1B;4B;n' where n specifies the number of line feed steps. One  
inch = 51 steps (1 mm = 2 steps)  
Purpose:  
This command may be used to print on a particular line on a document.  
The data in the print buffer is printed and the paper is fed by the amount  
specified in this command. When the document is inserted until the line can  
just be seen at the printer cover, and this command is sent with n=0x65, the  
next line printed lines up with the line seen at the top cover. This replaces  
the Open Throat command for full check scan (TI9/TG9) printers.  
Limitations:  
v This command is valid only for the document station.  
v This command is valid only for Models Tx8 and Tx9.  
Print graphic messages  
Select and print a graphics (logo) command  
EIA-232 Syntax:  
ESC * d w h data or X'1B2A;d;w;h;data'  
where:  
d
Dot density.  
00  
01  
02  
Normal Print - 200 dpi in the receipt station, 150 dpi in the  
document station.  
Note: In the document station, this takes three passes of  
the print head for a logo that is 8 dots high.  
Double wide - 100 dpi in the receipt station, 75 dpi in the  
document station.  
Note: In the document station, this takes one pass of the  
print head for a logo that is 8 dots high.  
Double wide and high - 100 dpi in the receipt station, 75 dpi  
in the document station. Every dot row in the vertical  
direction will be printed twice.  
w
One-eighth the number of dots in the horizontal direction, (width = 8  
× w)  
range = 1 to 72 for a thermal logo.  
Appendix D. EIA-232 programming information 157  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Updated April 2, 2009  
range = 1 to 59 for an impact logo.  
In the receipt station, 1 = 8 dots = 1 mm.  
In the document station, 6 = 48 dots = 1 inch.  
h
One-eighth the number of dots in the vertical direction, (height = 8  
× h).  
range = 1 to 255 for a thermal logo.  
range = 1 to 5 for an impact logo.  
The data to form the graphics image.  
data  
The number of data bytes for the image is (h × w) × 8. See  
“Download graphics (logo) commands” on page 115 for an example  
of the data.  
Purpose:  
To print all-points-addressable print messages.  
Remarks:  
The margin will be ignored if this causes the logo to overrun the line length.  
These messages can be positioned on the page using the commands for  
setting positions.  
Not supported in document landscape mode.  
To print graphics on the printers when the data is greater:  
1. Hold the buffer.  
2. Send all the data.  
3. Release the buffer.  
Note: When the buffer is held, care must be taken to avoid exceeding the  
capacity of the printer memory (see Table 23).  
Table 23. Buffer sizes  
4610 model  
TI1, TI2  
Buffer size  
2 KB  
Tx3, Tx4, Tx6  
Tx8, Tx9  
16 KB  
64 KB  
The left margin will be rounded down to a factor of 8. For example, if the  
margin = 74, the logo starts at 72.  
Retries are not attempted on print errors.  
Valid at the beginning of the line only.  
When printing in the document station, a line feed command must be sent  
to advance the paper past the last line of the logo.  
If the parameter d, w, or h is out of the defined range for this command, the  
command is discarded and the remaining data is processed as print data.  
This command will increment status byte 6.  
If this message is printed on a regular basis, consider downloading it to  
save communication time. (See “Download graphics (logo) commands” on  
page 115.)  
The data buffer can be used for signature capture.  
158 SureMark Printers User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Updated April 2, 2009  
Print predefined graphics (logo) command  
EIA-232 Syntax:  
GS / m logo# or X'1D2F;m;logo#'  
where:  
m
The dot-density:  
00  
01  
02  
Normal Print - 200 dpi in the receipt station, 150 dpi in the  
document station.  
Note: In the document station, this takes three passes of  
the print head for a logo that is 8 dots high.  
Double wide - 100 dpi in the receipt station, 75 dpi in the  
document station.  
Note: In the document station, this takes one pass of the  
print head for a logo that is 8 dots high.  
Double wide and high - 100 dpi in the receipt station, 75 dpi  
in the document station. Every dot row in the vertical  
direction will be printed twice.  
logo # The number associated with the logo that is stored.  
v range = 1 to 40 for all models except TI8, TI9, TG8, and TG9  
v range = 1 to 255 for Models TI8, TI9, TG8, and TG9  
Purpose:  
To print predefined all-points-addressable print messages.  
Remarks:  
The margin is ignored if it causes the logo to overrun the line length.  
Printing this message in the document station at 150 dpi will take three  
passes of the print head.  
These messages can be positioned on the page using the commands for  
setting positions.  
Valid at the beginning of the line only.  
This command is not valid in landscape mode.  
This command will increment status byte 6.  
Retries will not be attempted on print errors.  
In the document portrait station, a line feed command must be sent to  
advance the paper past the last line of the logo.  
See “Download graphics (logo) commands” on page 115.  
Print predefined messages  
EIA-232 Syntax:  
GS ^ message# or X'1D5E;message#'  
where:  
message#  
The number associated with the stored predefined message.  
v range = 1 to 25 for all models except TI8, TI9, TG8, and TG9  
v range = 1 to 255 for Models TI8, TI9, TG8, and TG9  
Appendix D. EIA-232 programming information 159  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Updated April 2, 2009  
Purpose:  
To print predefined print messages.  
Remarks:  
Valid at the beginning of the line only.  
Retries will not be attempted on print errors.  
Attention: Stored commands can increment status byte 6.See “Predefine  
messages” on page 117.  
Miscellaneous commands  
Tab to next tab stop  
EIA-232 Syntax:  
HT or X'09'  
Purpose:  
Moves the print position to the next tab stop.  
Remarks:  
See “Set horizontal tab positions” on page 138.  
Tabs are valid when printing is aligned to the left only. If the tabs are used  
when alignment is not left, results can be unpredictable. (See “Align  
positions” on page 139.)  
Return home (select print head location)  
EIA-232 Syntax:  
ESC < n or X'1B3C;n'  
where:  
n
The print-head position:  
00  
01  
Document home position  
Open document throat position. On Models TI3, TI4, TI8,  
TG3, TG4, and TG8, the DI station throat will automatically  
be closed if the CR station is exercised. (The Model  
TI9/TG9 throat can not be opened.)  
02  
03  
04  
Reserved  
Left home position  
Refined document home position. This can be used to  
recover from a home error.  
05  
06  
Register document  
v Close throat if open  
v Advance paper forward to first position  
Re-register the document. If the document is in the printer,  
it is pulled back to the first print position. Valid for Models  
Tx8 and Tx9 only.  
07-FF Reserved  
Remarks:  
Only valid at the beginning of the line. Only valid for impact print  
stations.  
160 SureMark Printers User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Updated April 2, 2009  
Purpose:  
To move the print head to the desired location.  
Remarks:  
Valid at the beginning of the line only. Valid in impact print stations only.  
Paper cut/DI eject  
EIA-232 Syntax:  
ESC i or ESC m or X'1B69 or 1B;6D'  
Purpose:  
To cut the paper in the customer receipt station, or eject the document in  
the document insert station.  
Remarks:  
v This command is the equivalent of a form feed (0C) in the document  
insert station but does not feed the customer receipt in the CR station.  
v ESC i or X'1B69' does not increment status byte 6.  
v ESC m or X'1B6D' does increment status byte 6.  
Generate drive pulse for cash drawer  
EIA-232 Syntax:  
ESC p m n1 n2 or X'1B70;m;n1;n2'  
where:  
m
The cash drawer number - 0 or 1.  
n1  
n2  
Pulse width on time = (n1 × 2) milliseconds.  
Pulse width off time = (n2 × 2) milliseconds.  
Purpose:  
To open one of the cash drawers attached to the printer.  
Remarks:  
Printing will be suspended while a cash drawer is being opened.  
Retrieve the flash storage  
EIA-232 Syntax:  
ESC 4 n1 n2 or X'1B;34;n1;n2'  
where:  
n1  
n2  
One-byte count of the bytes to be returned  
Three-byte address of the first byte to be returned  
Purpose:  
Retrieve data from user flash storage.  
Remarks:  
One byte will be returned if a byte count of X'00' is specified.  
In many RS-485 printers, the number of bytes retrieved should be kept  
under 200 to ensure that the system’s receive buffer is not overrun.  
The valid address range for each SureMark depends on the model number  
and which memory option, if any, is installed. Use “Retrieve size of user  
flash storage” on page 162 to determine the valid address range for your  
printer.  
Appendix D. EIA-232 programming information 161  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Updated April 2, 2009  
Retrieve size of user flash storage  
EIA-232 Syntax:  
ESC 4 x ’08 FF FF FF’ or X'1B;34;08;FF;FF;FF'  
Purpose:  
Retrieve the size of the user flash storage in the printer.  
Remarks:  
The size of the user flash storage will be returned in 8 bytes after the  
printer status bytes. The data will be in the form of ASCII decimal data.  
Retrieve printer usage statistics  
EIA-232 Syntax:  
X'1B 51 xx'  
where:  
xx  
Purpose:  
To send printer usage statistics from the printer to the host.  
Remarks:  
The hex value of the requested statistic. See Table 24.  
v The usage statistics are sent over the serial line in status bytes 9 and 10.  
See Table 24 for the values of parameter xx.  
Use this procedure to retrieve printer usage statistics from the printer:  
1. Reset the printer. (This is an optional step. It ensures that the most recent  
counts will be retrieved.)  
EIA-232 Syntax:  
X'10 05 40'  
2. Perform the Retrieve Printer Usage Statistics command.  
3. Multiply the returned value by the factor given in Table 24 to get the actual  
printer statistic.  
Table 24. Retrievable usage data  
Hex Value  
Usage Data Being Tracked  
Factor  
6D  
Runtime monitoring for image brightness; Runtime  
monitoring for image contrast (see Note 3)  
N/A  
6E  
70  
Runtime monitoring for image focus (see Note 3)  
N/A  
N/A  
Manufacture Week Code: ww,yy where 2405 would be the  
24th week of 2005  
80  
FRU Card/Invalid usage numbers (set to X'0164' at the  
factory, not set for FRU logic cards)  
N/A  
81  
82  
Number of paper cuts  
32  
Low byte of the number of characters printed on the CR  
(thermal) station (see Note 1 and 2)  
None  
83  
84  
85  
High byte of the number of characters printed on the CR  
(thermal) station (see Note 1 and 2)  
None  
50 000  
None  
Number of steps performed by the CR paper feed motor  
(200 steps per inch of paper)  
Number of times the customer receipt cover was opened  
(see Note 2)  
162 SureMark Printers User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Updated April 2, 2009  
Table 24. Retrievable usage data (continued)  
Hex Value  
Usage Data Being Tracked  
Factor  
None  
86  
87  
Number of failed paper cuts - single-station printers only  
Number of characters printed at the DI (impact) station -  
thermal/impact printers only (see Note 1)  
1 000  
88  
89  
8A  
Number of steps performed by the DI paper feed motor  
Number of DI transport motor starts  
50 000  
5 000  
None  
Number of home errors - thermal/impact printers only (see  
Note 2)  
8B  
8C  
Number of times the DI cover was opened - thermal/impact  
printers only (see Note 2)  
None  
100  
Number of forms that were inserted into the DI station -  
thermal/impact printers only  
8D  
8E  
8F  
90  
91  
92  
Number of MICR reads - Tx4, Tx8, Tx9  
Number of high-interference MICR reads  
Number of failed MICR reads  
16  
8
8
Number of check flips performed  
Number of check flip failures  
16  
8
Remainder value of CR motor steps (from 0x84) (see Note  
2)  
None  
93  
94  
95  
96  
97  
98  
99  
9A  
9B  
9C  
9D  
9E  
9F  
D2  
Remainder values of paper cuts (from #0x84) (see Note 1  
and 2)  
None  
Remainder values of DI characters printed (from #0x87) (see None  
Note 1 and 2)  
Remainder values of DI paper feed motor steps (from #0x88) None  
(see Note 2)  
Remainder values of forms inserted into DI station (from  
#0x8C) (see Note 2)  
None  
Remainder values of DI transport motor starts (from #0x89)  
(see Note 2)  
None  
Remainder values of check flip failures - Tx4, Tx8, Tx9 (from None  
#0x91) (see Note 2)  
Remainder values of failed MICR reads - Tx4, Tx8, Tx9  
(from #0x8F) (see Note 2)  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
Remainder values of check flips performed - Tx4, Tx8, Tx9  
(from #0x90) (see Note 2)  
Remainder values of MICR reads - Tx4, Tx8, Tx9 (from  
#0x8D) (see Note 2)  
Remainder values of high interference MICR reads - Tx4,  
Tx8, Tx9 (from #0x8E) (see Note 2)  
Remainder values of bar codes printed (from #0xD8) (see  
Note 2)  
Remainder values of scanned documents - Tx8, Tx9 only  
(from #0xD3) (see Note 2)  
Remainder values of cash drawer successful (from #0xD6)  
(see Note 2)  
Number of flash erase commands performed (NVRAM write None  
count) (see Note 2)  
Appendix D. EIA-232 programming information 163  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Updated April 2, 2009  
Table 24. Retrievable usage data (continued)  
Hex Value  
Usage Data Being Tracked  
Factor  
D3  
D4  
Number of checks scanned - Tx8, Tx9 only  
16  
Check Quality Count: the number of times a scanned check None  
fails quality measurement - Tx8, Tx9 only (see Note 2)  
D5  
D6  
D7  
D8  
D9  
Tone Sounded Count: single station printers only  
Cash drawer opened successful count (see Note 2)  
Cash drawer failed to open count (see Note 2)  
Number of Bar Codes printed  
32  
16  
None  
32  
Number of times the maximum temperature of either motors None  
or print heads has been reached (see Note 2)  
DA  
Remainder value of Tone Sounded Count, single station  
printers only (see Note 2)  
None  
Notes:  
1. The number of printed characters is based on the number of dots that were printed,  
assuming 64 dots per character for thermal characters and 16 dots per character for  
impact characters.  
2. Reads from these values will add in the values that have accumulated since the last  
store to FLASH. These values will be added into the "Remainder" MCTs when one exits.  
3. Retrievable usage data, 6D and 6E, are the runtime monitoring variables for the image  
quality produced by the scanner. The variables monitored are Image Brightness (the  
high byte of 0x6D), Image Contrast (the low byte of 0x6D), and Image Focus (the high  
byte of 0x6E). The low byte of 0x6E is reserved for future use; it is set to 0xFF. The  
maximum value is127; they are a running average of the quality of the scanner. On a  
new calibrated scanner, the brightness and contrast values will be ~120 and the focus  
will be ~105. A bad scanner or a scanner in need of calibration would have values of 90  
for brightness and contrast and 77 for focus. If the scanner is recalibrated these values  
will be reset. The offline MICR test will report back if a given scan has values outside of  
normal range.  
Check processing commands (Models TI2, TI4, TI8, TI9, TG4, TG8, and  
TG9 only)  
This printer can process the check entirely without taking it from the printer. It can  
read the magnetic ink character line, frank the back of the check, and flip the check  
to print the face of the check.  
Note: To print the face of the check, select the document station in landscape  
mode as the print station.  
Models TI8 and TI9 MICR read commands  
Note: Model TG8 is equivalent to TI8 and TG9 is equivalent to TI9.  
The Models TI8 and TI9 have two MICR read commands. TheX'1B49' command,  
which is used in the Model TI4 printer and the MICR command X'1B3E01', which  
also scans a check. Both commands use the OCR decoding algorithm for reading  
the MICR line, which is available on these models.  
164 SureMark Printers User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Updated April 2, 2009  
MICR read  
EIA-232 Syntax:  
ESC I or X'1B49'  
Purpose:  
To read account information from the magnetic ink character line on  
customers’ checks.  
Remarks:  
v Checks should be inserted upside-down from the front and against the  
right wall of the printer. The check can be, but does not have to be,  
registered in the printer before this command is given. The check will be  
fed, forward, until the bottom sensor is uncovered, then fed back for the  
MICR reader reading. After the reading is complete, the check is fed to  
the first print position.  
v This command increments the line count (status byte 6).  
v At the completion of this command, information read by the MICR reader  
is sent over the serial I/O following the eighth status byte.  
v The next byte represents a percentage of an average signal level of the  
MICR characters for the E13b check only. (In CMC7, this byte is always  
100.) A nominal signal has a strength of 100.  
v Characters are sent as read from left to right, up to a maximum of 65  
characters.  
v If no magnetic ink characters are detected, a single question mark (X'3F')  
is sent back.  
v If the printer is unable to read any character on its first try, it will feed the  
check forward and backward for a second try. Complete status will then  
be sent to the system - if the character was still not read it will be  
identified by a single question mark (X'3F').  
v Checks with magnetic ink printing within 1.2 inches of the right edge of  
the check are not read correctly. This occurs when the amount field is  
printed on the check.  
Character  
Description  
ASCII Representation  
hex value returned  
MICR data representation  
0–9  
Numerical data  
blank  
Unreadable  
Character  
0–9  
?
30–9  
20  
3F  
E13-B - Special characters  
Dash  
-
2D  
54  
41  
24  
Transit  
On Us  
Amount  
T
A
$
CMC7 - Special characters  
Special character 1  
Special character 2  
a
b
61  
62  
Appendix D. EIA-232 programming information 165  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Updated April 2, 2009  
Character  
Description  
ASCII Representation  
hex value returned  
Special character 3  
c
63  
64  
65  
Special character 4  
Special character 5  
d
e
Error Conditions:  
Document feed error (status byte 7). This bit is set if the inserted check is  
too long. The maximum check length is 10 inches. The error is also set if  
the check does not clear the document sensor when expected.  
Flip check  
EIA-232 Syntax:  
ESC 5 or X'1B35'  
Purpose:  
To flip the check after a MICR read. This will allow the face of the check to  
be printed.  
Remarks:  
v Set print station to document landscape mode to print the face of the  
check as it comes out of the flipper mechanism.  
v This command increments the line count (status byte 6).  
Error Conditions:  
Document feed error (status byte 7). This bit is set if the inserted check is  
too long. The maximum check length is 10 inches. The error is also set if  
the check does not clear the document sensor when expected.  
Document scanner commands  
Scanner commands are supported on SureMark printer Models TI8, TI9, TG8, and  
TG9 only.  
Start scan  
EIA-232 syntax:  
X'1B;3E;n'  
where:  
n = 00 optical scan only, document is ejected  
n = 01 scan and MICR/OCR read  
n = 02 optical scan and re-read document (Models TI9/TG9 only)  
n = 03 scan, MICR/OCR read, and prepare for flip (start the check into the  
flipper)  
n = 04 partial scan, MICR/OCR, and prepare for flip (start the check into  
the flipper)  
Remarks:  
v Pulls in document present at scanner input.  
166 SureMark Printers User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Updated April 2, 2009  
v Document image is retained in RAM until another scan command is  
received, or the printer is reset.  
v Set the dots per inch (DPI) and file compression type prior to scanning.  
The printer begins to compress immediately after scanning. There,  
changing the compression type after scanning would make the check  
process take much longer as it now has to compress twice if the  
compression type changes.  
v Successful read returns status with status byte 05, bit 06 set, and a  
2-byte image width, and a 2-byte image height and 2-byte image width  
(in hundredths of an inch) follows the status.  
v When using the X'01', X'03', or X'04'option, the MICR data is returned  
after the successful scan status, and matches the format in the MICR  
command section.  
v If the scan is not successful, the Document feed error bit is returned  
(status byte 7, bit 7).  
v When using the X'03' or X'04'option, the check will only start into the  
flipper for personal check (~6 in.). Otherwise, it will function the same as  
X'01'. With the check partially in the flipper mechanism, the printer can  
print in the portrait station or flip the document. If any other command is  
received at this point, the document must come fully out of the flip  
mechanism and be re-readied.  
v Image Quality detection will be run on the quality of the image scanned  
and if the image "fails" the Image Quality test an error bit will be set in  
the header information of the retrieved image.  
v When only a partial image or no image is required, the X'04' command  
will take less time than the X'01' or X'03' options.  
TI8/TG8 printer  
v X'00' and X'02' options: scans the full document and ejects the document  
out the top.  
v X'01', X'03', and X'04' options: the bottom 1.5 in. of the document is not  
captured in the scanned image.  
v X'03' and X'04' options: the document is less than 6.5 in.; it is fed into  
the flipper while reading the MICR line.  
TI9/TG9 printer  
v X'00' option: scans the full document and ejects the document out the  
top.  
v X'01' option: scans the entire document, reads MICR and re-readies the  
document.  
v X'02' option: scans the check and re-readies the document.  
v X'03' option: scans the entire document and if the document is less than  
6.5 in., it is fed into the flipper while reading MICR line.  
v X'04' option: scans a partial document (bottom 1.5 in. not scanned) and if  
the document is less than 6.5 in., it is fed into the flipper while reading  
the MICR line.  
Check 21 flow - with the TI9  
Assume that the check must be fully filled out and both the front and back  
of the check imaged. Assume the printer prints the check face information.  
1. Customer gives signs the check and gives it to the cashier.  
2. Cashier is prompted to insert the check to be imaged.  
3. The check is inserted face down. The MICR is read with '1B, 3E, 04.'  
Appendix D. EIA-232 programming information 167  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Updated April 2, 2009  
4. The transaction information (MIRC, amount, and so on) is sent to the  
host for approval. The rest of flow is based on successful approval.  
5. Back of the check is franked.  
6. Flip and scan the back of the check. Select landscape print station,  
flip, and scan. (1B 63 30 08 1B 35 1B 3E 02)  
7. An image of the check back is read and stored.  
8. The face of the check is printed.  
9. Flip and scan the front of the check (1B 35 1B 3E 03).  
10. An image of the check face is read and stored.  
11. Flip the check. ( 1B 35)  
12. Print the face of check with void and eject. (VOIDx"0c")  
Assume that the customer fills out the check.  
1. Customer fills out and signs the check and gives it to the cashier.  
2. Cashier is prompted to insert the check to be imaged.  
3. Check is inserted, face down. Check is scanned and MICR is read with  
the option (1B, 3E 03).  
4. Transaction information (MICR, amount, and so on) is sent to the host  
for approval. The remaining flow is based on successful approval.  
5. Image of the check face is read and stored.  
6. Check is franked.  
7. Flip and scan the back of the check. Select landscape print station, flip,  
and scan. (1B 63 30 08 1B 35 1B 3E 02)  
8. Image of the check back is read and stored.  
9. Check is printed on the face of the check with void and ejected.  
(VOIDx"0c")  
Print scanned image  
EIA-232 syntax:  
X'1B;30;n1;x;y;dx;dy;s1;s2;n2'  
where:  
n1  
2 bytes, reserved, X'00 00'  
x,y  
2 bytes each, top-left corner of area to be printed  
dx, dy 2 bytes each, offset in the x and y direction respectively, to be  
included in the print area  
s1  
s2  
n2  
1 byte, percentage to scale image in the x direction (A value of 100  
or 0 results in no scaling.)  
1 byte, percentage to scale image in the y direction (A value of 100  
or 0 results in no scaling.)  
print options, bit 0; value 0 = do not rotate, value 1 = rotate 90  
degrees counterclockwise  
168 SureMark Printers User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Updated April 2, 2009  
(x,y)  
(dx)  
+
(dy)  
Figure 51. Scanned image layout  
Remarks  
Image location (n1) of 0 prints the most recently scanned image to the  
thermal station.  
The top-left corner of the scanned document is used as the point of  
reference. All x, dx, y, and dy, values are based on 0.01 inch. The paper  
movement path is the y axis, and the scan head dot row is the x axis.  
In all cases, dx and dy define the area’s width to the right, and height down.  
If dx and dy extend the printer area further than the boundaries of the  
image, the value is truncated to the image boundary. If the size of the print  
area is greater than the thermal print head can print (either from image size  
or scaling), the image is truncated to the width of the print head. The only  
scaling options are 100% (no scaling) and 200% (double). Tag data  
included with the image is not printed.  
If the image is stored in JPEG format, then graphics printing is not  
supported.  
Store scanned image and/or select partial image for retrieval  
EIA-232 syntax:  
X'1B;41;n1;x0;y0;dx0;dy0;x1;y1;dx1;dy1;x2;y2;dx2;dy2;x3;y3;dx3;  
dy3;tagdata'  
where:  
n1 Select storage method, one byte  
v X'00' store entire image  
v X'01' store image using template 1  
v X'02' store image using template 2  
v X'03' store image using user defined values  
v X'11' Compress a section and keep in RAM using user defined  
values (x0, y0, dx0, dy0)  
x0, y0 2 bytes each, top-left corner of area to be stored  
dx0, dy0  
2 bytes each, offset in the x and y direction respectively, to be  
stored  
x1, x2, x3, y1, y2, y3  
2 bytes each, corresponding offset in the x and y direction to define  
size of subblock to store  
tagdata  
ASCII string terminated by null character, maximum 100 characters  
Appendix D. EIA-232 programming information 169  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Updated April 2, 2009  
(0,0)  
(x0,y0)  
(dx0)  
(dx1)  
+
(x1,y1)  
(dy1)  
(dx2)  
(x2,y2)  
Scanned Document  
(dy2)  
(dx3)  
(x3,y3)  
(dy3)  
(dy0)  
Figure 52. Scanned image organization  
Remarks:  
Images are stored sequentially. The locations where the images are stored  
are obtained with a Retrieve next table location command before issuing  
the store command. The image is compressed using the compression  
algorithm last selected by the Select compression format command, and is  
then stored in memory.  
When storing an image, the user can elect to store the entire image within  
the defined area, or just selected blocks within the defined area. Saving  
selected blocks reduces storage use, but keeps related data together.  
When storing multiple blocks of data, each block gets a unique storage  
location. A byte in the header message indicates that the block is part of a  
group. The first half-byte indicates which block of the group it is, the second  
half-byte indicates the number of blocks in the group. If the byte returned is  
X'14', then the block is the first of a group of four. All blocks contain header  
information, but only the first block in a group contains tag data.  
The Select storage method byte (n1) defines how the image should be  
stored.  
When n1 = 0, all data defined y x0, y0, dx0, dy0 is stored. The command  
parameters, x1, x2, x3, y1, y2, y3, dx1, dx2, dx3, and dy1, dy2, dy3 should  
not be included.  
When n1 = 1, a predefined template, based on a personal check is used to  
store the image. The area defined is the entire personal check, however the  
name/address and the MICR blocks are saved. The command parameters,  
x0, x1, x2, x3, y0, y1, y2, y3, dx0, dx1, dx2, dx3, and dy0, dy1, dy2, dy3  
170 SureMark Printers User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Updated April 2, 2009  
should not be included. These parameters are defined in MCT locations  
X'0xB0' through X'0xBF' and can be viewed or adjusted using the MCT  
Read and MCT Write commands. If fewer than four blocks are required, a  
block can be disabled by storing a value of X'FFFF' for a coordinate MCT  
location. The block is then ignored.  
When n1 = 2, a predefined template, based on a business check is used to  
store the image. The area defined is the entire business check, however  
only the name/address, and MICR blocks are saved. The command  
parameters, x0, x1, x2, x3, y0, y1, y2, y3, dx0, dx1, dx2, dx3, and dy0, dy1,  
dy2, dy3 should not be included. These parameters are defined in MCT  
locations X'0xC0' through X'0xCF' and can be viewed or adjusted using the  
MCT Read and MCT Write commands. If fewer than four blocks are  
required, a block can be disabled by storing a value of X'FFFF' to a  
coordinate MCT location. The block is then ignored.  
When n1 = 3, this method allows the user to define subblocks of data to  
store. All command parameters must be sent. If fewer than four blocks of  
data are to be saved, the value of X'FFFF' must be sent for unused  
parameters. The top-left corner of the scanned document is used as the  
point of reference. All xn, dxn, yn, and dyn values are based on 0.01 inch.  
The xn command parameters are horizontal offsets from the left side of the  
scanned document. The yn parameters are vertical offsets from the top of  
the scanned document. The dxn and dyn parameters define the width and  
height, respectively, of the defined area or block.  
When n1=0x11, this command allows the user to obtain a partially scanned  
image without having to spend time storing it into Flash. Since the  
command does not destroy the original scanned image, successive  
commands using n1 of 0x11 is possible. Executing this command will  
compress a partial image of the check using the user defined values  
defined in x0, y0, dx0, dx1. The new image will be stored in RAM location  
0. Though the command does not technically store the image into flash,  
upon compressing the partial image check, Bit 7 of Status byte 3 will be set  
to true to comply with the existing Store Scanned Image commands.  
The printer attempts to determine the width and height of the document,  
and returns the value when the document is scanned. If the value of xn  
plus dxn is greater than the total width scanned by the printer, the printer  
uses the data detected up to the maximum scan width. If the value of yn  
plus dyn is greater than the length of the document, the printer uses blank  
(white) data to fill the area to the lesser of the yn+dyn value, or maximum  
document length allowed.  
If yn or xn is greater than the maximum allowed, the command is rejected.  
If x1 and y2 extend the printer area beyond the boundaries of the image,  
the values are truncated to the image boundary.  
Errors:  
Status byte 3 is set:  
v When the image to be stored is larger than the remaining unused  
memory for the image boundary.  
v
If an error occurs during the flash write (hardware error).  
Example 1:  
Method 0: X'1B 41 00 00 19 00 32 01 13 02 26 30 33 2F 30 34 2F 30 32  
20 30 30 31 2E 33 34 00'  
Appendix D. EIA-232 programming information 171  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Updated April 2, 2009  
An image 2.75 in. by 5.5 in. that begins 0.25 in. from the left side, and 0.5  
in. from the top of the document is stored with the tag data: 03/04/02  
001.34  
Example 2:  
Method 3: X'1B 41 03 00 AF 01 DB 00 28 00 64 00 B4 00 64 00 64 00 96  
00 96 00 64 00 19 01 13 FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF 00'  
Three separate areas are stored. No tag data is included. Table 25 provides  
details.  
Table 25. Data table  
Document width = 3 in.  
x0 = 1.75 in.  
Document height = 6 in.  
y0 = 4.25 in.  
dx0 = 0.40 in.  
dy0 = 1.0 in.  
x1 = 1.80 in.  
y1 = 1.0 in.  
dx1 = 1.0 in.  
dy1 = 1.50 in.  
x2 = 1.50 in.  
y2 = 1.0 in.  
dx2 = 0.25 in.  
dy2 = 2.75 in  
x3 = not applicable  
dx3 = not applicable  
y3 = not applicable  
dy3 = not applicable  
Tag data, stored with the image, allows the user to include additional  
information about the image. It must be an ASCII string, terminated by a  
null character.  
Example 3:  
Method 0x11-Compress partial check image defined by user: X'1B 41 11 00  
00 00 00 00 64 00 C8 00'  
Retrieve the image using Retrieve Scanning Image command X'1B 39 00  
00'  
Method 0x11-Compress another part of the check image: X'1B 41 11 00 64  
00 C8 00 64 00 C8 00'  
Retrieve the image using Retrieve Scanning Image command X'1B 39 00  
00'  
Retrieve scanned image  
EIA-232 syntax:  
X'1B;39;n1;n2;n3'  
where:  
v n1, 2 bytes, Image location to retrieve  
v n2, 4 bytes, Offset into image from which to retrieve data  
v n3, 2 bytes, Number of bytes to retrieve  
Remarks:  
Image location (n1) of 0 returns the image last scanned. To return just a  
part of the image from RAM, compress the partial image using Store  
Scanned Image and/or select partial image for retrieval first. Offset (n2) and  
size (n3) of 0 retrieve the header information for the specified image. When  
n1 = 0, the header consists of the 12 data bytes and a null character for the  
172 SureMark Printers User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Updated April 2, 2009  
tag data. In this case, only the Compression, Size1, and Size2 fields  
contain data. The header has the following format:  
v Status; 1 byte  
– Bit 7, Image read; 1 = image has been read, 0 = image has not been  
read  
– Bit 6, 1= IQD (Image Quality Detection) Error  
– Bits 5–0; Reserved  
v Compression; 1 byte  
– Bits 7–5; Reserved  
– Bits 4–0; Algorithm used to compress image. See “Select  
compression format and scanned image threshold” on page 174  
command  
v Size1; 4 bytes  
– Number of bytes in image, not including tag data.  
v Size2; 4 bytes (x1, y1)  
– Width of image in the x direction (in hundredths of inch increments), 2  
bytes  
Note: Scanner resolution is 200 dots per inch.  
– Height of image in the y direction (in hundredths of inch increments),  
2 bytes  
v Block position; 1 byte  
– Lower four bits indicate the number of blocks that were saved for the  
image.  
– Upper four bits represent the current block number.  
v Future; 1 byte  
– Reserved  
v Tag data  
– ASCII data supplied by the application, terminated by a null string.  
Offset (n2) = X'FF FF FF FF' with size (n3) = X'FF FF'sets to 0 the Image  
Read bit in the specified image header.  
For stored images (n1>0), the image data format is the format that was  
active when the image was stored.  
For immediate images (n1=0), the image data format is the currently  
selected format.  
Error conditions:  
If any parameter is out of range, Command Reject is returned.  
Scanner calibration  
EIA-232 syntax:  
GS c 0 or X'1D 63 30'  
Purpose:  
Used to initiate the calibration routine for the scanner. The printer scans the  
document multiple times and updates the printer’s calibration data. See  
“Document scanner calibration (Models TI8, TI9, TG8, TG9)” on page 60 for  
more information about the document to be used.  
Appendix D. EIA-232 programming information 173  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Updated April 2, 2009  
Retrieve next image location  
EIA-232 syntax:  
GS N SOH NULL or X'1D 4E 01 00'  
Remarks:  
Returns the table position where the next image is stored. Command is  
Extend MCT Request command (2-byte address). Status byte 5, bit 3 is set  
to indicate data is attached.  
Retrieve first unread image location  
EIA-232 syntax:  
GS N SOH SOH or X'1D 4E 01 01'  
Remarks:  
Stored images are searched sequentially, and the first location that has not  
been set to ″read″ is returned. The command is Extend MCT Request  
(2-byte address). Status byte 5, bit 3 is set to indicate data is attached.  
Select compression format and scanned image threshold  
EIA-232 syntax:  
X'1B;4d;x;n1;n2'  
where:  
v x = X'1F'  
– address to store data  
v n1  
– 00 200 DPI TIFF-CCITT-Group 4 compression  
– 01 200 DPI JPEG compression  
– 02 200 DPI BMP (uncompressed)  
– 04 200 DPI TIFF file, no compression (gray scale)  
– 10 100 DPI TIFF-CCITT compression (black and white)  
– 11 100 DPI JPEG compression (gray scale)  
– 12 100 DPI BMP (uncompressed gray scale)  
– 14 100 DPI TIFF File (no compression)  
v n2  
– Lightens or darkens the contrast of a scanned image. Higher numbers  
print darker.  
Remarks:  
The current format applies to retrieval and storage of the currently scanned  
image. Changing the format does not change the format of any images  
already stored in flash. The setting is persistent across reset and power  
cycles.  
Table 26. Average size for a personal check with little background data  
Compression type  
Size  
00 - TIFF-CCITT compression - 200 DPI  
01 - JPEG compression - 200 DPI  
02, 04 - no compression - 200 DPI  
10 - TIFF-CCITT - 100 DPI  
5K Bytes  
45K Bytes  
660K Bytes  
3.5K Bytes  
174 SureMark Printers User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Updated April 2, 2009  
Table 26. Average size for a personal check with little background data (continued)  
Compression type  
Size  
11 - JPEG compression - 100 DPI  
12, 14 no compression 100 DPI  
15K Bytes  
170K Bytes  
Asynchronous (real-time) commands  
These commands are processed as soon as they are received. They do not go into  
the printer buffer.  
Note: These commands are not recognized when they occur in the middle of  
another command. For example, sending this command after the second  
byte of a 3-byte command, as in ESC J n.  
Real-time requests  
EIA-232 Syntax:  
DLE ENQ m or X'1005:n'  
where:  
m
n
Specifies the ASCII command character  
Specifies the hexadecimal command character  
m
n
Description  
1
31  
Release the print buffer for printing. This should be sent  
after an error has occurred and the print buffer is held. If  
an error occurred during the transaction that was being  
held, the printer sends back the line number with the error  
and the error status. The system can then decide to cancel  
or continue printing after the error is corrected. The system  
uses this command to continue printing after the error is  
corrected.  
2
32  
Cancel print buffer. This clears the print buffer of all data.  
In EIA-232 mode, the user must wait for buffer empty  
status (status byte 2, bit 6) before sending any more  
commands.  
Note: A status message is returned immediately after  
execution of this command.  
3
4
33  
34  
Undefined.  
EC request - transmit printer status. Sends the printer’s  
status to the system. This command does not go into the  
printer’s data buffer but is processed immediately.  
The printer status is returned in status bytes 1–8. See  
“Status summary” on page 184 for more information.  
Status byte 5, bit 1, will be set after the EC request has  
been executed.  
5-8  
@
35-38  
40  
Undefined  
Reset the printer. The printer stops what it is doing and  
goes through its reset routine. The print buffer is canceled  
and all commands erased. All printer settings go back to  
default values.  
Appendix D. EIA-232 programming information 175  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Updated April 2, 2009  
m
n
Description  
A
41  
Enable unsolicited status.  
Note: A status message is returned immediately after  
execution of this command. To enable these status  
messages, the Status Sent to System setup command  
must be enabled. See “Status sent to system” on page  
141.  
B
C
42  
43  
Disable unsolicited status  
Disable transparent XON/XOFF  
Purpose:  
To process a command immediately.  
Remarks:  
Either the Release print buffer or the Cancel print buffer command must be  
used in these situations:  
v When recovering from a cash receipt print error  
v After clearing an unrecoverable home error  
After the printer resets, it defaults to not sending status unless requested. If  
an error occurs, the printer appears hung, unless a status is requested. If  
unsolicited status is enabled, the printer sends the error to the system as  
soon as it occurs.  
Note: If transparent XON/OFF is disabled, X'10', X'11', and X'13' can be  
imbedded in returned status and data. (See “XON/XOFF control” on  
page 29.) To re-enable the printer, the printer must be reset.  
Data buffer management and batch printing  
Reset line count  
EIA-232 Syntax:  
ESC 6 or X'1B36'  
Purpose:  
Resetting the line count lets the system track the print line where an error  
occurs.  
Remarks:  
The line count is incremented at every print command. The count is sent in  
every status message to the system. The count can go to 256 (X'FF'), when  
it rolls back to 0. (See “Print character commands” on page 156.)  
Disable line count  
EIA-232 Syntax:  
ESC 8 n or X'1B;38'n  
where  
v n = 1, disable line count  
v n = 0, enable line count  
Purpose:  
To temporarily not increment the line count. This can be used when printing  
predefined messages, if the number of lines embedded in the message is  
unknown.  
176 SureMark Printers User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Updated April 2, 2009  
Hold printing until buffer is released  
EIA-232 Syntax:  
ESC 7 or X'1B37'  
Purpose:  
If the system can not send data to the printer at a speed needed to keep  
the printer in constant motion, it can hold the printer queue until it sends all  
data lines for a transaction.  
Remarks:  
The printer must be printing one line while processing the next line. If the  
printer is unable to completely process a line, the print speed reduces to  
half.  
The line count is reset when the buffer is held.  
Page mode printing commands  
Note: Not supported on the TI1 and TI2.  
Select page mode  
EIA-232 Syntax:  
ESC L or X'1B;4C'  
Remarks:  
v Enables page mode printing.  
v Supported on thermal station only.  
v Starting position is set by Set printable area X'1B;57..' and Set print  
direction X'1B;54..' commands.  
v Intercharacter spacing X'1B;20;n' and line spacing X'1B;31', X'1B;32',  
X'1B;33' commands are set independently for page mode and standard  
mode.  
v The following commands are allowed:  
– Rotate characters  
– Set alignment  
– Set/Clear upside-down  
– Set margins  
Select standard mode  
EIA-232 Syntax:  
ESC O or X'1B;4f'  
Epson emulation syntax:  
ESC S or X'1B;53'  
Remarks:  
v This command is effective in page mode only.  
v Data buffered in page mode is cleared.  
v This command sets the print position to the beginning of the line.  
Appendix D. EIA-232 programming information 177  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Updated April 2, 2009  
Select printable area  
EIA-232 Syntax:  
ESC X or X'1B;58;x;y;dx;dy'  
where:  
v x, y  
– Two-byte horizontal and vertical starting position (in dots)  
v dx, dy  
– Two-byte horizontal and vertical printing area (in dots)  
Remarks:  
v When sent in standard mode, this command sets the printable area for  
page mode, but has no effect on standard mode printing.  
v If the starting position (x, y) is outside the maximum range, the entire  
command is ignored.  
v If the printing area is defined outside the maximum page size, the  
printing area is limited to the page size.  
v Maximum page size is 576 dots in the horizontal direction, and 800 dots  
in the vertical direction (except Models Tx8 and Tx9, which is 1250 dots  
in the vertical direction).  
Select printing direction/position  
EIA-232 Syntax:  
ESC T n or X'1B;54;n'  
where:  
n
Table 27. Print direction  
n =  
Direction / position  
X'00'  
X'01'  
X'02'  
X'03'  
Left to right / top left  
Bottom to top / bottom left  
Right to left / bottom right  
Top to bottom / top right  
Remarks:  
When sent in standard mode, this command sets the print direction for  
page mode, but has no effect on standard mode printing.  
Starting position is within the printable area defined by the Select printable  
area command (X'1B;58...)'.  
Set vertical position  
EIA-232 Syntax:  
GS $ y or X'1D;24;y'  
where:  
y is a two-byte vertical printing position (in dots)  
Remarks:  
v Applies to page mode only.  
178 SureMark Printers User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Updated April 2, 2009  
v Moves the printing position to the specified dot position perpendicular to  
the printing direction specified by the Select printing direction command.  
If printing direction is bottom-to-top, or top-to-bottom, this command  
adjusts the printing position in the horizontal direction.  
v If the value of y is outside the specified printable area, this command is  
ignored.  
Set relative vertical position  
EIA-232 Syntax:  
GS \ y or X'1D;5C;y'  
where:  
y is the two-byte vertical printing position (in dots).  
Remarks:  
v Applies to page mode only.  
v Moves the printing position the specified number of dots from the current  
print position, in the direction perpendicular to the printing direction  
specified by the Select printing direction/position command (X'1B;54...'). If  
the print direction is bottom-to-top, or top-to-bottom, this command  
adjusts the printing position in the horizontal direction.  
v If the value of y is outside the specified printable area defined by the  
Select printable area command, this command is ignored.  
v If y is a negative value, the current print position will move in the  
opposite direction.  
Set left margin position (standard mode), set absolute print position  
(page mode)  
EIA-232 Syntax:  
ESC $ n1 n2 or X'1B;24;n1;n2'  
where:  
v n1 is the high-order byte of the dot offset from the beginning of the print  
line.  
v n2 is the low-order byte of the dot offset from the beginning of the print  
line.  
Default:  
n1 = 0, n2 = 0  
Remarks:  
v In the thermal station, 1 mm = 8 dots.  
v In the impact station, 1 inch = 150 half-dots (75 dots).  
v n1 and n2 are hex values. Convert each to decimal, and use this formula  
to get the decimal equivalent: (n1 x 256) + n2.  
v The maximum value in the thermal CR station is 576. The maximum  
value in the impact DI station is 474.  
v In the CR station, this number is rounded back to a factor of 8.  
v If the n1,n2 value exceeds the maximum, it is ignored.  
v This command should be sent only after the command that selects the  
station, Set print station (ESC c1 n).  
v In Page mode, the printing position is moved the specified number of  
dots from the beginning of the print line, in the same direction as printing,  
Appendix D. EIA-232 programming information 179  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Updated April 2, 2009  
specified by the Select printing direction/position command (X'1B;54...'). If  
the print position is bottom-to-top, or top-to-bottom, this command adjusts  
the print position in the vertical direction.  
v This is a one-time adjustment on the current line. If this command moves  
the print position outside the printable area specified by the Select  
printable area command, it is ignored.  
Set relative horizontal position  
EIA-232 Syntax:  
ESC <5C>h n1 n2 or X'1B;5C;n1;n2'  
where:  
v n1 is the high-order byte of the dot offset, relative to the left margin in  
standard mode or the current print position in page mode.  
v n2 is the low-order byte of the dot offset, relative to the left margin in  
standard mode or the current print position in page mode.  
default:  
n1 = 0, n2 = 0  
Remarks:  
v In the thermal station, 1 mm = 8 dots.  
v In the impact station, 1 inch = 150 half-dots (75 dots).  
v n1 and n2 are hex values. To get the decimal equivalent, convert each to  
decimal, and then use this formula: (n1 x 256) + n2..  
v To move the position to the left, use a negative number.  
v If this number plus the left margin exceeds the printable area, the  
command is ignored.  
v In the CR station, this number is rounded back to factor of 8. See the Set  
left margin position command for more information.  
v When printing in page mode, this is a one-time adjustment on the current  
line. If this command moves the current print position outside the  
printable area defined by the Select printable area command, the  
command is ignored.  
Set printing position  
EIA-232 Syntax:  
GS ] x y or X'1D;5D;x;y'  
where:  
v x is the two-byte horizontal position, with respect to the paper, regardless  
of printing direction.  
v y is the two-byte vertical position, with respect to the paper, regardless of  
printing direction.  
Remarks:  
v This command allows complete control of the printing position with a  
single command.  
v If either parameter is outside the printable area defined by the Select  
printable area command, the command is ignored.  
180 SureMark Printers User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Updated April 2, 2009  
Print and form feed and cut the paper  
EIA-232 Syntax:  
FF or X'0C'  
Epson compatibility syntax:  
FF or X'0C'  
Remarks:  
v In standard mode, the data in the print buffer feeds the paper in the CR  
station or DI station by a preset amount, until the document exits the  
feed rollers. If a cutter is available (CR station only), it cuts the paper.  
v In page mode, the printer prints the page, then returns to standard mode.  
The page loaded in the printer’s buffer is cleared. The paper is not cut.  
Print page in page mode  
EIA-232 Syntax:  
ESC FF or X'1B 0C'  
Epson compatibility mode:  
ESC FF or X'1B 0C'  
Remarks:  
v In standard mode, this command is ignored.  
v In page mode, this command prints the page that is loaded in the printer.  
The page remains loaded in the printer’s buffer and the printer remains in  
page mode. This should be used for repeatedly printing the same page,  
or if there is a template that is filled in with each printout.  
Clear print data in page mode  
EIA-232 Syntax:  
CAN or X'18'  
Remarks:  
This command deletes all print data in the current printable area of the  
page stored in the printer’s buffer.  
Document handling  
To read checks, insert them from the front of the printer. Use the side load  
capability only for documents that must be positioned to begin printing at a  
particular location on the document. (There is an arrow on the side of the cover to  
indicate where printing begins.) Use front load for all other cases.  
Portrait mode  
This is a suggested method of document handling:  
1. ESC f (x) (y): Set up document wait time  
x
Time the printer should wait from receiving a print line for the  
document station until the document is inserted.  
If the document has not been detected by the time the wait time  
ends, a document error is sent to the system but the system  
continues to wait for a document to be inserted.  
Appendix D. EIA-232 programming information 181  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Updated April 2, 2009  
y
Delay from the time the document is detected until it is grabbed by  
the printer (the start of document printing):  
v Side insertion - closes the document throat.  
v Front insertion - pulls the document into the printer and feeds it  
to the Top of Form.  
2. ESC c 0 X'04': Select document station - normal print mode:  
The document present indicator blinks until a document is detected, when it  
stays on continuously.  
v If the document is inserted from the front, it is fed to the first print  
position after the document wait time. Then commands in the printer  
buffer begin executing.  
v If the document is inserted from the side, printing starts at the location  
where it was inserted.  
(The document throat must be open to insert the document from the  
side.) Manually, open the throat by pressing and then releasing both  
buttons. You can also open it with these commands - ESC q or ESC <  
X'01'.  
If a document is not detected within the wait time (specified in the ESC f  
command), the printer sends error status to the system, and continues to  
wait.  
Notes:  
1. The system can either cancel the print buffer, thereby deleting all  
data in the print buffer, or wait for a document to be inserted.  
2. Models TI9/TG9 do not support side insertion. Alignment to a  
particular line can be done using the buttons and the reverse line  
feed command.  
The printer appears to be hung until an action is taken.  
3. Send print lines to be printed in this station.  
4. Final handling.  
You have an option on final handling, finish printing and either eject the  
document or open the document throat to allow manual removal of the  
document:  
FF: Print and Eject Document.  
Finish printing and eject the document.  
Landscape mode  
Landscape mode printing is primarily for printing the face of a check.  
Notes on landscape printing:  
v Lines you send to print start at the bottom of the form, against the right stop, and  
continue to the top of the form, to a maximum of 80 mm from the bottom of the  
form. This is because the bottom of the form is known (against the right stop)  
and the top of the form is unknown to the printer.  
v Different lengths of paper allow different print-line lengths. Therefore, the  
application must know the size of the print line.  
v The printer calculates the length of a document it is to print. To do that, it must  
feed the document up past the bottom sensor and back to the top sensor. (On a  
5-inch document this takes 2 seconds.) If a MICR read was done previously, the  
length was calculated at that time.  
182 SureMark Printers User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Updated April 2, 2009  
v When landscape mode is used without the check flipper, the document should be  
inserted so that the right edge is at the top of the printer, and the bottom edge is  
against the printer’s right wall.  
v To position the printing in landscape mode to the correct position, the system  
must send line feeds. The printer assumes that the top of form for a document in  
landscape mode is the far left edge of the document (to a maximum of 80 mm  
from the bottom of the form).  
v Line feeding is 5 steps per mm or 21 steps per line, at 6 lpi.  
v All landscape printing must be done with one printing pass. Therefore:  
– Double-high printing is not allowed.  
– User-defined characters greater than 9 dots high are not allowed.  
v There is no error recovery for landscape printing.  
v Set print station to document landscape mode to print the face of the check as it  
comes out of the flipper machanism.  
Landscape printing commands  
1. ESC f (x) (y): Set up document wait time  
Same as for portrait mode.  
2. ESC c 0 X'08': Select document station - landscape print mode:  
A
If the document was not previously loaded:  
v The document present indicator blinks until a document is  
detected.  
v Once detected, the document will be grabbed by the printer and  
fed to the right margin on the document. Because the document  
is inserted on its side, this is at the top of the printer.  
v If a document is not detected within the wait time (specified in  
the ESC f command), the printer sends error status to the  
system, and continues to wait.  
The system can either cancel the print buffer, deleting all data in  
the print buffer, or wait for a document to be inserted.  
The printer appears to be hung until an action is taken.  
B
If the document was previously loaded, the printer feeds the paper  
to the right margin on the document.  
3. Send print lines to be printed in this station.  
The number of characters that can be printed on a line depends on the  
width of the document. The print area is:  
v 63 mm high, starting 17 mm from the bottom of the document  
v The entire width of the document less 34 mm from the right edge and 10  
mm from the left edge  
4. Final handling.  
You have an option on final handling, finish printing and either eject the  
document or open the document throat to allow manual removal of the  
document:  
4a. FF: Print and Eject Document.  
Finish printing and eject the document.  
4b. ESC q or ESC < X'01': Open Document Throat  
Finish printing and release the document from the printer’s rollers.  
Appendix D. EIA-232 programming information 183  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Updated April 2, 2009  
Note: The document station stays selected. The printer will wait for  
another document until the station is changed.  
Status summary  
Status is sent to the system for:  
v Cash receipt print error. The cover is open or out of paper.  
v Printer buffer empty. If enabled, see “Status sent to system” on page 141.  
v Document sensor state changed. If enabled, see “Status sent to system” on page  
141.  
v Cash drawer sensor change. If enabled, see “Status sent to system” on page  
141.  
v Command has timed out. The printer is waiting for additional bytes to complete  
the command.  
v Nonrecoverable home error.  
v Document not inserted after document station was selected.  
v Document has exited sensor before document print is finished.  
v Flash EPROM load error.  
v Memory sector is full.  
v Flash Storage is full.  
v Printer ID request (extended address command).  
v MICR read command.  
v MCT read command.  
v Flash read command.  
v Print buffer being held.  
v Ribbon cover sensor change.  
v Document feed error.  
Message from the printer  
A message from the printer has this format:  
Bytes Contents  
1 - 2 Data count (X'000A' to X'00FF'). The data count includes the two data-count  
bytes.  
3 - 10 Status bytes 1-8. See the descriptions of each byte in the sections that  
follow.  
11 - n Either 5 bytes of additional status from the “Extended address  
command-request printer ID” on page 112 command, or up to 246 bytes of  
user data that can include:  
v MICR data  
v User flash data  
v MCT data  
Status byte 1  
Bit  
Description  
0 (LSB)  
Command complete (immediate command and flash storage commands). Set  
to 1 when the command is complete, except for “Erase flash EPROM sector”  
on page 123, for which it is set to 1 when the command is sent. (See bit 7 of  
“Status byte 3” on page 185.)  
1
2
Cash receipt right home position. Set to 1 when the print head is in the  
customer receipt right home position.  
Left home position Set to 1 when the print head is in the left home position.  
184 SureMark Printers User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Updated April 2, 2009  
Bit  
Description  
3
Document right home position. Set to 1 when the print head is in the document  
right home position.  
4
5
6
Reserved. Always 0.  
Ribbon cover open. Set to 1 when the ribbon cover is open.  
Cash receipt print error. Paper cover is open, the customer receipt station is  
out of paper, or the cutter is jammed in the closed position.  
7 (MSB)  
Command reject.  
Status byte 2  
Bit  
Description  
0 (LSB)  
Document ready. Set to 0 when the document insert station is ready for  
printing. This occurs when both document sensors detect the document and the  
document has been fed to the first print position.  
1
2
Document present under the front sensor. Set to 0 when a document is under  
the front document sensor.  
Document present under the top sensor. Set to 0 when a document is under  
the top document sensor.  
3
4
Reserved. Always equals 1.  
Print buffer held. Set to 1 when the print buffer is being held. Cleared when  
buffer released.  
5
Open throat position. Set to 1 when the print head is in the open throat  
position.  
6
Buffer empty. Set to 1 when no print data and no commands are in the buffer.  
Buffer Full. Set when only 1K bytes are available in the buffer.  
7 (MSB)  
Status byte 3  
Bit  
Description  
0 (LSB)  
Memory sector is full.  
Home error.  
1
2
Document error. The document was not inserted after the document station was  
selected, and the wait subsequently timed out.  
3
4
5
6
Flash EPROM load error or MCT load error.  
Reserved. Always equals 0.  
User flash storage sector is full.  
Firmware error. CRC on the firmware failed. The printer is running out of the  
boot sector. Only system commands and firmware commands are accepted.  
7 (MSB)  
Command complete (“Erase flash EPROM sector” on page 123, “Flip check” on  
page 166, and whenever a physical line is printed). Set to 1 when the  
command is complete or a physical line is printed.  
Status byte 4  
Contains the printer engineering code (EC) level with all status messages.  
Appendix D. EIA-232 programming information 185  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Updated April 2, 2009  
Status byte 5  
Bit  
Description  
0 (LSB)  
Printer ID Request/Extended Address command. Set to 1 when responding to a  
Printer ID request.  
1
EC Level. Set to 1 when responding to an EC level request.  
MICR Read. Set to 1 when responding to a MICR read command.  
MCT Read. Set to 1 when responding to an MCT read command.  
User flash read. Set to 1 when responding to a flash read command.  
Reserved. Defaults to 1.  
2
3
4
5
6
Scan Complete. Set to 1 when scan completed successfully.  
Set to 1 when responding to a ″Retrieve scanned image″ command.  
7 (MSB)  
Status byte 6  
Status byte 7  
Contains the current line count.  
Bit  
Description  
0 (LSB)  
Reserved.  
1
Reserved  
2
Reserved  
3
Cash drawer status (0 if cash drawer status (port pin 3) at ground.  
Print key pressed (1 = pressed).  
4
5
Reserved. Defaults to 1.  
6
Station selected. Set to 1 when document insert station is selected.  
7 (MSB)  
Document feed error. Set when there is an error after a MICR read command  
or a flip check command is executed.  
Status byte 8  
Bit  
Description  
Reserved.  
0 (LSB)  
1
Reserved  
2
Reserved  
3
Reserved  
4
Reserved (always 0)  
Reserved  
5
6
Reserved  
7 (MSB)  
Thermal print head or motor is almost too hot to continue printing. This bit is  
set to ON when the printer determines that the print head or motor are getting  
close to the point where the printer must slow down to keep from overheating  
the station.  
This is only supported on Models TI8/TG8 and TI9/TG9.  
186 SureMark Printers User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Updated April 2, 2009  
Appendix E. Uploading electronic journal data  
Enable the upload of EJ data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187  
Disable the upload of EJ data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187  
Upload the EJ data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188  
Request the size of the EJ space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188  
Erase the EJ data in the printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188  
This section describes the procedure for uploading electronic journal (EJ) data while  
the SureMark printer is in Model 4 emulation mode.  
Note: Models TI8, TI9, TG8, and TG9 do not support Model 4 emulation.  
To put the SureMark into the mode for starting the EJ upload, the SureMark must  
receive a print command with a unique message. The message will include the line  
number where the upload should start. Because the starting line number is  
specified, if the printer is reset during the upload, the application will not have to  
restart from the beginning. The application can send a command to start at the last  
line that was sent.  
When the EJ upload is enabled, all MICR commands will be interpreted as EJ  
upload.  
The commands that are related to uploading EJ data, which are described in the  
sections that follow, are:  
1. Enable the upload  
2. Disable the upload  
3. Upload the data  
4. Request the size of the EJ space  
5. Erase the EJ in the printer  
Enable the upload of EJ data  
Command Syntax:  
X'010100010C'^EJ RQ n1 n2  
where:  
n1  
n2  
The line number, which is specified as six decimal ASCII numbers.  
25 undefined bytes  
Example:  
X'010100010C'’^EJ RQ 00405X'0000000000000000.....' or  
X'010100010C5E454A205251203030303430450000000000.....'  
Disable the upload of EJ data  
Command Syntax:  
X'010100010C'^EJ DIsable n1  
where:  
n1  
Example:  
X'010100010C5E454A204449..............'  
27 undefined bytes  
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1997, 2006  
187  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Updated April 2, 2009  
Upload the EJ data  
Command Syntax:  
X'0117'  
Remarks:  
In response to this command, the printer will send four status bytes, then  
43 bytes of print data, followed by the line number.  
The line number will be sent as decimal ASCII numbers.  
Request the size of the EJ space  
Command Syntax:  
X'0101xxxxxx'^EJSIze n1  
where:  
n1  
Example:  
X'010100010C5E454A204449..............'  
Remarks:  
30 undefined bytes  
When the next MICR read command is sent after this command is sent, the  
SureMark will send the number of lines that are stored in the printer’s  
memory. It will also send the total number of lines that can be stored in the  
printer’s memory. The printer will then return to normal operation and  
process MICR commands as MICR commands.  
Erase the EJ data in the printer  
Command Syntax:  
X'0101xxxxxx'^EJERase n1  
where:  
n1  
30 undefined bytes  
188 SureMark Printers User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Updated April 2, 2009  
Appendix F. Proportional fonts  
Preparing the fonts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189  
Implementing proportional fonts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189  
Layout using align commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190  
Layout using set tab position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191  
This section describes the procedure for converting and downloading proportional  
fonts. It also gives recommendations that will simplify implementing proportional  
fonts on a receipt.  
Preparing the fonts  
Downloading proportional fonts to the SureMark is a two-step process:  
1. Convert a TrueType font to the SureMark proportional font format. Use the IBM  
Proportional Fonts Conversion Utility, fontconvert.exe, to convert the fonts. See  
“Proportional font conversion utility” on page 37.  
2. Download the converted font file to the printer.  
Implementing proportional fonts  
The variable width of proportional fonts can make it difficult to layout a receipt using  
traditional methods. You can simplify the process of laying out the format of a  
receipt by using the alignment and tab features of the SureMark printer.  
The following topics show how to use the alignment and tab features with  
proportional fonts. Command descriptions are given in EIA-232 command format.  
For the command syntax when you use a printer driver, please consult the driver  
documentation.  
A single proportional character set requires two user-defined code pages.  
Therefore, the printer allows the following combination of user-defined and  
proportional character sets to be stored in the printer.  
Number of Proportional Character Sets Number of User-Defined Character Sets  
0
1
2
4
2
0
Selecting code page 2 when a proportional character set is defined for code page 1  
(or selecting code page 4 when proportional characters are defined in code page 3)  
will result in unreadable characters being printed. See the Select Print Mode  
command (“Set print mode” on page 129) for more information on selecting code  
pages.  
A proportional character set is enabled using the Select User-Defined Characters  
command. See “Select user-defined or resident character sets” on page 134.  
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1997, 2006  
189  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Updated April 2, 2009  
Layout using align commands  
A common requirement for receipt layout includes aligning item prices. This is  
commonly accomplished using fixed field lengths for item descriptions or counting  
characters. Using proportional fonts makes this method of alignment practically  
impossible.  
The simplest method to align prices is to use the Align Column Right command  
(see “Align positions” on page 139) with the Fix Font Matrix command (see “Fix font  
matrix” on page 146).  
v Unlike other Align Position commands, the Align Positions-Align Column Right  
command can be sent in the middle of a print line. Print characters sent before  
the alignment command will be left aligned, while characters sent after the  
alignment command will be right aligned.  
v The Fix Font Matrix command forces proportional characters to print using a  
single width defined by the command. This essentially negates the proportional  
characteristic of the font, while still allowing the user to utilize the custom font.  
The following sequence assumes proportional characters have been downloaded  
and selected for printing. The following sequence should be used for each item line.  
The printer output would resemble the following:  
Candy Bar  
Fountain Soda  
$
.45  
$ 1.11  
1. Print the item description. For the first item, this is the ASCII data Candy Bar.  
2. Issue the Set Alignment command with n=4 (Right Align Column). The  
command syntax is X'1B 61 04'.  
3. Issue the Fix Font Matrix command with n=dot width of the widest number used.  
The command syntax is X'1B 3A xx'.  
Note: Finding the optimum value of xx for this command will vary depending on  
the proportional character set being used, and may require some  
experimentation.  
4. Print the item price. For the first item, this is the ASCII data $ .45.  
5. Issue the Fix Font Matrix command with n=0, which disables the fixed font  
matrix. The command syntax is X'1B 3A 00'.  
6. Issue the Print and Line Feed command. Use the command syntax X'0A' or  
X'0D'.  
190 SureMark Printers User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Updated April 2, 2009  
Layout using set tab position  
There are situations where the customer might not want the price right aligned, or  
requires an additional column (for example, a column for quantity). In such a case,  
using tabs is the best method to guarantee alignment. Tab positions that you define  
during the setup operation (see “Set horizontal tab positions” on page 138) will  
remain intact until the printer is reset or re-initialized. Once tabs are setup, all that is  
required is to send a tab character X'09' to move to the next tab position. It is still  
recommended that the Fix Font Matrix be used, if alignment of the individual  
characters in a field is important (for example, to align the decimal points of prices).  
The following Set Tab Positions command will define tab positions for 3 columns:  
item description, quantity and price. The command assumes that the font width is  
approximately 10 dots. This procedure assumes that proportional characters have  
been downloaded and selected for printing, and that the item description will be left  
aligned.  
X'1B 44 01 90 01 D6 00 00'  
The following sequence should be used for each item line. The printer output would  
resemble the following:  
Candy Bar  
03 $ 1.00  
Fountain Soda 10 $11.10  
1. Print the item description. For the first item, this is the ASCII data Candy Bar.  
2. Issue the Tab command. The command syntax is X'09'.  
3. Issue the Fix Font Matrix command with n=dot width of the widest number used.  
The command syntax is X'1B 3A xx'.  
Note: Finding the optimum value of xx for this command will vary depending on  
the proportional character set being used, and may require some  
experimentation.  
4. Print the quantity. For the first item, this is the ASCII data 03.  
5. Issue the Tab command. The command syntax is X'09'.  
6. Print the price. For the first item, this is the ASCII data $1.00.  
7. Issue the Fix Font Matrix command with n=0, which disables the fixed font  
matrix. The command syntax is X'1B 3A 00'.  
8. Issue the Print and Line Feed command. Use the command syntax X'0A' or  
X'0D'.  
Appendix F. Proportional fonts 191  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Updated April 2, 2009  
192 SureMark Printers User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Updated April 2, 2009  
Appendix G. Emulation support for Epson single-station  
printer  
Commands supported in emulation mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193  
Commands with limited support in emulation mode . . . . . . . . . . . 195  
Commands not supported in emulation mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196  
Connectivity differences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196  
Functional differences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196  
The SureMark single-station printers in single-byte character set (SBCS) mode can  
emulate an Epson single-station printer. Emulation mode provides full support for  
most Epson commands. However, some commands are supported partially and a  
few commands are not supported at all. This section describes the commands that  
have each of the three levels of support and also lists the connectivity differences  
between an Epson single-station printer and the SureMark.  
Note: Ensure that the dip switch on the printer is set to "Other," rather than "IBM."  
Commands supported in emulation mode  
The commands listed in Table 28 are supported in Epson emulation mode.  
However, there will be some differences in the printed output, because of different  
dot pitches in the print heads and the minimum distance that the paper feed motors  
can move the paper. These differences will appear when there are a number of  
printed lines, and the method of aligning the data is different.  
Examples of the printed differences that might occur:  
v Logos will appear smaller in emulation mode. The logo will still contain the same  
number of dots in the width and height. However, because the SureMark print  
head has a finer dot pitch, the logo will appear smaller. If text is aligned around  
the logo, the text on receipts that are printed in emulation mode might not line up  
the same as receipts that are printed on the Epson printer.  
v If one line is aligned using spaces and another line is aligned using the relative  
position commands, the data might appear misaligned. The commands, such as  
the relative position and margin commands, that use the minimum unit of motion  
values are based on a fraction of an inch, which eliminates the differences in the  
dot pitch. Tabs and spaces are subject to pitch differences.  
Table 28. Commands supported in Epson emulation mode  
Hex Command  
ASCII Command  
Description  
9
HT  
Tab  
0A  
0C  
0D  
LF  
Line feed  
FF  
Print and return to standard mode  
Print and carriage return  
Set right-side character spacing  
Select print mode  
CR  
1B 20 n  
ESC SP n  
ESC ! n  
ESC $ nL nH  
ESC % n  
1B 21 n  
1B 24 nL nH  
1B 25 n  
Set absolute print position  
Select or cancel user-defined character  
set  
1B 26 y c1 c2...  
ESC & y c1 c2...  
Define user-defined characters  
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1997, 2006  
193  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Updated April 2, 2009  
Table 28. Commands supported in Epson emulation mode (continued)  
Hex Command ASCII Command Description  
1B 2A m nL nH dl..k ESC * m nL nH dl...k Select bit-image mode  
1B 32  
ESC 2  
Select default line spacing  
Set line spacing  
1B 33 n  
1B 3D n  
1B 3F n  
1B 40  
ESC 3 n  
ESC = n  
ESC ? n  
ESC @  
ESC E n  
ESC G n  
ESC J n  
ESC R n  
ESC S  
Set peripheral device  
Cancel user-defined characters  
Initialize printer  
1B 45 n  
1B 47 n  
1B 4A n  
1B 52 n  
1B 53  
Turn emphasized mode on or off  
Turn double-strike mode on or off  
Print and feed paper  
Select an international character set  
Select standard mode  
1B 56 n  
ESC V n  
Turn 90° clockwise rotation mode on or  
off  
1B 5C nL nH  
1B 61 n  
ESC \ nL nH  
ESC a n  
Set relative print position  
Select alignment  
1B 63 33 n  
ESC c 3 n  
Select paper sensor to output paper end  
signals  
1B 63 35 n  
1B 64 n  
ESC c 5 n  
ESC d n  
Enable or disable panel buttons  
Print and feed n lines  
Generate pulse  
1B 70 m t1 t2  
1B 7B n  
ESC p m t1 t2  
ESC { n  
Turn upside-down printing mode on or  
off  
1C 67 32 m a1 a2  
a3 a4...  
FS g 2 m a1 a2 a3 a4...  
Read from user NV memory  
1C 70 n m  
1D 21 n  
FS p n m  
Print NV bit image  
GS ! n  
Select character size  
Define user-defined bit image  
1D 2A xydl  
...d(x*y*8)  
GS * xydl ...d(x*y*8)  
1D 2F m  
1D 3A  
GS / m  
GS :  
Print user-defined bit image  
Start or end user-defined message  
Turn white/black reverse printing mode  
1D 42 n  
1D 48 n  
GS B n  
GS H n  
Select printing position for HRI  
characters  
ID 49 n  
GS I n  
Transmit printer ID  
ID 4C nL nH  
1D 50 x y  
1D 56 m n  
ID 57 nL nH  
1D 61 n  
GS L nL nH  
GS P x y  
GS V m n  
GS nL nH  
GS a n  
Set left margin  
Set horizontal and vertical motion units  
Select cut mode and cut paper  
Set printing area width  
Enable or disable automatic status back  
Select font for HRI characters  
Select bar code height  
1D 66 n  
GS f n  
1D 68 n  
GS h n  
1D 72 n  
GS r n  
Transmit status  
194 SureMark Printers User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Updated April 2, 2009  
Commands with limited support in emulation mode  
The commands listed in Table 29 are supported in a limited manner in Epson  
emulation mode. The table describes the limitation on each command.  
Table 29. Commands with limited support in Epson emulation mode  
Command  
Real-time status  
transmission  
Description of Limitation  
10 04 n  
A status byte will be returned when the  
command is sent. The following status  
bits will not be supported.  
v Offline status bit 6  
v Error status bits 5 and 6  
v Paper roll status bits 2 and 3 (near  
end of paper) - Bit will be set when  
out of paper  
1B 2D n  
Turn underline mode on/off There is no thickness option available. A  
value of n=1, 2, 49 or 50 will enable  
underline mode.  
1B 44 m1...nk 00  
1B 63 34 n  
Set horizontal tab positions The number of tab positions is limited to  
5.  
Select paper sensor to stop The command will be accepted, but it  
printing  
has no function. There is no paper low  
sensor on the SureMark. The printer will  
only return out of paper status.  
1B 74 n  
Select character code table All characters on all code pages are not  
supported. The Katakana code page is  
not supported.  
1D 5E r t m  
1D 77 n  
Execute user-defined  
message  
Does not support the mode where the  
user-defined message is printed when  
the paper advance button is pressed.  
Set bar code width  
The maximum width is 4 dots on the  
SureMark. Widths of 5 and 6 will be  
forced to 4 dots.  
1C 67 31 m a1 a2  
a3 a4...  
Write to user NV memory  
If received during user-defined message  
definition, this command will be  
embedded in the NV memory. Epson  
will stop the definition and store the  
data in NV memory.  
The user is required to erase the NV  
memory before the address can be  
overwritten.  
1C 71 n [xL xH yL  
yH...  
Define NV bit image  
The width is limited to 576 dots wide  
and 255 rows high.  
Appendix G. Emulation support for Epson single-station printer 195  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Updated April 2, 2009  
Commands not supported in emulation mode  
In Epson emulation mode, the SureMark printer supports all Epson commands  
except the page mode commands and smoothing. Table 30 lists the commands that  
are not supported.  
Table 30. Commands not supported in Epson emulation mode  
Hex Command  
ASCII Command  
CAN  
Description of Limitation  
Cancel print data in page mode  
Print data in page mode  
18  
1B 0C  
1B 4C  
1B 54 n  
ESC FF  
ESC L  
Select page mode  
ESC T n  
Select print direction in page mode  
Set printing area in page mode  
1B 57 xL xH yL yH  
...  
ESC W xL xH yL yH...  
1D 24 nL nH  
1D 5C nL nH  
1D 62 n  
GS $ nL nH  
GS \ nL nH  
GS b n  
Set absolute vertical print position in  
page mode  
Set relative vertical print position in  
page mode  
Turn smoothing mode on or off  
Connectivity differences  
The connectivity differences between an Epson single-station printer and the  
SureMark printers are:  
v The Epson printer offers a parallel interface that the SureMark printer does not  
support.  
v The following EIA-232 modes of communication, which are supported by the  
Epson single-station printer, are not supported by the SureMark printer:  
– 2400 kbps and 4800 kbps baud  
– 7 bits of data  
– Parity  
– More than one stop bit  
– 25-pin D shell  
v To attach the printer to a standard PC serial port:  
– The Epson single-station printer requires a Null Modem cable.  
– The SureMark requires a standard 9-pin D-shell EIA-232 cable.  
Functional differences  
The following limitations must be considered when using a single-station SureMark  
printer to emulate an Epson single-station printer:  
v When applications switch from Epson printers to IBM printers, there is sometimes  
a difference in the receipt line spacing. The receipt appears double spaced  
because, by default, the SureMark printer treats carriage returns (CRs) the same  
as line feeds (LFs). To change this behavior see “Mode Option” MCT #30 (1E  
hex) in Table 17 on page 125.  
v To provide a more seamless transition between OPOS-driven Epson and IBM  
printers, IBM now supports an OEM Printer Emulation setting in the OPOS  
printer device configuration dialog. Enable this setting to produce behavior that is  
more consistent with that of an Epson printer. (Refer to the Application  
Programming Guide for your driver.)  
196 SureMark Printers User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Updated April 2, 2009  
Appendix H. Safety information  
Danger  
Before you begin to install this product, read the safety information in  
IBM Safety Information—Read This First, GA27-4004. This booklet describes  
safe procedures for cabling and plugging in electrical equipment.  
Gevaar  
Voordat u begint met de installatie van dit produkt, moet u eerst de  
veiligheidsinstructies lezen in de brochure Veiligheidsinstructies—Lees dit  
eerst, GA27-4004. Hierin wordt beschreven hoe u electrische apparatuur op  
een veilige manier moet bekabelen en aansluiten.  
Perigo  
Antes de começar a instalar este produto, leia as informações de  
segurança contidas em Informações Sobre Seguranaça—Leia Isto Primeiro,  
GA27-4004. Esse folheto descreve procedimentos de segurança para a  
instalação de cabos e conexões em equipamentos elétricos.  
Fare!  
Før du installerer dette produkt, skal du læse sikkerhedsforskrifterne i  
Sikkerhedsforskrifter—Lœs dette først GA27-4004. Vejledningen beskriver den  
fremgangsmåde, du skal bruge ved tilslutning af kabler og udstyr.  
Gevaar  
Voordat u begint met het installeren van dit produkt, dient u eerst de  
veiligheidsrichtlijnen te lezen die zijn vermeld in de publikatie IBM Safety  
Information—Read This First, GA27-4004. In dit boekje vindt u veilige  
procedures voor het aansluiten van elektrische appratuur.  
VAARA  
Ennen kuin aloitat tämän tuotteen asennuksen, lue julkaisussa  
Turvaohjeet—Luetämä ensin, GA27-4004, olevat turvaohjeet. Tässä kirjasessa  
on ohjeet siitä, miten sähkölaitteet kaapeloidaan ja kytketään turvallisesti.  
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1997, 2006  
197  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Updated April 2, 2009  
Danger  
Avant d’installer le présent produit, consultez le livret Informations pour  
la sécurité—Lisez-moi d’abord, GA27-4004, qui décrit les procédures à  
respecter pour effectuer les opérations de câblage et brancher les  
équipements électriques en toute sécurité.  
Vorsicht  
Bevor mit der Installation des Produktes begonnen wird, die  
Sicherheitshinweise in Sicherheitsinformationen—Bitte zuerst lesen, IBM Form  
GA27-4004. Diese Veröffentlichung beschreibt die Sicherheitsvorkehrungen für  
das Verkabeln und Anschlieβen elektrischer Geräte.  
Vigyázat  
Mielôtt megkezdi a berendezés üzembe helyezését, olvassa el a IBM  
Safety Information—Read This First, GA27-4004 könyvecskében leírt  
biztonsági információkat. Ez a könyv leírja, milyen biztonsági intézkedéseket  
kell megtenni az elektromos berendezés huzalozásakor illetve  
csatlakoztatásakor.  
Pericolo  
Prima di iniziare l’installazione di questo prodotto, leggere le  
informazioni relative alla sicurezza riportate nell’opuscolo Informazioni di  
sicurezza—Prime informazioni da leggere in cui sono descritte le procedure  
per il cablaggio ed il collegamento di apparecchiature elettriche.  
Fare  
Før du begynner å installere dette produktet, må du lese  
sikkerhetsinformasjonen i Sikkerhetsinformasjon—Les dette først, GA27-4004  
som beskriver sikkerhetsrutinene for kabling og tilkobling av elektrisk utstyr.  
Perigo  
Antes de iniciar a instalação deste produto, leia as informações de  
segurança Informações de Segurança—Leia Primeiro, GA27-4004. Este  
documento descreve como efectuar, de um modo seguro, as ligações  
eléctricas dos equipamentos.  
198 SureMark Printers User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Updated April 2, 2009  
Peligro  
Antes de empezar a instalar este producto, lea la información de  
seguridad en Información de Seguridad—Lea Esto Primero, GA27-4004. Este  
documento describe los procedimientos de sequridad para cablear y enchufar  
equipos eléctricos.  
Varning—livsfara  
Innan du börjar installera den här produkten bör du läsa  
säkerhetsinformationen i dikumentet Säkerhetsföreskrifter—Läs detta först,  
GA27-4004. Där beskrivs hur du på ett säkert sätt ansluter elektrisk utrustning.  
Appendix H. Safety information 199  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Updated April 2, 2009  
IBM  
IBM  
GA27-4004  
GA27-4004  
200 SureMark Printers User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Updated April 2, 2009  
GA27-4004  
IBM  
GA27-4004  
GA27-4004  
GA27-4004  
GA27-4004  
GA27-4004  
Appendix H. Safety information 201  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Updated April 2, 2009  
202 SureMark Printers User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Updated April 2, 2009  
Appendix I. Notices  
This information was developed for products and services offered in the U.S.A.  
IBM may not offer the products, services, or features discussed in this document in  
other countries. Consult your local IBM representative for information on the  
products and services currently available in your area. Any reference to an IBM  
product, program, or service is not intended to state or imply that only that IBM  
product, program, or service may be used. Any functionally equivalent product,  
program, or service that does not infringe any IBM intellectual property right may be  
used instead. However, it is the user’s responsibility to evaluate and verify the  
operation of any non-IBM product, program, or service.  
IBM may have patents or pending patent applications covering the subject matter in  
this document. The furnishing of this document does not give you any license to  
these patents. You can send license inquiries, in writing, to:  
IBM Director of Licensing  
IBM Corporation  
North Castle Drive  
Armonk, NY 10504-1785  
U.S.A.  
For license inquiries regarding double-byte character set (DBCS) information,  
contact the IBM Intellectual Property Department in your country or send inquiries,  
in writing, to:  
IBM World Trade Asia Corporation  
Licensing  
2-31 Roppongi 3-chome, Minato-ku  
Tokyo 106, Japan  
The following paragraph does not apply to the United Kingdom or any other country  
where such provisions are inconsistent with local law: INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS  
MACHINES CORPORATION PROVIDES THIS PUBLICATION "AS IS" WITHOUT  
WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT  
NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF NON-INFRINGEMENT,  
MERCHANTABILITY, OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Some states  
do not allow disclaimer of express or implied warranties in certain transactions,  
therefore, this statement may not apply to you.  
This information could include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors.  
Changes are periodically made to the information herein; these changes will be  
incorporated in new editions of the publication. IBM may make improvements and/or  
changes in the product(s) and/or program(s) described in this publication at any  
time without notice.  
IBM may use or distribute any of the information you supply in any way it believes  
appropriate without incurring any obligation to you.  
Any references in this information to non-IBM Web sites are provided for  
convenience only and do not in any manner serve as an endorsement of those  
Web sites. The materials at those Web sites are not part of the materials for this  
IBM product and use of those Web sites is at your own risk.  
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1997, 2006  
203  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Updated April 2, 2009  
Information concerning non-IBM products was obtained from the suppliers of those  
products, their published announcements or other publicly available sources. IBM  
has not tested those products and cannot confirm the accuracy of performance,  
compatibility or any other claims related to non-IBM products. Questions on the  
capabilities of non-IBM products should be addressed to the suppliers of those  
products.  
This information is for planning purposes only. The information herein is subject to  
change before the products described become available.  
204 SureMark Printers User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Updated April 2, 2009  
Electronic emission notices  
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) statement  
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A  
digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to  
provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is  
operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can  
radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the  
instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications.  
Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful  
interference, in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at  
his own expense.  
Properly shielded and grounded cables and connectors must be used in order to  
meet FCC emission limits. IBM is not responsible for any radio or television  
interference caused by using other than recommended cables and connectors or by  
unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment. Unauthorized changes or  
modifications could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.  
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the  
following two conditions:  
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and  
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that  
may cause undesired operation.  
European Union EMC Directive conformance statement  
This product is in conformity with the protection requirements of EU Council  
Directive 2004/108/EC on the approximation of the laws of the Member States  
relating to electromagnetic compatibility. IBM cannot accept responsibility for any  
failure to satisfy the protection requirements resulting from a non-recommended  
modification of the product, including the fitting of non-IBM option cards.  
This product has been tested and found to comply with the limits for Class A  
Information Technology Equipment according to CISPR 22/European Standard EN  
55022. The limits for Class A equipment were derived for commercial and industrial  
environments to provide reasonable protection against interference with licensed  
communication equipment.  
Attention: This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment this product may  
cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate  
measures.  
European Community contact:  
IBM Technical Regulations  
Pascalstr. 100, Stuttgart, Germany 70569  
Telephone: 0049 (0)711 785 1176  
Fax: 0049 785 1283  
E-mail: [email protected]  
Appendix I. Notices 205  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Updated April 2, 2009  
Industry Canada Class A Emission Compliance statement  
This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.  
Avis de conformité aux normes d’Industrie Canada  
Cet appareil numérique de la classe A est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du  
Canada.  
Germany  
Zulassungsbescheinigung laut dem Deutschen Gesetz über die  
elektromagnetische Verträglichkeit von Geräten (EMVG) vom 30. August 1995  
(bzw. der EMC EG Richlinie 89/336).  
Dieses Gerät ist berechtigt in Übereinstimmung mit dem Deutschen EMVG das  
EG-Konformitätszeichen - CE - zu führen.  
Verantwortlich für die Konformitätserklärung nach Paragraph 5 des EMVG ist die  
IBM Deutschland Informationssysteme GmbH, 70548 Stuttgart  
Informationen in Hinsicht EMVG Paragraph 3 Abs. (2) 2:  
Das Gerät erfüllt die Schutzanforderungen nach EN 50082–1 und EN 55022 Klasse A.  
EN 55022 Klasse A Geräte müssen mit folgendem Warnhinweis versehen werden:  
″Warnung: dies ist eine Einrichtung der Klasse A. Diese Einrichtung kann im  
Wohnbereich Funkstörungen verursachen; in diesem Fall kann vom Betreiber  
verlangt werden, angemessene Maβnahmen durchzuführen und dafür  
aufzukommen.″  
EN 50082–1 Hinweis:  
″Wird dieses Gerät in einer industriellen Umgebung betrieben (wie in EN 50082–2  
festgelegt), dann kann es dabei eventuell gestört werden. In solch einem Fall ist der  
Abstand bzw. die Abschirmung zu der industriellen Störquelle zu vergröβern.″  
Anmerkung:  
Um die Einhaltung des EMVG sicherzustellen sind die Geräte, wie in den IBM  
Handbüchern angegeben, zu installieren und zu betreiben.  
Australia and New Zealand  
Attention: This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment this product may  
cause radio interference, in which case the user may be required to take adequate  
measures.  
206 SureMark Printers User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Updated April 2, 2009  
Chinese Class A warning statement  
Attention: This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment this product may  
cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate  
measures.  
Japanese power line harmonics compliance statement  
Japanese Voluntary Control Council for Interference (VCCI) statement  
Attention: This product is a Class A Information Technology Equipment and  
conforms to the standards set by the Voluntary Control Council for Interference by  
Technology Equipment (VCCI). In a domestic environment this product may cause  
radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate  
measures.  
Korean communications statement  
Please note that this device has been approved for business purposes with regard  
to electromagnetic interference. If you find this is not suitable for your use, you may  
exchange it for a non-business purpose one.  
Appendix I. Notices 207  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Updated April 2, 2009  
Taiwanese Class A warning statement  
Taiwan contact information  
IBM Taiwan Product Service Contact Info:  
IBM Taiwan Corporation  
3F, No 7, Song Ren Road, Taipei Taiwan  
Telephone: 0800-016-888  
Cable ferrite requirement  
All cable ferrites are required to suppress radiated EMI emissions and must not be  
removed.  
Electrostatic Discharge (ESD)  
Attention: ESD damage can occur when there is a difference in charge between  
the part, the product, and the service person. No damage will occur if the service  
person and the part being installed are at the same charge level.  
208 SureMark Printers User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Updated April 2, 2009  
ESD Damage Prevention  
Anytime a service action involves physical contact with logic cards, modules,  
back-panel pins, or other ESD sensitive (ESDS) parts, the service person must be  
connected to an ESD common ground point on the product through the ESD wrist  
strap and cord.  
The ESD ground clip can be attached to any frame ground, ground braid, green  
wire ground, or the round ground prong on the AC power plug. Coax or connector  
outside shells can also be used.  
Handling Removed Cards  
Logic cards removed from a product should be placed in ESD protective containers.  
No other object should be allowed inside the ESD container with the logic card.  
Attach tags or reports that must accompany the card to the outside of the container.  
Product Recycling and disposal  
This unit must be recycled or discarded according to applicable local and national  
regulations. IBM encourages owners of information technology (IT) equipment to  
responsibly recycle their equipment when it is no longer needed. IBM offers a  
variety of product return programs and services in several countries to assist  
equipment owners in recycling their IT products. Information on IBM product  
recycling offerings can be found on IBM’s Internet site at http://www.ibm.com/ibm/  
environment/products/prp.shtml.  
Español:  
Esta unidad debe reciclarse o desecharse de acuerdo con lo establecido en la  
normativa nacional o local aplicable. IBM recomienda a los propietarios de equipos  
de tecnología de la información (TI) que reciclen responsablemente sus equipos  
cuando éstos ya no les sean útiles. IBM dispone de una serie de programas y  
servicios de devolución de productos en varios países, a fín de ayudar a los  
propietarios de equipos a reciclar sus productos de TI. Se puede encontrar  
información sobre las ofertas de reciclado de productos de IBM en el sitio web de  
IBM http://www.ibm.com/ibm/environment/products/prp.shtml.  
Notice: This mark applies only to countries within the European Union (EU) and  
Norway.  
Appliances are labeled in accordance with European Directive 2002/96/EC  
concerning waste electrical and electronic equipment (WEEE). The Directive  
determines the framework for the return and recycling of used appliances as  
applicable throughout the European Union. This label is applied to various products  
to indicate that the product is not to be thrown away, but rather reclaimed upon end  
of life per this Directive.  
Remarque : Cette marque s’applique uniquement aux pays de l’Union Européenne  
et à la Norvège. L’etiquette du système respecte la Directive européenne  
2002/96/EC en matière de Déchets des Equipements Electriques et Electroniques  
Appendix I. Notices 209  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Updated April 2, 2009  
(DEEE), qui détermine les dispositions de retour et de recyclage applicables aux  
systèmes utilisés à travers l’Union européenne. Conformément à la directive, ladite  
étiquette précise que le produit sur lequel elle est apposée ne doit pas être jeté  
mais être récupéré en fin de vie.  
In accordance with the European WEEE Directive, electrical and electronic  
equipment (EEE) is to be collected separately and to be reused, recycled, or  
recovered at end of life. Users of EEE with the WEEE marking per Annex IV of the  
WEEE Directive, as shown above, must not dispose of end of life EEE as unsorted  
municipal waste, but use the collection framework available to customers for the  
return, recycling, and recovery of WEEE. Customer participation is important to  
minimize any potential effects of EEE on the environment and human health due to  
the potential presence of hazardous substances in EEE. For proper collection and  
treatment, contact your local IBM representative.  
Disposal of IT products should be in accordance with local ordinances and  
regulations.  
Battery return program  
This product may contain sealed lead acid, nickel cadmium, nickel metal hydride,  
lithium, or lithium ion battery. Consult your user manual or service manual for  
specific battery information. The battery must be recycled or disposed of properly.  
Recycling facilities may not be available in your area. For information on disposal of  
batteries outside the United States, go to http://www.ibm.com/ibm/environment/  
products/batteryrecycle.shtml or contact your local waste disposal facility.  
In the United States, IBM has established a return process for reuse, recycling, or  
proper disposal of used IBM sealed lead acid, nickel cadmium, nickel metal hydride,  
and other battery packs from IBM equipment. For information on proper disposal of  
these batteries, contact IBM at 1-800-426-4333. Please have the IBM part number  
listed on the battery available prior to your call.  
For Taiwan:  
Please recycle batteries.  
210 SureMark Printers User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Updated April 2, 2009  
For the European Union:  
Notice: This mark applies only to countries within the European Union (EU)  
Batteries or packaging for batteries are labeled in accordance with European  
Directive 2006/66/EC concerning batteries and accumulators and waste batteries  
and accumulators. The Directive determines the framework for the return and  
recycling of used batteries and accumulators as applicable throughout the European  
Union. This label is applied to various batteries to indicate that the battery is not to  
be thrown away, but rather reclaimed upon end of life per this Directive.  
Les batteries ou emballages pour batteries sont étiquetés conformément aux  
directives européennes 2006/66/EC, norme relative aux batteries et accumulateurs  
en usage et aux batteries et accumulateurs usés. Les directives déterminent la  
marche à suivre en vigueur dans l’Union Européenne pour le retour et le recyclage  
des batteries et accumulateurs usés. Cette étiquette est appliquée sur diverses  
batteries pour indiquer que la batterie ne doit pas être mise au rebut mais plutôt  
récupérée en fin de cycle de vie selon cette norme.  
In accordance with the European Directive 2006/66/EC, batteries and accumulators  
are labeled to indicate that they are to be collected separately and recycled at end  
of life. The label on the battery may also include a chemical symbol for the metal  
concerned in the battery (Pb for lead, Hg for mercury and Cd for cadmium). Users  
of batteries and accumulators must not dispose of batteries and accumulators as  
unsorted municipal waste, but use the collection framework available to customers  
for the return, recycling and treatment of batteries and accumulators. Customer  
participation is important to minimize any potential effects of batteries and  
accumulators on the environment and human health due to the potential presence  
of hazardous substances. For proper collection and treatment, contact your local  
IBM representative.  
This notice is provided in accordance with Royal Decree 106/2008 of Spain: The  
retail price of batteries, accumulators and power cells includes the cost of the  
environmental management of their waste.  
For California:  
Perchlorate material – special handling may apply  
Refer to http://www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.  
Appendix I. Notices 211  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Updated April 2, 2009  
The foregoing notice is provided in accordance with California Code of Regulations  
Title 22, Division 4.5, Chapter 33: Best Management Practices for Perchlorate  
Materials. This product/part includes a lithium manganese dioxide battery which  
contains a perchlorate substance.  
Flat panel displays  
The fluorescent lamp in the liquid crystal display contains mercury. Dispose of it as  
required by local ordinances and regulations.  
Monitors and workstations  
Connecticut - Please see the web site of the Department of Environmental  
Protection at http://www.ct.gov/dep for information about recycling covered  
electronic devices in the State of Connecticut, or telephone the Connecticut  
Department of Environmental Protection at 1-860-424-3000.  
Oregon - For information regarding recycling covered electronic devices in the state  
of Oregon, go to the Oregon Department of Environmental Quality site at  
http://www.deq.state.or.us/lq/electronics.htm.  
Washington - For information about recycling covered electronic devices in the  
State of Washington, go to the Department of Ecology Web site at  
https://fortress.wa.gov/ecy/recycle/ or telephone the Washington Department of  
Ecology at 1-800Recycle.  
Trademarks  
The following are trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation in the  
United States or other countries, or both:  
AnyPlace Kiosk(tm)  
AnyPlace POS Hub(tm)  
DB2  
DB2 Universal Database  
IBM and the IBM logo  
PS/2  
SureMark  
SurePoint  
SurePOS  
Wake on LAN  
WebSphere  
Microsoft, Windows, Windows NT, and the Windows logo are trademarks of  
Microsoft Corporation in the United States, other countries, or both.  
Celeron and Intel are trademarks of Intel corporation in the United States, or other  
countries.  
Java and all Java-based trademarks and logos are trademarks or registered  
trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc. in the United States, or other countries, or  
both.  
Other company, product, or service names may be trademarks or service marks of  
others.  
212 SureMark Printers User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Updated April 2, 2009  
Index  
code page command, set 135  
code pages  
Numerics  
4610 fonts and logos 37  
4610 fonts and logos utilities 37  
code page 437 94  
code page 858 95  
code page 860 96  
code page 863 97  
code page 865 98  
definitions 92  
generic 93  
A
AipFlsh46 40  
align positions command 139  
application requirements 14  
asynchronous commands 175  
resident 15  
code pages, resident 15  
command line utility 40  
commands, EIA-232  
asynchronous 175  
B
bar code commands  
bar code commands 147  
batch printing 176  
enable PDF417 truncation 155  
print bar code 147  
print PDF417 bar code 153  
select aspect ratio PDF417 bar code 155  
select bar code height 152  
select font for HRI 153  
check processing 164  
data buffer management 176  
document handling 181  
document scanner 166  
miscellaneous 160  
select horizontal size of bar code 152  
select PDF417 ECC level 154  
select printing position of HRI 152  
bar codes, supported 15  
batch printing commands 176  
battery return program 210  
battery, European Union 210  
baud rate selection, EIA-232 28  
baud rate selection, EIA-232, Model TI8 30  
page mode printing 177  
preset 114  
print character 156  
print graphics (logo) command 157  
setup 129  
system 111  
commands, immediate 89  
communication interfaces 10  
communication mode selection  
EIA-232 28, 30  
BMP  
5
USB 31  
consumable supplies 81  
controls, printer  
C
Models TF6 and TM6 71  
Models TI1, TI2, TI3, TI4, TI8, TI9, TG3, TG4, TG8,  
TG9 47  
cable ferrite requirement 208  
calibration, document scanner 60  
cash drawer drive pulse command 161  
cash drawer pin assignments 90  
character fonts 98  
conversion utility, proportional fonts 37  
check processing commands 164  
check verification, printing 47  
checks, clearing jams 55  
Class A compliance statement  
Australia and New Zealand 206  
China 207  
D
damage from electrostatic discharge 208  
data buffer management commands 176  
define document wait time command 141  
dimensions, physical 10  
disable feed buttons 143  
disable line count 176  
European Union 205  
FCC (USA) 205  
Germany 206  
disable the beeper 143  
Industry Canada 206  
Japan 207  
Taiwan 208  
disable upside-down printing 144  
diskette, fonts and logos utilities, 4610 37  
diskettes  
cleaning  
related xvi  
MICR reader read head 56  
scanner 59  
disposal of equipment 209  
document format  
5
thermal print head (Model TI1, TI2, TI3, TI4, TI8,  
TG3, TG4) 57  
document handling  
landscape mode 182  
thermal print head (Models TF6 and TM6) 73  
clearing jams, DI station 55  
portrait mode 181  
document handling, landscape mode commands 182  
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1997, 2006  
213  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Updated April 2, 2009  
document handling, portrait mode commands 181  
document insert forms 82  
document length, setting 133  
document scanner calibration 60  
double-high mode command, set or cancel 131  
double-wide mode command, set or cancel 130  
download graphics (logo) commands 115  
download user-defined characters command 118  
DTR and DSR  
EIA-232 commands (continued)  
line spacing, minimum units 137  
maximum print speed 132  
MICR read 165  
microcode tolerance, loading 124  
microcode tolerance, request 125  
miscellaneous 160  
onetime-set 114  
page mode printing 177  
paper cut/DI eject 161  
control description 29, 30  
selection 28  
predefine messages 117  
preset 114  
print and line feed 156  
print character 156  
E
print graphics (logo) command 157  
print head home position, select 160  
print logo inline 146  
EC request command 175  
edition notice ii  
EIA-232 commands 101  
1/6-in. line spacing, select 136  
1/8-in. line spacing, select 136  
align positions 139  
print mode, set 129  
print predefined logo 159  
print predefined messages 159  
proportional font 120  
real-time 175  
real-time status request 175  
release print buffer 175  
asynchronous 175  
bar code commands 147  
enable PDF417 truncation 155  
print bar code 147  
Request document length 133  
reset line count 176  
print font, select HRI 153  
print PDF417 bar code 153  
print position, select HRI 152  
select aspect ratio PDF417 bar code 155  
select PDF417 ECC level 154  
set bar code height 152  
set bar code horizontal size 152  
batch printing 176  
cash drawer drive pulse 161  
character for reprinted line, select 142  
check processing 164  
data buffer management 176  
define document wait time 141  
disable line count 176  
document handling 181  
document scanner 166  
download graphics (logo) 115  
download user-defined characters 118  
EC request 175  
EIA-232 parameters 91  
emphasized printing, set or cancel 132  
enable/disable the beeper 143  
enable/disable upside-down printing 144  
erase flash EPROM sector 123  
exercise program 111  
retrieve flash storage 161  
retrieve printer usage statistics 162  
retrieve size of flash storage 162  
reverse print and feed paper 157  
select character sets 134  
select character size for scalable fonts 145  
select color printing 137  
select thermal paper 147  
send checksum flash EPROM sector 124  
send status to system 141  
set code page 135  
Set document length for landscape print 133  
set error recovery 140  
set horizontal tabs 138  
set intercharacter spacing 135  
set left margin 138  
set or cancel double-high mode 131  
set or cancel double-wide mode 130  
set or cancel invert 131  
set or cancel overline mode 131  
set or cancel rotated characters 135  
set or cancel underline mode 131  
set print station 134  
set print station parameters 136  
set relative position 139  
set sheet eject length 138  
setup 129  
status bytes 184, 186  
status request 112  
status summary 184  
system 111  
tab to next tab stop 160  
thermal code page 119  
unidirectional printing, set or cancel 133  
verify previous commands completed 111  
extended address command 112  
feed buttons 143  
feed minimum units 156  
feed n lines 156  
fix font matrix 146  
flash storage write 123  
flip check 166  
form feed and cut 156  
hold printing 177  
impact code page 122  
landscape printing 183  
line feed, print 156  
214 SureMark Printers User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Updated April 2, 2009  
EIA-232 communication mode selections 28, 30  
EIA-232 pin assignments 91  
electronic emissions notices 205  
Australia and New Zealand 206  
China 207  
flash storage  
retrieve 161  
retrieve size 162  
flash storage write command 123  
flat panel displays 212  
flip check command 166  
flippable document specifications 82  
fonts  
European Union 205  
FCC (USA) 205  
Germany 206  
Industry Canada 206  
character 98  
Japan 207  
impact printing 99  
Korea 207  
thermal printing 98  
Taiwan 208  
fonts and logos utilities, 4610 37  
fonts and logos, 4610 37  
fonts, character 98  
fonts, proportional 189  
forms, document insert, specifications 82  
electronic journal data, upload during emulation 187  
electrostatic discharge (ESD) 208  
emphasized printing command, set or cancel 132  
emptying printer buffer 41  
emulate Epson single-station printer  
commands with limited support 195  
connectivity differences 196  
enabling 43  
G
general description 87  
generic code page 93  
fully-supported commands 193  
limitations 43  
overview 43  
unsupported commands 196  
emulate Model 3 or 4 printer  
limitations 41  
overview 41  
upload electronic journal data 187  
emulation, Epson 193  
H
hardware requirements 13  
height, all models 10  
hex dump, EIA-232 66, 77  
hold printing command 177  
horizontal tabs command, set 138  
humidity requirements 10  
enable feed buttons 143  
enable the beeper 143  
enable upside-down printing 144  
end of life disposal 209  
Epson emulation 193  
equipment disposal 209  
erase flash EPROM sector command 123  
error recovery command, set 140  
exercise program 111  
I
IBM Diagnostics for POS Systems and Peripherals 41  
IBM Retail Store Solutions Web site 44  
immediate commands 89  
impact code page command 122  
indicators, printer  
expendable supplies 83  
extended address command 112  
Models TF6 and TM6 71  
Models TI1, TI2, TI3, TI4, TI8, TI9, TG3, TG4, TG8,  
TG9 47  
information, planning  
installation, single-station  
power-on self-test, TF6 and TM6 75  
problem determination, Models TF6 and TM6 78  
testing, Models TF6 and TM6 75  
installation, thermal/impact  
9
F
features, all models  
6
ferrite requirement 208  
fillers, installing  
for EIA-232/RS-485 printers 24  
for USB printers 26  
firmware update image 39  
firmware update, printer 39  
firmware, updating  
fillers for EIA-232/RS-485 printers 24  
fillers for USB printers 26  
for EIA-232/RS-485 communication 18  
for USB communication 21  
power-on self-test, Models TI1/TI2/TI3/TI4/TI8 61  
preparation 17  
problem determination, Models TI1/TI2/TI3/TI4/TI8/  
TI9/TG3/TG4/TG8/TG9 67  
firmware update diskette 38  
limitation 41  
methods 37  
POSS for Windows 39  
via EIA-232 attachment 40  
fix font matrix 146  
flash memory  
testing, Models TI1/TI2/TI3/TI4 61  
unpacking 18  
intercharacter spacing command, set 135  
interfaces, communication 10  
printing 41  
usage 89  
introduction  
3
invert command, set or cancel 131  
Index 215  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Updated April 2, 2009  
offline test, thermal/impact printer  
customer receipt test 62  
document insert test 63  
MICR reader and check flipper test 65  
onetime-set commands 114  
J
Japanese power line harmonics compliance  
statement 207  
Japanese Voluntary Control Council for Interference  
statement 207  
JavaPOS for Windows 39  
operating system requirements 13  
overline mode command, set or cancel 131  
JPEG  
5
overview  
3
K
P
Korean communications statement 207  
paper cut/DI eject command 161  
paper width 87  
paper, document insert, specifications 82  
paper, select thermal 147  
paper, thermal, specifications 81  
parameters, serial RS-485 90  
perchlorate 211  
L
landscape printing commands 183  
left margin command, set 138  
limitations  
9
line spacing, minimum units 137  
line spacing, select 1/6 136  
line spacing, select 1/8 136  
physical dimensions 10  
pin assignments  
cash drawer connector 90  
EIA-232 connector 91  
USB connector 92  
M
planning information  
9
maintenance, printers 85  
maintenance, service provider 85  
memory units 89  
power requirements 12  
predefine messages command 117  
preset commands 114  
mercury-added statement 212  
MICR data parser sample code 44  
MICR read  
print and line feed command 156  
print character commands 156  
print head cleaning, thermal  
Models TF6 and TM6 73  
Models TI1, TI2, TI3, TI4, TI8, TG3, TG4 57  
print head cleaning, thermal head 57  
print logo inline 146  
print mode command, set 129  
print predefined graphics (logo) command 159  
print scanned image command 168  
print station command, set 134  
print station parameters command, set 136  
print width 87  
read command 165  
MICR reader and check flipper test 65  
MICR reader read head cleaning 56  
microcode tolerance (MCT)  
loading command 124  
request command 125  
miscellaneous EIA-232 commands 160  
Model 3 or 4 printer, emulate  
limitations 41  
overview 41  
model comparison  
multipart form specifications 82  
7
printed copy of scanned check 66  
printer firmware update using JavaPOS 39  
printer, single-station  
indicators and controls 71  
operation 71  
paper loading 71  
N
notices 203  
printer, thermal/impact  
battery recycling 210  
cable ferrites 208  
electronic emissions 205  
electrostatic discharge (ESD) 208  
end of life disposal 209  
IBM 203  
check verification 47  
clearing jams, DI station 55  
indicators and controls 47  
installing EIA-232/RS-485 fillers 24  
installing for EIA-232/RS-485 18  
installing for USB 21  
safety information 197  
installing USB fillers 26  
operation 47  
paper loading 53  
ribbon loading 51  
ribbon specifications 83  
O
offline test, single-station printer  
customer receipt 76  
reset printer 78  
test pattern 77  
printing flash memory 41  
printing saved data 41  
216 SureMark Printers User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Updated April 2, 2009  
problem determination, single-station printer  
customer receipt test 76  
symptoms 78  
problem determination, thermal/impact printer  
customer receipt test 62  
symptoms 67  
S
safety information 197  
saved data, printing 41  
scanned check printout 66  
scanned document format  
scanner  
5
product care 85  
cleaning 59  
programming information 101  
proportional font command 120  
proportional fonts 189  
conversion utility 37  
scanner calibration 60  
scanner calibration command 173  
scanner commands  
print scanned image 168  
retrieve first unread image location 174  
retrieve next image location 174  
retrieve scanned image 172  
scanner calibration 173  
select compression format and scanned image  
threshold 174  
start scan 166  
implementing 189  
layout using alignment 190  
layout using tabs 191  
publications  
CD-ROM book collection xvi  
Web site xvi  
publications, related xvi  
store scanned image 169  
scanner resolution 173  
select  
R
RAM  
1/6-in. line spacing, select 136  
1/8-in. line spacing command 136  
character for reprinted line command 142  
character sets command 134  
HRI (bar code) font 153  
usage 89  
re-initialize the printer command 142  
real-time commands 175  
real-time status request command 175  
related publications and diskettes xvi  
relative position command, set 139  
release print buffer command 175  
Request document length 133  
request printer ID command 112  
requirements  
HRI (bar code) position 152  
print graphics (logo) command 157  
print head home position command 160  
select character size for scalable fonts 145  
select color printing command 137  
select compression format and scanned image  
threshold command 174  
select maximum print speed 132  
send checksum flash EPROM sector command 124  
send status to system command 141  
service proficer, system maintenance 85  
Set document length for landscape print 133  
set horizontal tabs command 138  
setup  
application programs 14  
hardware 13  
humidity 10  
operating system 13  
power 12  
software 13  
temperature 10  
reset line count 176  
reset printer 175  
resetting the printer  
commands 129  
set or cancel high quality print mode 132  
sheet eject length command, set 138  
single form specifications 82  
software adjustments  
Models TF6 and TM6 78  
Models TI1, TI2, TI3, TI4, TI8, TG3, TG4 66  
resident code pages 15  
retrieve first unread image location command 174  
retrieve flash storage command 161  
retrieve next image location command 174  
retrieve printer usage statistics command 162  
retrieve scanned image command 172  
retrieve size of flash storage command 162  
reverse print and feed paper 157  
ribbon loading 51  
updating firmware 37  
using reference/service diskette 35  
software requirements 13  
specifications  
cash drawer pins 90  
document insert forms 82  
documents to be flipped 82  
EIA-232 pins 91  
fonts 98  
forms, single and multipart 82  
memory 89  
ribbons, print 83  
rotated characters command, set or cancel 135  
RS-485  
parameters, serial 90  
paper width 87  
pitch 87  
print ribbons 83  
print width 87  
RS-485 serial I/O 90  
Index 217  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Updated April 2, 2009  
specifications (continued)  
speed 87  
thermal paper 81  
USB pins 92  
speed, print 87  
X
XON and XOFF  
control description 29, 30  
selection 28  
start scan command 166  
status  
request 111, 112  
summary 184  
status bytes, EIA-232 184  
status request command 112  
store scanned image command 169  
supplies 83  
supplies, where to order 81  
T
tab to next tab stop command 160  
Taiwanese battery recycling statement 210  
temperature requirements 10  
testing  
Models TF6 and TM6 75  
Models TI1/TI2/TI3/TI4/TI8 61  
thermal code page command 119  
thermal paper specifications 81  
thermal paper, select 147  
TIFF  
5
trademarks 212  
TrueType fonts conversion utility 37  
U
underline mode command, set or cancel 131  
unidirectional printing command, set or cancel 133  
unpacking the printer 18  
update firmware  
firmware update diskette 38  
limitation 41  
methods 37  
POSS for Windows 39  
via EIA-232 attachment 40  
upload electronic journal data during emulation 187  
USB communication mode 31  
USB pin assignments 92  
V
verify previous commands completed 111  
voltage conversion circuitry 89  
W
wall mounting feature, single-station printers 23  
warranty information, all models  
5
Web site, IBM Retail Store Solutions 44  
weight, all models 10  
where to order supplies 81  
218 SureMark Printers User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Readers’ Comments — We’d Like to Hear from You  
SureMark 4610 Printers  
User’s Guide for  
Models TI1, TI2, TI3, TI4, TI8, TI9, TG3, TG4, TG8, TG9, TF6, and TM6  
Publication No. GA27-4151-07  
We appreciate your comments about this publication. Please comment on specific errors or omissions, accuracy,  
organization, subject matter, or completeness of this book. The comments you send should pertain to only the  
information in this manual or product and the way in which the information is presented.  
For technical questions and information about products and prices, please contact your IBM branch office, your IBM  
business partner, or your authorized remarketer.  
When you send comments to IBM, you grant IBM a nonexclusive right to use or distribute your comments in any  
way it believes appropriate without incurring any obligation to you. IBM or any other organizations will only use the  
personal information that you supply to contact you about the issues that you state on this form.  
Comments:  
Thank you for your support.  
Send your comments to the address on the reverse side of this form.  
If you would like a response from IBM, please fill in the following information:  
Name  
Address  
Company or Organization  
Phone No.  
E-mail address  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Cut or Fold  
Along Line  
Readers’ Comments — We’d Like to Hear from You  
GA27-4151-07  
ꢀꢁꢂ  
Fold and Tape  
Please do not staple  
Fold and Tape  
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _  
NO POSTAGE  
NECESSARY  
IF MAILED IN THE  
UNITED STATES  
BUSINESS REPLY MAIL  
FIRST-CLASS MAIL PERMIT NO. 40 ARMONK, NEW YORK  
POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY ADDRESSEE  
IBM Corporation  
Dept ZBDA/Bldg. 307  
P. O. Box 12195  
Research Triangle Park, NC 27709-9990  
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _  
Fold and Tape  
Please do not staple  
Fold and Tape  
Cut or Fold  
Along Line  
GA27-4151-07  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ꢀꢁꢂ  
Updated April 2, 2009  
GA27-4151-07  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Graco Inc Paint Sprayer 222625 User Manual
Graco Inc Pressure Washer 2104E User Manual
Haier Flat Panel Television LE55F32800 User Manual
Haier Freezer DW 40L508 User Manual
Haier Refrigerator HVFE024BBB User Manual
Hasbro Games 59307 User Manual
HP Hewlett Packard Laptop 4310S User Manual
HP Hewlett Packard Personal Computer t5520 User Manual
HP Hewlett Packard Stereo System B User Manual
HP Hewlett Packard Weather Radio B User Manual